Enteric viruses, EPA/600/R-95/178, s. VIII Reference

United States Office of Research and EPA/600/R-95/178
Environmental Protection Development April 1996
Agency Washington DC 20460

 

ICR Microbial Laboratory

Manual

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ICR MICROBIAL LABORATORY  MANUAL

 

 

 

 

 

by

 

  1. Shay Fout, Ph.D., Frank W. Schaefer III, Ph.D., James W. Messer, Ph.D., Daniel R. Dahling and Ronald E. Stetler

Biohazard Assessment Research Branch Human Exposure Research Division Cincinnati, Ohio 45268

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NATIONAL EXPOSURE RESEARCH LABORATORY OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT

U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY CINCINNATI, OHIO 45268

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NOTICE

 

The ICR Microbial Laboratory Manual was prepared by the authors in response to a request from the Office of Water for support in ICR implementation. The methods and laboratory approval components contained in the manual were based upon consensus agreements reached at several workshops attended by industry, academia and U.S. EPA personnel and input from the ICR Microbiology Implementation team, which consisted of U.S. EPA personnel from the Office of Research and Develop- ment, Office of Water and representatives from Regional Offices. The manual has been peer reviewed by experts outside of U.S. EPA in accordance with the policy of the Office of Research and Development. Mention of trade names or commercial products does not constitute endorsement or recommendation for use.

 

 

 

 

 

 

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

 

The contributions from Robert S. Safferman, Robert H. Bordner and John A. Winter, the helpful suggestions from members of the ICR Microbiology Implementation Team, the graphical support of Fred P. Williams Jr. and the secretarial assistance of Mary Ann Schmitz and Cordelia Nowell are greatly appreciated.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ii

 

SECTION VIII. VIRUS MONITORING PROTOCOL FOR THE ICR TABLE OF CONTENTS

FOREWORD  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-3

 

PART 1 — SAMPLE COLLECTION PROCEDURE  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-4

APPARATUS AND MATERIALS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-4

MEDIA AND REAGENTS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-11

PROCEDURE  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-12

 

PART 2 — SAMPLE PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-16 QUALITY CONTROL AND PERFORMANCE EVALUATION SAMPLES . . VIII-16 QC Samples  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-16

PE Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-16

ELUTION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-17

Apparatus and Materials  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-17

Media and Reagents  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-17

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-18 ORGANIC FLOCCULATION CONCENTRATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . VIII-19 Apparatus and Materials  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-19

Media and Reagents  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-20

Procedure  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-20

 

PART 3 — TOTAL CULTURABLE VIRUS ASSAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-23 QUANTAL ASSAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-23

Apparatus and Materials  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-23

Media and Reagents  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-23

Sample Inoculation and CPE Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-23 Virus Quantitation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-27 REDUCTION OF CYTOTOXICITY IN SAMPLE CONCENTRATES . . . . . . . VIII-28 Media and Reagents  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-28

Procedure for Cytotoxicity Reduction  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-29

 

PART 4 — CELL CULTURE PREPARATION AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . VIII-30 PREPARATION OF CELL CULTURE MEDIUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-30 General Principles  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-30

Apparatus and Materials  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-30

Media and Reagents  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-32

Media Preparation Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-32 PREPARATION AND PASSAGE OF BGM CELL CULTURES . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-35

Vessels and Media for Cell Growth  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-35

General Procedure for Cell Passage  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-35

 

VIII-1

 

Procedure For Performing Viable Cell Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-37 PROCEDURE FOR PRESERVATION OF BGM CELL LINE  . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-38

Preparation of Cells for Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-38

Procedure for Freezing Cells  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-39

Procedure for Thawing Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-39

 

PART 5 — STERILIZATION AND DISINFECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-40 GENERAL GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-40

STERILIZATION TECHNIQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-40 Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-40

Autoclavable Glassware, Plasticware, and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-40 Chlorine Sterilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-41 PROCEDURE FOR VERIFYING STERILITY OF LIQUIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-41 Media and Reagents  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-42

Verifying Sterility of Small Volumes of Liquids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-42 Visual Evaluation of Media for Microbial Contaminants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-42 CONTAMINATED MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-42

 

PART 6 — BIBLIOGRAPHY AND SUGGESTED READING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-43 PART 7 — VENDORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-46

PART 8 — EXAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-48

EXAMPLE 1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-48

EXAMPLE 2  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-56

 

PART 9 — DATA SHEETS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII-63

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

VIII-2

 

FOREWORD

 

The surface water treatment rule (40 CFR Part 141) established the maximum contam- ination level for enteric virus in public water systems by requiring that systems using surface water or ground water under the influence of surface water reduce the amount of virus in source water by 99.99%. The rule requirements are currently met on basis of treatment alone (e.g., disinfection and/or filtration), and thus the degree of actual protection against waterborne viral disease depends upon the source water quality. Utilities using virus-free source water or source water with low virus levels may be overtreating their water, while utilities using highly contaminated water may not be providing adequate protection. To determine more adequately the level of protection from virus infection and to reduce the levels of disinfection and disinfection byproducts, where appropriate, the U.S. EPA is requiring all utilities serving a population of over 100,000 to monitor their source water for viruses monthly for a period of 18 months. Systems finding greater than one infectious enteric virus particle per liter of source water must also monitor their finished water on a monthly basis. The authority for this requirement is Section 1445(a)(1) of the Safe Drinking Water Act, as amended in 1986.

 

This Virus Monitoring Protocol was developed by virologists at the U.S. EPA and modified to reflect consensus agreements from the scientific community and comments to the draft rule. The procedures contained herein do not preclude the use of additional tests for research purposes (e.g., polymerase chain reaction-based detection methods for non-cytopathic viruses).

 

The concentrated water samples to be monitored may contain pathogenic human enteric viruses. Laboratories performing virus analyses are responsible for establishing an adequate safety plan and must rigorously follow the guidelines on sterilization and aseptic techniques given in Part 5.

 

Analytical Reagent or ACS grade chemicals (unless specified otherwise) and deionized or distilled reagent grade water (dH2O; see Table IV-1) should be used to prepare all media and reagents.  The dH2O must have a resistance of greater than 0.5 megohms-cm at 25  C, but water with a resistance of 18 megohms-cm is preferred.  Water and other reagent solutions may be available commercially. For any given section of this protocol only apparatus, materials, media and reagents that are not described in previous sections are listed, except where deemed necessary. The amount of media prepared for each Part of the Protocol may be increased proportionally to the number of samples to be analyzed.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

VIII-3

 

PART 1 — SAMPLE COLLECTION PROCEDURE

 

APPARATUS AND MATERIALS

Several configurations are given below for the assembly of the filter apparatus. The standard filter apparatus will be used for all sampling, except where a prefilter, dechlorination or pH adjustment are required.

 

  1. Standard filter apparatus (see Figure VIII-1).

 

  1. Parts needed (letters in bold print represent the origin of the abbreviations used to identify parts in the figures):

 

  1. One BR — Backflow Regulator (Watts Regulator1 Product Series 8 — ¾” Hose Connection Vacuum Breaker).

 

  1. One SF — Swivel Female insert with garden hose threads (United States Plastic Product No. 63003).

 

  • Three sections of BT — Braided Tubing, ½” clear (Cole-Parmer Product No. G- 06401-03).

 

  1. Six HC1 — Hose Clamps (Cole-Parmer Product No. G-06403-20).

 

  1. One HF1 — Hose Fitting, nylon,     ” male NPT × ½” tubing ID (United States Plastic Product No. 61141).

 

  1. One PR — Pressure Regulator (Watts Regulator Product No.      ” 26A (or 263A), Suffix B).

 

  • One PN — PVC Nipple,    ” male NPT (Ryan Herco Product No. 3861-057; not required with the 263A regulator).

 

  • One TE — PVC TEE with    ” female NPT ports (Ryan Herco Product No. 3805-003; not required with the 263A regulator).

 

  1. One RB1 — Reducing Bushing,    ” NPT(M) × ¼” NPT(F) (Cole-Parmer Product No. G-06349-32; not required with the 263A regulator).

 

 

 

1See Part 7 for addresses of the vendors listed. The vendors listed in this protocol represent one possible source for required products. Other vendors may supply the same or equivalent products.

 

VIII-4

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Figure VIII-1.

Standard Filter Apparatus

 

  1. One PG — Pressure Gauge 0-30 pound per square inch (PSI; Cole-Parmer Product No. G-68004-03; place in ¼” gauge port if using the 263A regulator).

 

  1. One RA — Reducing Adaptor, ½” female NPT ×    ” male NPT (Cincinnati Valve and Fitting Product No. SS-8-RA-6).

 

  • One MQ1 — Male Quick Connect, ½” male NPT (Cincinnati Valve and Fitting Product No. SS-QF8-S-8PM; appropriate hose fittings and braided tubing can be substituted for quick connects).

 

  • Two FQ1 — Female Quick Connects, ½” female NPT (Cincinnati Valve and Fitting Product No. SS-QF8-B-8PF).

 

  • Two RN1 — Reducing Nipples, ¾” male NPT × ½” male NPT (Cole-Parmer Product No. G-06349-35).

 

  1. One CH — Cartridge Housing with wench (Cuno Product No. AP11T).

 

  • One FC — Filter Cartridge, positively charged 1MDS, ZetaPor Virosorb (Cuno Product No. 45144-01-1MDS).

 

  • One MQ2 — Male Quick Connect, ½” female NPT (Cincinnati Valve and Fitting Product No. SS-QF8-S-8PF).

 

  • One HF2 — Hose Fitting, ½” male NPT × ½”tubing ID (United States Plastic Product No. 62142).

 

  • One WM — Water Meter (Neptune Equipment Product No.      ” Trident 10). The water meter should be used in a horizontal position and protected from freezing. The order should specify that the meters be rated in gallons (1 gal = 0.1337 ft3 or 3.7854 L). If not specified, meters may be rated in cubic feet (1 ft 3

= 7.481 gal or 28.316 L).

 

  1. One HF3 — Hose Fitting, nylon, ¾” male NPT × ½” tubing ID (United States Plastic Product No. 61143).

 

  • One FV — Flow Control Valve (Plast-O-Matic Valves Product No. FC075B-3- PVC).

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

VIII-6

 

  1. Apparatus assembly — the standard filter apparatus consists of three modules: the regulator module, the cartridge housing module and the discharge module.

Teflon tape (Cole-Parmer Product No. G-08782-27) must be used on all threaded, non-compression fittings. It is recommended that apparatus assembly be performed by the analytical laboratory contracted by the utility to analyze ICR samples for viruses).

 

  1. Regulator module — in order, as shown in Figure VIII-1, connect the backflow regulator (BR) to a swivel female insert (SF). Clamp a piece of braided tubing (BT) onto the tubing connector of the swivel female insert using a hose clamp (HC1). Clamp the other end of the tubing to a                                                              × ½” hose fitting (HF1). Screw the fitting into the inlet of the pressure regulator (PR). Connect the outlet of the pressure regulator to the PVC TEE (TE) via a PVC nipple (PN). Connect the pressure gauge (PG) to the top of the PVC TEE using the reducing bushing (RB). Attach a reducing adaptor (RA) to the remaining connection on the PVC TEE. Add a male quick connect (MQ1) to the reducing adaptor.

 

  1. Cartridge housing module — Attach a female quick connect (FQ1) to a reducing nipple (RN1). Connect the reducing nipple to the inlet of the cartridge housing (CH).  Attach another reducing nipple to the outlet of the housing.  Attach a male quick connect (MQ2) to the reducing adaptor.

 

  • Discharge module — attach a female quick connect (FQ1) to a hose fitting (HF2). Connect a piece of braided tubing to the hose fitting with a hose clamp (HC1). Clamp the other end of the braided tubing to a swivel female insert with another hose clamp. Attach a swivel female insert to the inlet of the water meter (WM).  Attach another swivel female insert to the outlet of the meter and connect a piece of braided tubing with a hose clamp. Clamp the other end of the tubing to a hose fitting (HF3) with a hose clamp. Screw the fitting into the inlet of the flow control valve (FV). An additional hose fitting (not shown) may be added to the flow control valve for the attachment of a sufficient length of tubing to reach a drain. The discharge module does not have to be sterilized.

 

  1. Connect the cartridge housing module to the regulator module at the quick connect. The combined regulator and cartridge housing modules should be sterilized with chlorine as described in Part 5. Presterilize a 1MDS filter cartridge (FC) as described in Part 5 and place it into the cartridge housing using aseptic technique. Replace the housing head of the cartridge housing and tighten with a cartridge housing wench. Check to ensure that the filter is adequately sealed by shaking the housing. Adequately sealed filters should not move. For convenience during shipping, the regulator and cartridge housing modules may be separated. Seal all openings into the modules with sterile aluminum foil.

 

 

 

VIII-7

 

  1. Prefilter module for waters exceeding 75 nephelometric turbidity units (NTU) and for any other conditions that prevent the minimum sampling volumes from being obtained (see Figure VIII-2).

 

  1. Additional parts needed: One PC — 10 µm Polypropylene Prefilter Cartridge (Parker Hannifin Product No. M19R10-A); in addition, a female quick connect (FQ1), two reducing nipples (RN1), a cartridge housing (CH) and a male quick connect (MQ2) as described for the standard apparatus are needed.

 

  1. Module assembly — in order, as shown for the prefilter module in Figure VIII-2, attach a female quick connect (FQ1) to a reducing nipple (RN1). Connect the reducing nipple to the inlet of the cartridge housing (CH). Attach another reducing nipple to the outlet of the housing. Attach a male quick connect (MQ2) to the reducing adaptor. Sterilize the unit with chlorine as described in Part 5 and add a presterilized polypropy- lene prefilter cartridge using aseptic technique. Cover the ends with sterile aluminum foil. The prefilter module may be sent to the utility and stored in a clean location until needed.

 

  1. Injector modules for source or finished water requiring pH reduction and for finished waters requiring dechlorination (see Figure VIII-2).

 

  1. Additional parts needed:

 

  1. Two FQ2 — Female Quick Connects, ½” male NPT (Cincinnati Valve and Fitting Product No. SS-QF8-B-8PM).

 

  1. Four ME — Male Elbows,     ” male NPT (Cincinnati Valve and Fitting Product No. SS-6-ME).

 

  • Two RN2 — Reducing Nipples,    ” male NPT × ½” male NPT (Cole-Parmer Product No. G-6349-85).

 

  1. Two RB2 — Reducing Bushings,    ” female NPT × ½” male NPT (Cole- Parmer Product No. G-06349-34).

 

  1. Three IN — In-line INjectors (DEMA Engineering Product No. 203B    ” female NPT; a metering pump and appropriate connectors may be substituted for an injector).

 

  1. Three HC2 — Hose Clamps (Cole-Parmer Product No. G-06403-10).

 

 

 

 

 

VIII-8

 

 

Figure VIII-2. Additional Modules for the Standard Filter Apparatus

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • In addition, four reducing adaptors (RA), four PVC TEEs (TE), two PVC nipples (PN), two reducing bushings (RB1), two pressure gauges (PG), two female quick connects (FQ1), two male quick connects (MQ1) and two male quick connects (MQ2) as described for the standard apparatus are needed. Two union ball joints,         ” female NPT (not shown; Cincinnati Valve and Fitting Product No. SS-6-UBJ) and two PVC nipples may be used in place of the two reducing nipples (RN2), male quick connects (MQ2), female quick connects (FQ1) and reducing bushings (RB2) used with the double injector module.

 

  1. Module assembly:

 

  1. Single Injector Module — assemble the parts in order as shown for the single injector module in Figure VIII-2. Attach a female quick connect (FQ2) to a reducing adaptor (RA). Connect the adaptor to the inlet of the injector (IN). Connect the outlet of the injector to a PVC TEE (TE) via a PVC nipple (PN). Connect a pressure gauge (PG) to the top of the PVC TEE using a reducing bushing (RB1). Attach a reducing adaptor (RA) to the remaining connection on the PVC TEE. Add a male quick connect (MQ1) to the reducing adaptor.

 

  1. Double Injector Module — assemble the parts as shown for the double injector module in Figure VIII-2. Assemble the main portion by attaching a female quick connect (FQ2) to a reducing adaptor (RA). Connect the adaptor to the top connector of a PVC TEE (TE). Add a male elbow (ME) to one of the connec- tions on the PVC TEE. Attach a reducing nipple (RN2) to the other connection. If using a union ball joint in place of the quick connects, attach a PVC nipple (not shown) to the other connection. Add a male quick connect (MQ2) to the reducing nipple or add one portion of a union ball joint (not shown) to the PVC nipple. Connect the inlet side of an injector (IN) to the male elbow. Attach another male elbow to the outlet of the injector. Connect the male elbow to another PVC TEE. Connect a reducing nipple (RN2 or PVC nipple) to the other end of the second PVC TEE. Add a male quick connect (MQ2) to the reducing nipple as above (or add one portion of the second union ball joint to the PVC nipple). Connect the top connector of the second PVC TEE to a third PVC TEE via a PVC nipple (PN). Connect a pressure gauge (PG) to the top of the third PVC TEE using a reducing bushing (RB1). Attach a reducing adaptor (RA) to the remaining connection on the third PVC TEE. Add a male quick connect (MQ1) to the reducing adaptor. Attach two male elbows (ME) to the inlet and outlet of a second injector (IN). Connect two reducing bushings (RB2) or, if used, the bottom portion or the two union ball joints (not shown) to the male elbows.  Connect a female quick connect (FQ1) to each reducing bushing. Orient the second injector so that the direction of flow is the same as the first injector (the arrows on the injectors should both point towards the pressure gauge side of the assembly). Connect the two female quick connects to the male

 

 

VIII-10

 

quick connects of the main portion to complete the assembly or, if used, connect the two portions of the union ball joints.

 

  • Sterilize the single and double modules with chlorine as described in Part 5. Cover the ends, including the injector port, with sterile aluminum foil. Sterilize the inside and outside surfaces of the Injector Tubing (IT; injector tubing is sup- plied with each injector). Place the tubing in a sterile bag or wrapping in such a way that the ends may be removed without contaminating them. The injector modules may be shipped to the utility and stored in a clean location until needed.

 

  1. Portable pH probe (Omega Product No. PHH-1X)

 

  1. Portable temperature probe (Omega Product No. HH110).

 

  1. Commercial ice packs (Cole-Parmer Product No. L-06346-85).

 

  1. One liter polypropylene wide-mouth bottles (Nalge Product No. 2104-0032).

 

  1. Insulated shipping box with carrying strap (17″ × 17″ × 13″; Cole-Parmer Product No. L- 03748-00 and L-03742-30).

 

  1. Miscellaneous — aluminum foil, data card (see Part 9), hosecock clamp, surgical gloves, screwdriver or pliers for clamps, waterproof marker.

 

  1. Chemical resistant pump capable of supplying 30 PSI at 3 gal/min and appropriate connectors (for use where garden hose-type pressurized taps for the source or finished water to be monitored are unavailable and for QC samples). Follow the manufacturer’s recommenda- tions for pump priming.

 

MEDIA AND REAGENTS

 

  1. 2% sodium thiosulfate (Na2S2O3) — dissolve 100 g of Na2S2O3 in a total of 5000 mL dH2O to prepare a stock solution. Autoclave for 30 min at 121 C.

 

  1. Hydrochloric acid (HCl) — Prepare 0.1, 1 and 5 M solutions by mixing 50, 100 or 50 mL of concentrated HCl with 4950, 900 or 50 mL of dH2O, respectively. Prepare solutions to be used for adjusting the pH of water samples at least 24 h before use.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

VIII-11

 

PROCEDURE

 

Operators must wear surgical gloves and avoid conditions that can contaminate a sample with virus. Gloves should be changed after touching human skin or handling compo- nents that may be contaminated (e.g., water taps, other environmental surfaces).

 

Step 1.     Purge the water tap to be sampled before connecting the filter apparatus. Continue the purging for 3-3 min or until any debris that has settled in the tap line has cleared. Then turn off the water tap.

Source water sampling must be conducted at the plant intake, before impoundment, chlorination or any other treatment. Finished water sampling must be conducted at the point of entry into the distribution system. If it is necessary to use a pump for sampling, sterilize the pump with chlorine as described in Part 5 or flush with 20 gal of water to be sampled before each use.

 

Step 2.     Remove the foil from the backflow regulator (see Figure VIII-1) on a regulator module. Loosen the swivel female insert slightly to allow it to turn freely and connect the backflow regulator to the tap. Retighten the swivel female insert. Disconnect the cartridge housing module at the quick connect following the pressure gauge (the insertion point shown in Figure VIII-1), if connected, and cover the open ends leading into the modules with sterile foil.

 

Step 3.     Remove the foil from the ends of the discharge module and from the free end of the regulator module. Connect the discharge module to the regulator module. Place the control flow valve or tubing connected to the outlet of the flow control valve into a one liter plastic bottle. Note that the injector module, the prefilter module and the cartridge housing module must not be attached to the apparatus at this stage of the procedure!

 

Step 4.     Slowly turn on the tap and adjust the pressure regulator until the pressure gauge on the regulator module reads 30 PSI. If the tap is incapable of 30 PSI, adjust the regulator to achieve the maximum pressure. Pressures less than 30 PSI will result in a reduced flow rate and thus longer sampling times. Flush the apparatus assembly with at least 20 gal of the water to be sampled. While the system is being flushed, measure the pH, the temperature and the turbidity on the water collecting in and overflowing from the one liter plastic bottle.  Record the values onto the Sample Data Sheet (see Part 9).

The pH meter should be calibrated before each use for the pH range of the water to be sampled.

The turbidity reading may be taken from an in-line turbidimeter connected to the tap being used.

 

Step 5.     If the sample has a pH above 8.0 or contains a disinfectant, turn off the water at the tap and disconnect the discharge module from the regulator module. Remove the foil from the

 

 

 

VIII-12

 

ends of a single injector module (see Figure VIII-2) and connect the module to the male quick connect of the regulator module. Reattach the discharge module.

 

Step 6.     If the sample has a pH above 8.0 and contains a disinfectant, turn off the water at the tap and disconnect the discharge module from the regulator module. Remove the foil from the ends of a double injector module (see Figure VIII-2) and connect the module to the male quick connect of the regulator module. Reattach the discharge module.

 

Step 7. If an injector module has been added, remove the foil from the injector port(s) and attach the injector tubing to each port. Add a hosecock clamp to each injector tubing and tighten completely to prevent flow into the injector(s). Turn the fine metering adjustment screw on each injector (the smaller screw) clockwise as far as it will go to minimize the flow rate until the injectors are adjusted (note that the injectors were designed to have a minimum flow rate of 20-30 mL/min; thus completely closing the fine metering adjustment screw does not stop the flow). Place the other end of each tubing into the appropriate sterile graduated container containing 0.1 M HCl or 2% thiosulfate. Take care not to touch or contaminate the surfaces of the injector tubing that will be placed in the graduated containers. Slowly turn on the tap again and readjust the pressure regulator, if necessary.

 

Step 8.     If a single injector module has been added, continue to flush the apparatus and adjust the water bypass screw on the injector (the larger adjustment screw) until the pressure gauge on the injector module is about 35% less than the pressure gauge on the regulator module (e.g., 19 PSI when the gauge on the regulator module reads 30 PSI; a minimum of a 35% pressure drop is required to achieve suction). Loosen the hosecock clamp and observe whether suction is occurring. If not, slowly increase the pressure drop until suction starts.

 

  1. If the pH value of the water sample is greater than 8.0, ensure that the injector tubing is placed into a graduated container containing 0.1 M HCl. While continuing to measure the pH in the one liter plastic bottle, adjust the fine metering adjustment screw on the injector to add sufficient HCl to give a pH of 6.5 to 7.5. It may be necessary to use the hosecock clamp to reduce the flow rate to less than 20-30 mL/min or to use a more dilute or concentrated HCl solution with some water samples. When the pH stabilizes at a pH of

6.5 to 7.5, continue with Step 10. Record the adjusted pH onto the Sample Data Sheet.

 

  1. If the water to be sampled contains a disinfectant, ensure that the injector tubing is placed into a graduated container containing 2% thiosulfate. Adjust the fine metering adjustment screw on the injector to add thiosulfate at a rate of 10 mL/gal (2.6 mL/L or 30 mL/min at a flow rate of 3 gal/min; note that at this rate, approximately 3-4 L of thio- sulfate solution will be required per sample). When the proper rate is achieved, record the addition of thiosulfate on the Sample Data Sheet and continue with Step 10.

 

Step 9.     If a double injector module is being used, continue to flush the apparatus and turn the water bypass screws on each injector clockwise as far as possible. Then turn the water

 

 

VIII-13

 

bypass screws on each regulator one half turn counter clockwise. Continue turning the screws evenly one half turn counter clockwise until the pressure gauge on the double injector module is 35% less than the pressure gauge on the regulator module. Ensure that the tubing from one injector is placed into a graduated container containing 0.1 M HCl and the other into a graduated container containing 2% sodium thiosulfate. Loosen the hosecock clamps. Since there may be slight differences between the injectors and since the pressure reading after the injectors reflects an average pressure drop from both injectors, some additional adjustment of the water bypass screws may be required to obtain suction on each injector. After confirming that each injector is drawing fluid, adjust the flow of HCl and thiosulfate as in Step 8a-8b above. Record the final pH and the addition of thiosulfate on the Sample Data Sheet and continue with Step 10.

 

Step 10. After adjusting the injectors, if required, and flushing the system with at least 20 gal, turn off the flow of water at the sample tap and remove the discharge module. If the water sample has a turbidity greater than 75 NTU, remove the foil from each end of the prefilter module and connect the prefilter module (see Figure VIII-2) to the end of the regulator module or to the end of one of the injector modules, if used.  Remove the foil from the cartridge housing module and connect it to the end of the regulator module, or to the end of the injector module or the prefilter module, if used. Connect the discharge module to the cartridge housing module.

 

Step 11. Record the sample number, location, date, time of day and initial gallon (or cubic feet) reading from the water meter onto the Sample Data Sheet.

Use the unique utility-specific sample numbers assigned by the ICR Joint Application Design database.

 

Step 12. Slowly turn on the water with the filter housing placed in an upright position, while pushing the red vent button on top of the filter housing to expel air. When the air is totally expelled from the housing, release the button, and open the sample tap completely. Readjust to 30 PSI, if necessary. Check the thiosulfate usage rate or the pH of the discharged water if an injector(s) is being used and readjust, if necessary.

 

Step 13. Sample a minimum volume for source water of 200 L (7.1 ft3, 52.8 gal) and for finished water of 1500 L (53.0 ft3, 396.3 gal). Samples for source and finished waters must not exceed 300 L (10.6 ft3, 79.3 gal) and 1800 L (63.6 ft3, 475.5 gal), respectively. For source water the total amount of sample that can be passed through a filter will depend upon water quality, however, it should be possible to obtain the minimum volume using the procedures described above.

Samples should be monitored periodically during the sampling. If the filter clogs, contact the approved analyst for further instructions. Since the flow rate may change during sampling due to filter clogging, thiosulfate addition and the adjusted pH of the sample must be checked regularly.

 

 

 

VIII-14

 

Step 14. Turn off the flow of water at the sample tap at the end of the sampling period and record the date, time of day, and final gallon (or cubic feet) reading from the water meter onto the Sample Data Sheet. Although the final water meter reading may be affected by the addi- tion of HCl and/or thiosulfate, the effect is considered insignificant and may be ignored.

 

Step 15. Loosen the swivel female insert on the regulator module and disconnect the backflow regulator from the tap. Disconnect the cartridge housing module and the prefilter housing module, if used from the other modules. Turn the filter housing(s) upside down and allow excess water to flow out as waste water. Turn the housing(s) upright and cover the quick connects on each end of the modules with sterile aluminum foil.

 

Step 16. Pack the cartridge housing module(s) into an insulated shipping box. Add 6-8 small ice packs (prefrozen at -20 C) around the cartridge housings to keep the sample cool in transit (the number of ice packs may have to be adjusted based upon experience to ensure that the samples remain cold, but not frozen). Drain and add the regulator and injector modules used. Place the Sample Data Sheet (protected with a closable plastic bag) in with the sample and ship by overnight courier to the contracted, approved laboratory for virus analysis. Notify the laboratory by phone upon the shipment of sample.

The approved laboratory will elute virus from the 1MDS filter (and prefilter, if appropri- ate) and analyze the eluates as described in Parts 2-3. After removing the filter, the laboratory will clean, sterilize the apparatus components with chlorine and dechlorinate with sodium thiosulfate as described in Part 5.  After flushing with sterile dH2O, a new 1MDS cartridge (and prefilter, if appropriate) will be added, the openings sealed with sterile aluminum foil, and the apparatus returned to the utility for the next sample. The discharge module can be stored at the utility between samplings.  Openings should be covered with aluminum foil during storage.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

VIII-15

 

PART 2 — SAMPLE PROCESSING

 

QUALITY CONTROL AND PERFORMANCE EVALUATION SAMPLES

 

Quality control (QC) and performance evaluation (PE) samples will be shipped to analysts seeking approval (see Sections III-IV). PE samples must be successfully analyzed by each analyst participating in the ICR virus monitoring program as part of the initial approval process. After initial approval, each analyst must successfully analyze one QC sample set per sample batch and one PE sample set every month. A QC sample set is comprised of a negative and a positive QC sample.  A sample batch consists of all the ICR samples that are analyzed by an analyst during a single week. Each sample batch and its associated QC sample set must be assigned a unique batch number. QC samples do not have to be processed during weekly periods when no ICR samples are processed. QC and PE data should be sent directly to the

U.S. EPA as specified in Section III.

 

QC Samples:

 

  1. Negative QC Sample: Place a sterile 1MDS filter into a standard filter apparatus.

Process and analyze the 1MDS filter using the Elution, Organic Flocculation and Total Culturable Virus Assay procedures given below.

 

  1. Positive QC Sample: Place 40 L of dH2O into a sterile polypropylene container (Cole- Parmer Product No. G-06063-32) and add 1 mL of a QC stock of attenuated poliovirus containing 200 PFU/mL2. Mix and pump the water through a standard filter apparatus containing a 1MDS filter.

Process and analyze the 1MDS filter using the Elution, Organic Flocculation and Total Culturable Virus Assay procedures given below.

 

PE Samples:

Process and analyze PE samples according to the Elution, Organic Flocculation and Total Culturable Virus Assay procedures of this protocol and according to any additional procedures supplied with the samples.

 

 

 

 

 

 

2A QC sample with a titer of 200 PFU/mL will be supplied for the QC tests described in this Section. The titer of this QC sample may be changed before the start or during the testing phase of the ICR. Analysts must use these samples as supplied and not attempt to adjust the titer to 200 PFU/mL.  A high titer QC sample will also be shipped to each  analyst so that laboratories can develop their own internal QC programs. The high titered sample is not to be used for the QC tests described in this   Section.

 

VIII-16

 

ELUTION PROCEDURE

 

The cartridge filters must arrive from the utility in a refrigerated, but not frozen, condi- tion. The arrival condition should be recorded on the Sample Data Sheet (Part 9). Filters should be refrigerated upon arrival and eluted within 72 h of the start of the sample collection.

 

Apparatus and Materials:

 

  1. Positive pressure air or nitrogen source equipped with a pressure gauge.

If the pressure source is a laboratory air line or pump, it must be equipped with an oil filter.

 

  1. Dispensing pressure vessels — 5 or 20 liter capacity (Millipore Corp. Product No. XX67 00P 05 and XX67 00P 20).

 

  1. pH meter with combination-type electrode and an accuracy of at least 0.1 pH unit.

 

  1. Autoclavable inner-braided tubing with screw clamps or quick connects for connecting tubing to equipment.

 

  1. Magnetic stirrer and stir bars.

 

Media and Reagents:

 

  1. Sodium hydroxide (NaOH) — prepare 1 M and 5 M solutions by dissolving 4 g or 20 g of NaOH in a final volume of 100 mL of dH2O, respectively.

NaOH solutions may be stored for several months at room temperature.

 

  1. Beef extract V powder (BBL Microbiology Systems Product No. 97531) — prepare buffered 1.5% beef extract by dissolving 30 g of beef extract powder and 7.5 g of glycine (final glycine concentration = 0.05 M) in 1.9 L of dH2O. Adjust the pH to 9.5 with 1 or 5 M NaOH and bring the final volume to 2 L with dH2O. Autoclave at 121 C for 15 min and use at room temperature.

Beef extract solutions may be stored for one week at 4 C or for longer periods at -20 C. Screen each new lot of beef extract before use in the Organic Flocculation Concentration

Procedure to determine whether virus recoveries are adequate. Perform the screening by spiking one liter of beef extract solution with 1 mL of a diluted QC sample containing 200 PFU/mL. Assay the spiked sample according to the Organic Flocculation and Total Culturable Virus Assay procedures given below. Use a single passage with undiluted sample and sample diluted 1:5 and 1:25 along with an equivalent positive control. The mean recovery of poliovirus for three trials should be at least 50%.

 

 

 

 

VIII-17

 

Procedure:

Place a disinfectant-soaked sponge over vents while releasing trapped air or pressure throughout this procedure to minimize dangers from aerosols.

 

Step 1. Attach sections of braided tubing (sterilized on inside and outside surfaces with chlorine and dechlorinated with thiosulfate as described in Part 5) to the inlet and outlet ports of a cartridge housing module containing a 1MDS filter to be tested for viruses. If a prefilter was used, keep the prefilter and cartridge housing modules connected and attach the tubing to the inlet of the prefilter module and to the outlet of the cartridge housing module.

 

Step 2. Place the sterile end of the tubing connected to the outlet of the cartridge housing module into a sterile two liter glass or polypropylene beaker.

 

Step 3. Connect the free end of the tubing from the inlet port of the prefilter or cartridge housing modules to the outlet port of a sterile pressure vessel and connect the inlet port of the pressure vessel to a positive air pressure source. Add pressure to blow out any residual water from the cartridge housing(s). Open the vent/relief valve to release the pressure.

 

Step 4. Remove the top of the pressure vessel and pour 1000 mL of buffered 1.5% beef extract (pH 9.5, prewarmed to room temperature) into the vessel. Replace the top of the pressure vessel and close its vent/relief valve.

Acceptable alternatives to the use of a pressure vessel include 1) the use of a peristaltic pump and sterile tubing to push the beef extract through the filter and 2) the addition of beef extract directly to the cartridge housing and the use of positive pressure to push the beef extract through the filter.

 

Step 5. Open the vent/relief valve(s) on the cartridge housing(s) and slowly apply sufficient pressure to purge trapped air from them. Close the vent/relief valve(s) as soon as the buffered beef extract solution begins to flow from it. Turn off the pressure and allow the solution to contact the 1MDS filter for 1 min.

Wipe up spilled liquid with disinfectant-soaked sponge. Carefully observe alternative housings without vents to ensure that all trapped air has been purged.

 

Step 6. Increase the pressure to force the buffered beef extract solution through the filter(s).

The solution should pass through the 1MDS filter slowly to maximize the elution contact period. When air enters the line from the pressure vessel, elevate and invert the filter housing to permit complete evacuation of the solution from the filters.

 

Step 7. Turn off the pressure at the source and open the vent/relief valve on the pressure vessel. Place the buffered beef extract from the two liter beaker back into the pressure vessel. Replace the top of the pressure vessel and close its vent/relief valve. Repeat Steps 5 – 6.

 

 

 

 

VIII-18

 

Step 8. Turn off the pressure at the source and open the vent/relief valve on the pressure vessel. Thoroughly mix the eluate. Adjust the pH of the eluate to 7.0-7.5 with 1 M HCl. If archiving is not required and if the optional coliphage assay is not performed, measure the volume of the eluate and record it onto the Virus Data Sheet as the Eluate Volume Recov- ered. Transfer the Total Sample Volume from the Sample Data Sheet to the Adjusted Total Sample Volume on the Virus Data Sheet.

 

Step 9. If archiving is required or if the optional coliphage assay (see Section IX. Coliphage Assay) will be performed, adjust the pH of the eluate to 7.0-7.5 with 1 M HCl. Measure the volume of the adjusted eluate and record it onto the Virus Data Sheet as the Eluate Volume Recovered. Determine the amount of sample to be used in the coliphage assay by multiplying the Eluate Volume Recovered by 0.035. Place a volume equal to the product obtained into a separate container and store at 4 C. If archiving is not required, multiply the Total Sample Volume from the Sample Data Sheet by 0.965 and record the product as the Adjusted Total Sample Volume on the Virus Data Sheet.

 

Step 10. If archiving is required, determine the amount of sample to remove for archiving by multiplying the Eluate Volume Recovered by 0.1. Record the product onto the Virus Data Sheet as the Volume of Eluate Archived and place this volume into a separate container.

Freeze3 the archive sample and ship it to the ICR Laboratory Coordinator, USEPA, TSD, 26

  1. Martin Luther King Drive, Cincinnati, OH 45268. Multiply the Total Sample Volume from the Sample Data Sheet by 0.865 if the optional coliphage assay is performed or by 0.9 if the sample was not assayed for coliphage. Record the product as the Adjusted Total Sample Volume on the Virus Data Sheet.

 

Step 11. Proceed to the Organic Flocculation Concentration Procedure immediately. If the Organic Flocculation Concentration Procedure cannot be undertaken immediately, store the eluate (adjusted to pH 7.0 to 7.5 as described in Step 8b) at 4 C for up to 24 h or for longer periods at -70 C.

 

ORGANIC FLOCCULATION CONCENTRATION PROCEDURE

 

Apparatus and Materials:

 

  1. Refrigerated centrifuge capable of attaining 2,500 – 10,000 ×g and screw-capped centri- fuge bottles with 100 to 1000 mL capacity.

 

 

3All freezing of samples and cell cultures throughout this protocol should be  performed rapidly by placing vessels in a freezer at -70 C or below or in a dry ice-alcohol bath. Frozen samples and cell cultures should also be thawed rapidly.  This may be done  by placing vessels in a 37 C waterbath, but vessel caps must not be immersed and vessels should be removed from the waterbath as soon as or just before the last ice crystals   melt.

 

VIII-19

 

Each bottle must be rated for the relative centrifugal force used.

 

  1. Sterilizing filter — 0.22 µm Acrodisc filter with prefilter (Gelman Sciences Product No. 4525).

Use sterilizing filter stacks on samples that clog commercial filters. Prepare sterilizing filter stacks using 0.22 µm pore size membrane filters (Millipore Corp. Product No.

GSWP 47 00) stacked with fiberglass prefilters (Millipore Corp. AP15 47 00 and AP20 47 00). Stack the prefilters and 0.22 µm membrane into a disc filter holder (Millipore Corp. Pro-

duct No. SX00 47 00) with the AP20 prefilter on top and 0.22 µm membrane filter on bottom. Disassemble the filter stack after each use to check the integrity of the 0.22 µm filter. Refilter any media filtered with a damaged stack.

Always pass about 10 – 20 mL of sterile beef extract, pH 7.0-7.5 (prepared as above, without pH adjustment), through the filter just before use. This step will reduce virus adsorp- tion onto the filter membranes.

 

Media and Reagents:

 

  1. Sodium phosphate, dibasic (Na2HPO4  7H2O) — 0.15 M, pH 9.0 – 9.5 or 7.0 – 7.5.

Dissolve 40.2 g of sodium phosphate in a final volume of 1000 mL dH2O. The pH of the solution should be between 9.0 – 9.5. Adjust the pH to 9.0 to 9.5 with NaOH, if necessary, or to

7.0 to 7.5 with HCl. Autoclave at 121 C for 15 min.

 

Procedure:

Minimize foaming (which may inactivate viruses) throughout the procedure by not stirring or mixing faster than necessary to develop a vortex.

 

Step 1.    Place a sterile stir bar into the beaker containing the buffered beef extract eluate from the cartridge filter(s). Place the beaker onto a magnetic stirrer, and stir at a speed sufficient to develop a vortex.

 

Step 2.    Insert a combination-type pH electrode into the beef extract eluate. Add 1 M HCl to the eluate slowly while moving the tip of the pipette in a circular motion away from the vortex to facilitate mixing. Continue adding 1 M HCl until the pH reaches 3.5 ± 0.1 and then stir slowly for 30 min at room temperature.

The pH meter must be standardized at pH 4 and 7. Electrodes must be sterilized before and after each use as described in Part 5.

A precipitate will form. If pH falls below 3.4, add 1 M NaOH to bring it back to 3.5 ± 0.1.

Exposure to a pH below 3.4 may result in some virus inactivation.

 

Step 3.    Remove the electrode from the beaker, and pour the contents of the beaker into a centrifuge bottle. Cap the bottle and centrifuge the precipitated beef extract suspension at 2,500 ×g for 15 min at 4 C. Remove and discard the supernatant.

 

 

 

VIII-20

 

To prevent the transfer of the stir bar into a centrifuge bottle, hold another stir bar or magnet against the bottom of the beaker while decanting the contents. The beef extract suspension will usually have to be divided into several centrifuge bottles.

 

Step 4.    Place a stir bar into the centrifuge bottle that contains the precipitate. Add 30 mL of

0.15 M sodium phosphate, pH 9.0 – 9.5. Place the bottle onto a magnetic stirrer, and stir slowly until the precipitate has dissolved completely.

Since the precipitate may be difficult to dissolve, it can be partially dispersed with a spatula before or during the stirring procedure. It may also be dissolved by repeated pipetting or by shaking at 160 rpm for 20 min on an orbital shaker in place of stirring. When the centrifugation is performed in more than one bottle, dissolve the precipitates in a total of 30 mL and combine into one bottle. If the precipitate is not completely dissolved before proceed- ing, significant virus loss may occur in Step 5. Because virus loss may also occur by pro- longed exposure to pH 9.0-9.5, laboratories that find it difficult to resuspend the precipitate may dissolve it initially in 0.15 M sodium phosphate, pH 7.0 – 7.5. If this variation is used, the pH should be re-adjusted to 9.0-9.5 with 1 M NaOH after the precipitate is completely dissolved and mixed for 10 min at room temperature before proceeding to Step 5.

 

Step 5.    Check the pH and readjust to 9.0-9.5 with 1 M NaOH, as necessary. Remove the stir bar and centrifuge the dissolved precipitate at 4,000 – 10,000 ×g for 10 min at 4  C.  Remove the supernatant and discard the pellet. Adjust the pH of the supernatant to 7.0-7.5 with 1 M HCl. To remove microbial contamination, load the supernatant into a 50 mL syringe and force it through a sterilizing filter pretreated with beef extract (laboratories may use other ap- proaches to remove contamination, but their effectiveness must be documented). Record the final supernatant (designated the Final Concentrated Sample Volume ; FCSV) on the Virus Data Sheet (see Part 9).

If the sterilizing filter begins to clog badly, empty the loaded syringe into the bottle containing the unfiltered supernatant, fill the syringe with air, and inject air into filter to force any residual sample from it. Continue the filtration procedure with another filter.

 

Step 6.    Determine the volume of sample that must be assayed. This volume is at least 100 L for source water or 1000 L for finished water and is designated the Volume of Original Water Sample Assayed4 (D). Record the value of D on the Virus Data Sheet. Calculate the Assay Sample Volume (S) for source and finished water samples using the formula:

 

 

S      D       ATSV

× FCSV

 

 

 

 

 

4Analytical laboratories assaying more than the required volume must use the actual volume to be assayed in the calculation. See Part 8 for examples of the calculations used  in this protocol.

 

VIII-21

 

where ATSV is the Adjusted Total Sample Volume from the Virus Data Sheet. The Assay Sample Volume is the volume of the Final Concentrated Sample that represents 100 L of source water or 1000 L of finished water. Record the Assay Sample Volume onto the Virus Data Sheet. Prepare a subsample (subsample 1) containing a volume 0.55 times the Assay Sample Volume. Prepare a second subsample (subsample 2) containing a volume that is 0.67 times the Assay Sample Volume. Divide the Final Concentrated Sample from QC and PE samples into two equal subsamples.  Calculate the Assay Sample Volume for these samples by multiplying FCSV by 0.4.  Label each subsample with appropriate sampling information for identification. Hold any portion of the sample that can be assayed within 24 h at 4 C and freeze all other portions at -70 C.

Final Concentrated Samples, subsamples, PE and QC samples processed to this point by a laboratory not doing the virus assay must be frozen at -70 C immediately and then shipped on dry ice to the laboratory approved for the virus assay.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

VIII-22

 

PART 3 — TOTAL CULTURABLE VIRUS ASSAY

 

QUANTAL ASSAY

 

Apparatus and Materials:

 

  1. Incubator capable of maintaining the temperature of cell cultures at 36.5 ± 1 C.

 

  1. Sterilizing filter — 0.22 µm (Costar Product No. 140666).

Always pass about 10 – 20 mL of 1.5% beef extract, pH 7.0-7.5, through the filter just before use to minimize virus adsorption to the filter.

 

Media and Reagents:

 

  1. Prepare BGM cell culture test vessels using standard procedures.

BGM cells are a continuous cell line derived from African Green monkey kidney cells and are highly susceptible to many enteric viruses (Dahling et al., 1984; Dahling and Wright, 1986).  The characteristics of this line were described by Barron et al. (1970).  The use of BGM cells for recovering viruses from environmental samples was described by Dahling et al. (1974). For laboratories with no experience with virus recovery from environmental samples, the media and procedures described by Dahling and Wright (1986) and given in Part 4 are recommended for maximum sensitivity.

EPA will supply an initial culture of BGM cells at about passage 117 to all laboratories seeking approval. Upon receipt, laboratories must prepare an adequate supply of frozen BGM cells using standard procedures to replace working cultures that become contaminated or lose virus sensitivity. A Procedure for Preservation of the BGM Cell Line is given in Part

  1. 4. Only BGM cells from the U.S. EPA and between passage 117 and 250 may be used for virus monitoring under the ICR.

 

Sample Inoculation and CPE Development:

Cell cultures used for virus assay are generally found to be at their most sensitive level between the third and sixth days after their most recent passage. Those older than seven days should not be used.

 

Step 1.    Identify cell culture test vessels by coding them with an indelible marker. Return the cell culture test vessels to a 36.5 ± 1 C incubator and hold at that temperature until the cell monolayer is to be inoculated.

 

Step 2.    Decant and discard the medium from cell culture test vessels. Wash the test vessels with a balanced salt solution or maintenance medium without serum using a wash volume of at least 0.06 mL/cm2 of surface area. Rock the wash medium over the surface of each monolayer several times and then decant and discard the wash medium.

Do not disturb the cell monolayer.

 

VIII-23

 

Step 3.    Determine the Inoculum Volume by dividing the Assay Sample Volume by 20. Record the Inoculum Volume onto the Virus Data Sheet. The Inoculum Volume should be no greater than 0.04 mL/cm2 of surface area. If the Inoculum Volume is greater than 0.04 mL/cm2, use larger culture vessels.

 

Step 4. Inoculate each BGM cell culture test vessel with an amount of assay control or water sample equal to the Inoculum Volume and record the date of inoculation on the Sample Data Sheet (see Part 9).

Avoid touching either the cannula or the pipetting device to the inside rim of the cell culture test vessels to avert the possibility of transporting contaminants to the remaining culture vessels.

For ease of inoculation, a sufficient quantity of 0.15 M Na2HPO4, pH 7.0 – 7.5, may be added to the Inoculum Volume to give a more usable working Inoculation Volume (e.g., 1.0 mL). For example, if an Inoculum Volume of 0.73 mL is to be placed onto 10 vessels, then

  • 5 × (1 – 0.73 mL) = 2.84 mL of sodium phosphate, pH 7.0-7.5 could be added to 10.5 ×

0.73 = 7.67 mL of subsample. Each milliliter of the resulting mixture will contain the required

Inoculum Volume.
  1. Total Culturable Virus Assay Controls:

Run a negative and positive assay control with every group of subsamples inoculated onto cell cultures.

 

  1. Negative Assay Control: Inoculate a BGM culture with a volume of sodium phosphate, pH 7.0 – 7.5, equal to the Inoculation Volume. This culture will serve as negative control for the tissue culture quantal assay. If any Negative Assay Control develops cytopathic effects (CPE), all subsequent assays of water samples should be halted until the cause of the positive result is deter- mined.

 

  1. Positive Assay Control: Dilute attenuated poliovirus type 3 (from the high titered QC stock) in sodium phosphate, pH 7.0 – 7.5, to give a concentration of 20 PFU per Inoculation Volume. Inoculate a BGM culture with an amount of diluted virus equal to the Inoculation Volume. This control will provide a measure for continued sensitivity of the cell cultures to virus infection. Addi- tional positive control samples may be prepared by adding virus to a small portion of the final concentrated sample and/or by using additional virus types. If any Positive Assay Control fails to develop CPE, all subsequent assays of water samples should be halted until the cause of the negative result is deter- mined. It may be necessary to thaw and use an earlier passage of the BGM cell line supplied by the U.S. EPA.

 

 

 

 

 

 

VIII-24

 

  1. Inoculation of Water Samples
    1. Rapidly thaw subsample 1, if frozen, and inoculate an amount equal to the Inoculum Volume onto each of 10 cell cultures. If there is no evidence for cytotoxicity and if at least three cell cultures are negative for CPE after seven days (see below), thaw subsample 2 and inoculate an amount equal to the Inoculum Volume onto each of 10 additional cultures.

Hold a thawed subsample for no more than 4 h at 4 C. Warm the subsam- ple to room temperature just before inoculation.

A small portion of the Final Concentrated Sample may by inoculated onto cultures several days before inoculating subsample 1 as a control for cytotoxic- ity.

 

  1. If cytotoxicity is not a problem and more than seven cultures are positive for CPE after seven days, prepare five- and twenty five-fold dilutions of subsample
  2. To prepare a 1:5 dilution, add a volume equal to 0.1334 times the Assay Sample Volume (amount “a”) to a volume of 0.15 M sodium phosphate (pH 7.0-7.5) equal to 0.5334 times the Assay Sample Volume (amount “b”). After mixing thoroughly, prepare a 1:25 dilution by adding amount “a” of the 1:5 diluted sample to amount “b” of 0.15 M sodium phosphate (pH 7.0-7.5). Using an amount equal to the Inoculum Volume, inoculate 10 cell cultures each with undiluted subsample 2, subsample 2 diluted 1:5 and subsample 2 diluted 1:25, respectively.  Freeze the remaining portions of the 1:25 dilution at -70  C until the sample results are known. If the inoculated cultures are all positive, thaw the remaining 1:25 dilution and prepare 1:125, 1:625 and 1:3125 dilutions by transferring amount “a” of each lower dilution to amount “b” of sodium phos- phate as described above. Inoculate 10 cultures each with the additional dilu- tions and freeze the remaining portion of the 1:3125 dilution. Continue the process of assaying higher dilutions until at least one test vessel at the highest dilution tested is negative. Higher dilutions can also be assayed along with the initial undiluted to 1:25 dilutions if it is suspected that the water to be tested contains more than 500 most probable number (MPN) of infectious total culturable virus units per 100 L.

 

  • If subsample 1 is cytotoxic, then five cell cultures should be inoculated with Final Concentrated Sample using the same volume required for subsample 1 and the procedures described in the Reduction of Cytotoxicity in Sample Concen- trates section below. If these procedures remove cytotoxicity, inoculate subsample 2 using the procedures for removal of cytotoxicity and 10 cultures each with undiluted sample, sample diluted 1:5 and sample diluted 1:25 as in Step 4bii above.  If the procedures fail to remove cytotoxicity, write for advice on how to proceed to the ICR Laboratory Coordinator, U.S. EPA, Office of Ground Water and Drinking Water, Technical Support Division, 26 W. Martin Luther King Drive, Cincinnati, OH 45268.

 

 

VIII-25

 

A maximum of 60 and 580 MPN units per 100 L can be demonstrated by inoculating a total of 20 cultures with the undiluted Assay Sample Volume from source water or a total of 10 cultures each with undiluted sample and sample diluted 1:5 and 1:25, respectively.

 

  1. Inoculation of QC and PE Samples: prepare five-fold dilutions of subsample 1 for each negative QC sample as described in Step 4bii. Prepare five- and twenty five-fold dilutions for each positive QC and PE sample. Inoculate 10 cultures with undiluted subsample and each diluted subsample using an amount of inoculum equal to the Inoculum Volume.

Use subsample 2 only as a backup for problems with the analysis of subsample 1.

 

Step 5.    Rock the inoculated cell culture test vessels gently to achieve uniform distribution of inoculum over the surface of the cell monolayers. Place the cell culture test vessels on a level stationary surface at room temperature so that the inoculum remains distributed evenly over the cell monolayer.

 

Step 6.    Continue incubating the inoculated cell cultures for 80 – 120 min to permit viruses to adsorb onto and infect cells.

It may be necessary to rock the vessels every 15-20 min or to keep them on a mechanical rocking platform during the adsorption period to prevent cell death in the middle of the vessels from dehydration.

 

Step 7.    Add liquid maintenance medium (see Item 2 of Vessels and Media for Cell Growth

in Part 4 for recommended medium) and incubate at 36.5 ± 1 C.

Warm the maintenance medium to 36.5 ± 1 C before placing it onto cell monolayers.

Add the medium to the side of the cell culture vessel opposite the cell monolayer. Avoid touching any pipetting devices used to the inside rim of the culture vessels to avert the possibility of transporting contaminants to the remaining vessels. The cultures may be re-fed with fresh maintenance medium after 4 – 7 days.

 

Step 8.    Examine each culture microscopically for the appearance of CPE daily for the first three days and then every couple of days for a total of 14 days.

CPE may be identified as cell disintegration or as changes in cell morphology. Round- ing-up of infected cells is a typical effect seen with enterovirus infections. However, uninfected cells round-up during mitosis and a sample should not be considered positive unless there are significant clusters of rounded-up cells over and beyond what is observed in the uninfected controls. Photomicrographs demonstrating CPE appear in the reference by Malherbe and Strickland-Cholmley (1980).

 

Step 9.    Freeze cultures at -70 C when more than 75% of the monolayer shows signs of CPE. Freeze all remaining negative cultures, including controls, after 14 days.

 

 

 

VIII-26

 

Step 10. Thaw all the cultures to confirm the results of the previous passage. Filter at least 10% of the medium from each vessel that was positive for CPE or that appeared to be bacterially contaminated through separate 0.22 µm sterilizing filters. Then inoculate another BGM culture with 10% of the medium from the previous passage for each vessel, including those that were negative. Repeat Steps 7 – 8.

Confirmation passages may be performed in small vessels or multiwell trays, however, it may be necessary to distribute the inoculum into several vessels or wells to insure that the Inoculum Volume is less than or equal to 0.04 mL/cm2 of surface area.

 

Step 11. Score cultures that developed CPE in both the first and second passages as confirmed positives. Cultures that show CPE in only the second passage must be passaged a third time along with the negative controls according to Steps 9 – 10. Score cultures that develop CPE in both the second and third passages as confirmed positives.

Cultures with confirmed CPE may be stored in a -70 C freezer for research purposes or for optional identification tests.5

 

Virus Quantitation:

 

Step 1.    Record the total number of confirmed positive and negative cultures for each subsample onto the Total Culturable Virus Data Sheet (Part 9). Do not include the results of tests for cytotoxicity!

 

Step 2.    Transfer the number of cultures inoculated and the confirmed number of positive cultures from the Total Culturable Virus Data Sheet for each subsample to the Quantitation of Total Culturable Virus Data Sheet . If dilutions are not required, add the values to obtain a total undiluted count for each sample. Calculate the MPN/mL value (Mm) and the upper (CLum) and lower (CLlm) 95% confidence limits using the total undiluted count. If dilutions are required, calculate the MPN/mL value and 95% confidence limits using only the subsample 2 values. Place the values obtained onto the Quantitation of Total Culturable Virus Data Sheet. The MPNV computer program supplied by the U.S. EPA must be used for the calculation of all MPN values and confidence limits.

 

Step 3.    Calculate the MPN per 100 liter value (Ml) of the original water sample according the formula:

 

M       100 Mm S

l                       D

 

 

 

 

 

5For more information see Chapter 12 (May 1988 revision) of Berg et al.  (1984).

 

VIII-27

 

6

where S equals the Assay Sample Volume and D equals the Volume of Original Water Sample Assayed (the values for S and D can be found on the Virus Data Sheet). Record the value of Ml onto the Virus Data Sheet.

 

Step 4.    Calculate the lower 95% confidence limit per 100 liter value (CLl) for each water sample according to the formula:

 

 

CLl

100 CLlmS D

 

 

 

where CLlm is the lower 95% confidence limit per milliliter from the Quantitation of Total Culturable Virus Data Sheet. Calculate the upper 95% Confidence Limit per 100 liter value (CLu) according to the formula:

 

 

CLu

100 CLumS D

 

 

 

where CLum is the upper 95% confidence limit per milliliter from the Quantitation of Total Culturable Virus Data Sheet. Record the limit per 100 liter values on the Virus Data Sheet.

 

Step 5.    Calculate the total MPN value and the total 95% confidence limit values for each QC and PE sample by multiplying the values per milliliter by S and dividing by 0.4.

 

REDUCTION OF CYTOTOXICITY IN SAMPLE CONCENTRATES

 

The procedure described in this section may result in a significant titer reduction and should be applied only to inocula known to be or expected to be toxic.

 

Media and Reagents:

 

  1. Washing solution.

 

Dissolve 8.5 g of NaCl in a final volume of 980 mL of dH20. Autoclave the solution at 121 C for 15 min. Cool to room temperature. Add 20 mL serum to the sterile salt solution. Mix thoroughly. Store the washing solution at 4 C for up to three months or at -20 C.

The volume of the NaCl washing solution required will depend on the number of bottles to be processed and the cell surface area of the vessels used for the quantal assay.

 

 

6Use significant figures when reporting all results throughout the protocol (see APHA, 1995, p. 1-17).

 

VIII-28

 

Procedure for Cytotoxicity Reduction:

 

Step 1.    Decant and save the inoculum from inoculated cell culture vessels after the adsorp- tion period (Step 5 of Sample Inoculation and CPE Development ). Add 0.25 mL of the washing solution for each cm2 of cell surface area into each vessel.

Warm the washing solution to 36.5 ± 1 C before placing on cell monolayer. Add the washing solution to the side of the cell culture vessel opposite the cell monolayer. Avoid touching any pipetting devices used to the inside rim of the culture vessels to avert the possibility of transporting contaminants to the remaining vessels.

The inocula saved after the adsorption period should be stored at -70 C for subsequent treatment and may be discarded when cytotoxicity is successfully reduced.

 

Step 2.    Gently rock the washing solution gently across the cell monolayer a minimum of two times. Decant and discard the spent washing solution without disturbing the cell monolayer.

It may be necessary to rock the washing solution across the monolayer more than twice if sample is oily and difficult to remove from the cell monolayer surface.

 

Step 3.    Continue with Step 7 of the procedure for Sample Inoculation and CPE Develop- ment.

If this procedure fails to reduce cytotoxicity with a particular type of water sample, backup samples may be diluted 1:2 to 1:4 before repeating the procedure. This dilution requires that two to four times more culture vessels be used. Dilution alone may sufficiently reduce cytotoxicity of some samples without washing. Alternatively, the changing of liquid maintenance medium at the first signs of cytotoxicity may prevent further development.

Determine cytotoxicity from the initial daily macroscopic examination of the appearance of the cell culture monolayer by comparing the negative control from Step 4ai and the positive control from Step 4aii of the procedure for Sample Inoculation and CPE Development with the test samples from Step 4b). Cytotoxicity should be suspected when the cells in the test sample develop CPE before its development on the positive control.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

VIII-29

 

PART 4 — CELL CULTURE PREPARATION AND MAINTENANCE

 

PREPARATION OF CELL CULTURE MEDIUM

 

General Principles:

 

  1. Equipment care — Carefully wash and sterilize equipment used for preparing media before each use.

 

  1. Disinfection of work area — Thoroughly disinfect surfaces on which the medium preparation equipment is to be placed.

 

  1. Aseptic technique — Use aseptic technique when preparing and handling media or medium components.

 

  1. Dispensing filter-sterilized media — To avoid post-filtration contamination, dispense filter-sterilized media into storage containers through clear glass filling bells in a microbiolog- ical laminar flow hood. If a hood is unavailable, use an area restricted solely to cell culture manipulations.

 

  1. Coding media — Assign a lot number to and keep a record of each batch of medium or medium components prepared. Place the lot number, the date of preparation, the expiration date, and the initials of the person preparing the medium on each bottle.

 

  1. Sterilization of NaHCO3-containing solutions — Sterilize media and other solutions that contain NaHCO3 by positive pressure filtration.

Negative pressure filtration of such solutions increases the pH and reduces the buffering capacity.

 

  1. Antibiotic solutions prepared in-house must be filter sterilized with 0.22 µm membrane filters. It is important that the recommended antibiotic levels not be exceeded during the planting of cells, as cultures are particularly sensitive to excessive concentrations at this stage. Antibiotic stock solutions should be placed in screw-capped containers and stored at -20 C until needed. Once thawed, they may be refrozen; however, repeated freezing and thawing of these stock solutions should be avoided by freezing them in quantities that are sufficient to support a week’s cell culture work.

 

Apparatus and Materials:

 

  1. Glassware, Pyrex (Corning Product No. 1395).

Storage vessels must be equipped with airtight closures.

 

 

 

 

VIII-30

 

  1. Disc filter holders — 142 mm or 293 mm diameter (Millipore Product No. YY30 142 36 and YY30 293 16).

Use only positive pressure type filter holders.

 

  1. Sterilizing filter stacks — 0.22 µm pore size (Millipore Product No. GSWP 142 50 and GSWP 293 25). Fiberglass prefilters (Millipore AP15 142 50 or AP15 293 25, and AP20 142 50 or AP20 293 25).

Stack AP20 and AP15 prefilters and 0.22 µm membrane filter into a disc filter holder with AP20 prefilter on top and 0.22 µm membrane filter on bottom.

Always disassemble the filter stack after use to check the integrity of the 0.22 µm filter.

Refilter any media filtered with a damaged stack.

 

  1. Positively-charged cartridge filter — 10 inch (Zeta plus TSM, Cuno Product No.

45134-01-600P). Cartridge housing with adaptor for 10 inch cartridge (Millipore Product No. YY16 012 00).

 

  1. Culture capsule filter (Gelman Sciences Product No. 12170).

 

  1. Cell culture vessels — Pyrex, soda or flint glass or plastic bottles and flasks or roller bottles (e.g., Brockway Product No. 1076-09A, 1925-02, Corning Product No. 25100-25, 25110-75, 25120-150, 25150-1750).

Vessels must be made from clear glass or plastic to allow observation of the cultures and be equipped with airtight closures. Plastic vessels must be treated by the manufacturer to allow cells to adhere properly.

 

  1. Screw caps, black with rubber liners (Brockway Product No. 24-414).

Caps for larger culture bottles usually supplied with bottles.

 

  1. Roller apparatus (Bellco Glass Product No. 7730).

Required only if roller bottles are used for maintenance of stock cultures.

 

  1. Waterbath set at 56 ± 1 C.

 

  1. Light microscope, with conventional light source, equipped with lenses to provide 40X, 100X, and 400X total magnification.

 

  1. Inverted light microscope equipped with lenses to provide 40X, 100X, and 400X total magnification.

 

  1. Phase contrast counting chamber (hemocytometer) (Curtin Matheson Scientific Product No. 158-501).

 

  1. Conical centrifuge tubes — 50 and 250 mL capacity.

 

 

VIII-31

 

  1. Rack for tissue culture tubes (Bellco Product No. 2028).

 

  1. Bottles, aspirator-type with tubing outlet — 2,000 mL capacity.

Bottles for use with pipetting machine.

 

  1. Storage vials — 2 mL capacity.

Vials must withstand temperatures to -70 C.

 

Media and Reagents:

 

  1. Sterile fetal calf, gamma globulin-free newborn calf or iron-supplemented calf serum, certified free of viruses, bacteriophage and mycoplasma.

Test each lot of serum for cell growth and toxicity before purchasing. Serum should be stored at -20 C for long-term storage. Upon thawing, each bottle must be heat-inactivated in a waterbath set at 56 ± 1 C for 30 min and stored at 4 C for short term use.

 

  1. Trypsin, 1:250 powder (Difco Laboratories Product No. 0152-15-9) or trypsin, 1:300 powder (Becton Dickinson Microbiology Systems Product No. 12098).

 

  1. EDTA (Fisher Scientific Product No. S657-500).

 

  1. Fungizone (amphotericin B, Sigma Product No. A-9528), penicillin G (Sigma Product No. P-3032), streptomycin sulfate (ICN Biomedicals Product No. 100556), tetracycline hydrochloride (ICN Biomedicals Product No. 103011).

Use antibiotics of at least tissue culture grade.

 

  1. Eagle’s minimum essential medium (MEM) with Hanks’ salts and L-glutamine, without sodium bicarbonate (Life Technologies Product No. 410-1200).

 

  1. Leibovitz’s L-15 medium with L-glutamine (Life Technologies Product No. 430-1300).

 

  1. Trypan blue (Sigma Chemical Product No. T-6146).

 

  1. Dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO; Sigma Chemical Product No. D-2650).

 

Media Preparation Recipes:

The conditions specified by the supplier for storage and expiration dates of commercially available media should be strictly observed.

 

  1. Procedure for the preparation of 10 L of EDTA-trypsin.

The procedure described is used to dislodge cells attached to the surface of culture bottles and flasks. This reagent, when stored at 4 C, retains its working strength for at least four

 

 

 

VIII-32

 

months. The amount of reagent prepared should be based on projected usage over a four month period.

 

Step a.    Add 30 g of trypsin (1:250) or 25 g of trypsin (1:300) to 2 L of dH2O in a six liter flask containing a three inch stir bar. Place the flask onto a magnetic stirrer and mix the trypsin solution rapidly for a minimum of 1 h.

The trypsin remains cloudy.

 

Step b.    Add 4 L of dH2O and a three-inch stir bar into a 20 liter clear plastic carboy. Place the carboy onto a magnetic stirrer and stir at a speed sufficient to develop a vortex while adding the following chemicals: 80 g NaCl, 12.5 g EDTA, 50 g glucose, 11.5 g

Na2HPO4   7H2O, 2.0 g KCl, and 2.0 g KH2PO4.

Each chemical does not have to be completely dissolved before adding the next one.

 

Step c.    Add an additional 4 L dH2O to the carboy and continue mixing until all the chemicals are completely dissolved.

 

Step d.    Add the 2 L of trypsin from Step 2a to the solution from Step 2c and mix for a minimum of 1 h. Adjust the pH of the EDTA-trypsin reagent to 7.5 – 7.7.

 

Step e.    Filter the reagent under pressure through a filter stack and store the filtered reagent in tightly stoppered or capped containers at 4 C.

The cartridge prefilter (Item 4 of Apparatus and Materials) can be used in line with the culture capsule sterilizing filter (Item 5) as an alternative to a filter stack (Item 3).

 

  1. Procedure for the preparation of 10 L of MEM/L-15 medium.

 

Step a.    Place a three inch stir bar and 4 L of dH2O into a 20 liter clear plastic carboy.

 

Step b.    Place the carboy onto a magnetic stirrer. Stir at a speed sufficient to develop a vortex and then add the contents of a five liter packet of L-15 medium to the carboy.

Rinse the medium packet with three washes of 200 mL each of dH2O and add the rinses to the carboy.

 

Step c.    Mix until the medium is evenly dispersed.

L-15 medium may appear cloudy as it need not be totally dissolved before proceed- ing to Step d.

 

Step d.    Add 3 L of dH2O to the carboy and the contents of a five liter packet of MEM medium to the carboy. Rinse the MEM medium packet with three washes of 200 mL each of dH2O and add the rinses to the carboy. Add 800 mL of dH2O and 7.5 g of NaHCO3 and continue mixing for an additional 60 min.

 

 

 

VIII-33

 

Step e.    Transfer the MEM/L-15 medium to a pressure can and filter under positive pressure through a 0.22 µm sterilizing filter. Collect the medium in volumes appropriate for the culturing of BGM cells (e.g., 900 mL in a one liter bottle) and store in tightly stoppered or capped containers at 4 C for up to two months.

Note that the volume of the MEM/L-15 medium adds up to only 9 L to allow for the addition of serum to a final concentration of 10%.

 

  1. Procedure for preparation of 100 mL of trypan blue solution.

The procedure is used in the direct determination of the viable cell counts of the BGM stock cultures. As trypan blue is on the U.S. EPA suspect carcinogen list, particular care should be taken in its preparation and use so as to avoid skin contact or inhalation. The wearing of rubber gloves during preparation and use is recommended.

 

Step a.    Add 0.5 g of trypan blue to 100 mL of dH2O in a 250 mL flask. Swirl the flask until the trypan blue is completely dissolved.

 

Step b.    Sterilize the solution by autoclaving at 121 C for 15 min and store in a screw- capped container at room temperature.

 

  1. Preparation of 100 mL of penicillin-streptomycin stock solution containing 100,000 units/mL of penicillin and 100,000 µg/mL of streptomycin.

 

Step a. Add 10,000,000 units of penicillin G and 10 g of streptomycin sulfate to a 250 mL flask containing 100 mL of dH2O. Mix the contents of the flasks on magnetic stirrer until the antibiotics are dissolved.

 

Step b.     Sterilize the antibiotics by filtration through a 0.22 µm membrane filter and dis- pense in 10 mL volumes into screw-capped containers.

 

  1. Preparation of 50 mL of tetracycline stock solution.

 

Step a.     Add 1.25 g of tetracycline hydrochloride powder and 3.75 g of ascorbic acid to a 125 mL flask containing 50 mL of dH2O. Mix the contents of the flask on a magnetic stirrer until the antibiotic is dissolved.

 

Step b.     Sterilize the antibiotic by filtration through a 0.22 µm membrane filter and dispense in 5 mL volumes into screw-capped containers.

 

  1. Preparation of 25 mL of amphotericin B (fungizone) stock solution.

 

Step a.     Add 0.125 g of amphotericin B to a 50 mL flask containing 25 mL of dH2O. Mix the contents of the flask on a magnetic stirrer until the antibiotic is dissolved.

 

 

 

VIII-34

 

Step b.     Sterilize the antibiotic by filtration through a 0.22 µm membrane filter and dispense in 2.5 mL volumes into screw-capped containers.

 

PREPARATION AND PASSAGE OF BGM CELL CULTURES

 

A microbiological biosafety cabinet should be used to process cell cultures. If a hood is not available, cell cultures should be prepared in controlled facilities used for no other purposes. Viruses or other microorganisms must not be transported, handled, or stored in rooms used for cell culture transfer.

 

Vessels and Media for Cell Growth:

 

  1. The BGM cell line grows readily on the inside surfaces of glass or specially treated, tissue culture grade plastic vessels. Flat-sided, glass bottles (16 to 32 oz or equivalent growth area), 75 or 150 cm2 plastic cell culture flasks, and 690 cm2 glass or 850 cm2 plastic roller bottles are usually used for the maintenance of stock cultures. Flat-sided bottles and flasks that contain cells in a stationary position are incubated with the flat side (cell monolayer side) down. If available, roller bottles and roller apparatus units are preferable to flat-sided bottles and flasks because roller cultures require less medium than flat-sided bottles per unit of cell monolayer surface area. Roller apparatus rotation speed should be adjusted to one-half revolution per minute to ensure that cells are constantly bathed in growth medium.

 

  1. Growth and maintenance media should be prepared on the day they will be needed. Prepare growth medium by supplementing MEM/L-15 medium with 10% serum and antibiot- ics (100 mL of serum, 1 mL of penicillin-streptomycin stock, 0.5 mL of tetracycline stock and

0.2 mL of fungizone stock per 900 mL of MEM/L-15). Prepare maintenance medium by supplementing MEM/L-15 with antibiotics and 2% or 5% serum (20 or 50 mL of serum, antibiotics as above for growth medium and 80 or 50 mL of dH2O, respectively). Use maintenance media with 2% serum for CPE development.

 

General Procedure for Cell Passage:

Pass stock BGM cell cultures at approximately seven day intervals using growth medium.

 

Step 1.    Pour spent medium from cell culture vessels, and discard the medium.

A gauze-covered beaker may be used to collect spent medium to prevent splatter.

Autoclave all media that have been in contact with cells or that contain serum before discard- ing.

 

Step 2.    Add a volume of warm EDTA- trypsin reagent equal to 40% of the volume of medium that was discarded in Step 1.

See Table VIII-1 for the amount of reagents required for commonly used vessel types.

Warm the EDTA-trypsin reagent to 36.5 ± 1 C before placing it onto cell monolayers.

 

 

 

VIII-35

 

Table VIII-1. Guide for Preparation of BGM Stock Cultures
Vessel Type Volume of EDTA-Trypsin (mL) Volume of Medium (mL)a Total No. Cells to Plate

per Vessel

16 oz glass flat bottles 10 25 2.5 ×106
32 oz glass flat bottles 20 50 5.0 ×106
75 cm2 plastic flat flask 12 30 3.0 ×106
150 cm2 plastic flat flask 24 60 6.0 ×106
690 cm2 glass roller bottle 40 100 7.0 ×106
850 cm2 plastic roller bottle 48 120 8.0 ×107
aSerum requirements:  growth medium contains 10% serum;

maintenance medium contains 2-5% serum. Antibiotic requirements: penicillin-streptomycin stock solution, 1.0 mL/liter; tetracycline stock solution, 0.5 mL/liter; fungizone stock solution, 0.2  mL/liter.

 

Step 3.    Allow the EDTA- trypsin reagent to remain in contact with cells at room temperature un- til the cell monolayer can be shaken loose from the inner surface of the cell culture ves- sel.

To prevent cell damage, the EDTA-trypsin reagent should remain in con- tact with the cells no longer than 5 min.

 

Step 4.    Pour the suspended cells into centri-

fuge tubes or bottles.

To facilitate collection and resuspension of cell pellets, use tubes or bottles with conical bottoms. Centrifuge tubes and bottles used for this purpose must be able to withstand the

g-force applied.

 

Step 5.    Centrifuge cell suspension at 1,000 ×g for 10 min to pellet cells. Pour off and discard the supernatant.

Do not exceed this speed as cells may be damaged or destroyed.

 

Step 6. Suspend the pelleted cells in growth medium (see Item 2 of Vessels and Media for Cell Growth) and perform a viable count on the cell suspension according to the Procedure for Performing Viable Cell Counts section below.

Resuspend pelleted cells in a sufficient volume of medium to allow thorough mixing of the cells (to reduce sampling error) and to minimize the significance of the loss of the 0.5 mL of cell suspension required for the cell counting procedure. The quantity of medium used for resuspending pelleted cells varies from 50 to several hundred milliliters, depending upon the volume of the individual laboratory’s need for cell cultures.

 

 

VIII-36

 

Table VIII-2. Preparation of Virus Assay Cell Cultures
Vessel Type Volume of Medium* (mL) Final Cell Count per Vessel
1 oz glass bottle 4 9.0 ×105
25 cm2 plastic flask 10 3.5 ×106
6 oz glass bottle 15 5.6 ×106
75 cm2 plastic flask 30 1.0 ×107
16 mm × 150 mm tubes 2 4.0 ×104
*Serum requirements: growth medium contains 10% serum. Antibiotic requirements: penicillin- streptomycin stock solution, 1.0 mL/liter; tetracycline stock solution, 0.5 mL/liter; fungizone stock solution, 0.2 mL/liter.

 

Step 7.    Dilute the cell suspen- sion to the appro- priate final cell concentration with growth me- dium and dispense into cell culture vessels with a pipet, a Cornwall syringe or a Brewer- type pipetting machine dispenser.

Calculate the dilution factor requirement using the cell count and

the cell and volume parameters given in Table VIII-1 for stock cultures and in Table VIII-2

for virus assay cultures.

As a general rule, the BGM cell line should be split at a 1:2 ratio for passages 117 to 150 and a 1:3 ratio for passages 151 to 250.  To plant two hundred 25 cm2 cell culture flasks weekly from cells between 151 and 250 passages would require the preparation of six roller bottles (surface area of 690 cm2 each): The contents of two to prepare the next batch of six rol- ler bottles and the contents of the other four to prepare the 25 cm2 flasks.

 

Step 8.    Except during handling operations, maintain BGM cells at 36.5 ± 1 C in airtight cell culture vessels.

 

Step 9.    Replace growth medium with maintenance medium containing 2% serum when cell monolayers become 95 to 100% confluent (usually three to four days after seeding with an appropriate number of cells). Replace growth medium that becomes acidic before the mono- layers become 95 to 100% confluent with maintenance medium containing 5% serum. The volume of maintenance medium should equal the volume of the discarded growth medium.

 

Procedure For Performing Viable Cell Counts:

 

Step 1.    Add 0.5 mL of cell suspension (or diluted cell suspension) to 0.5 mL of 0.5% trypan blue solution in a test tube.

To obtain an accurate cell count, the optimal total number of cells per hemocytometer section should be between 20 and 50. This range is equivalent to between 6.0 × 105 and 1.5 × 106 cells per mL of cell suspension. Thus, a dilution of 1:10 (0.5 mL of cells in 4.5 mL of growth medium) is usually required for an accurate count of a cell suspension.

 

 

VIII-37

 

Step 2.    Disperse cells by repeated pipetting.

Avoid introducing air bubbles into the suspension, because air bubbles may interfere with subsequent filling of the hemocytometer chambers.

 

Step 3.    With a capillary pipette, carefully fill a hemocytometer chamber on one side of a slip-covered hemocytometer slide. Rest the slide on a flat surface for about 1 min to allow the trypan blue to penetrate the cell membranes of nonviable cells.

Do not under or over fill the chambers.

 

Step 4.    Under 100X total magnification, count the cells in the four large corner sections and the center section of the hemocytometer chamber.

Include in the count cells lying on the lines marking the top and left margins of the sections, and ignore cells on the lines marking the bottom and right margins. Trypan blue is excluded by living cells. Therefore, to quantify viable cells, count only cells that are clear in color. Do not count cells that are blue.

 

Step 5.    Calculate the average number of viable cells in each mL of cell suspension by totaling the number of viable cells counted in the five sections, multiplying this sum by 2000, and where necessary, multiplying the resulting product by the reciprocal of the dilution.

 

PROCEDURE FOR PRESERVATION OF BGM CELL LINE

 

An adequate supply of frozen BGM cells must be available to replace working cultures that are used only periodically or become contaminated or lose virus sensitivity. Cells have been held at -70 C for more than 15 years with a minimum loss in cell viability.

 

Preparation of Cells for Storage:

The procedure described is for the preparation of 100 cell culture vials. Cell concentra- tion must be at least 2 × 106 per mL.

The actual number of vials to be prepared should be based upon line usage and the anticipated time interval requirement between cell culture start-up and full culture production.

 

Step 1.    Prepare cell storage medium by adding 10 mL of DMSO to 90 mL of growth medium (see Item 2 of Vessels and Media for Cell Growth ). Sterilize the resulting cell storage medium by passage through a 0.22 µm sterilizing filter.

Collect sterilized medium in a 250 mL flask containing a stir bar.

 

Step 2.    Harvest BGM cells from cell culture vessels as directed in Steps 1 to 5 of General Procedures for Cell Passage. Count the viable cells as described above and resuspend them in the cell storage medium at a concentration of at least 2 × 106 cells per mL.

 

Step 3.    Place the flask containing suspended cells on a magnetic stirrer and slowly mix for 30 min. Dispense 1 mL volumes of cell suspension into 2 mL capacity vials.

 

 

VIII-38

 

Procedure for Freezing Cells:

The freezing procedure requires slow cooling of the cells with the optimum rate of -1 C per min. A slow cooling rate can be achieved using the following method or by using the recently available freezing containers (e.g., Nalge Product No. 5100-0001) as recommended by the manufacturers.

 

Step 1.    Place the vials in a rack and place the rack in refrigerator at 4 C for 30 min, then in a

-20 C freezer for 30 min, and finally in a -70 C freezer overnight. The transfers should be made as rapidly as possible.

To allow for more uniform cooling, wells adjoining each vial should remain empty.

 

Step 2.    Rapidly transfer vials into boxes or other containers for long-term storage.

To prevent substantial loss of cells during storage, temperature of cells should be kept constant after -70 C has been achieved.

 

Procedure for Thawing Cells:

Cells must be thawed rapidly to decrease loss in cell viability.

 

Step 1.    Place vials containing frozen cells into a 36.5 ± 1 C water bath and agitate vigorous- ly by hand until all ice has melted.  Sterilize the outside surface of the vials with 0.5% I2 in 70% ethanol.

 

Step 2. Add BGM cells to either 6 oz tissue culture bottles or 25 cm2 tissue culture flasks containing an appropriate volume of growth medium (see Table VIII-2). Use two vials of cells for 6 oz bottles and one vial for 25 cm2 flasks.

 

Step 3.    Incubate BGM cells at 36.5 ± 1 C. After 18 to 24 h replace the growth medium with fresh growth medium and then continue the incubation for an additional five days. Pass and maintain the new cultures as directed above.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

VIII-39

 

PART 5 — STERILIZATION AND DISINFECTION

 

GENERAL GUIDELINES

 

  1. Use aseptic techniques for handling test waters, eluates and cell cultures.

 

  1. Sterilize apparatus and containers that will come into contact with test waters and all solutions that will be added to test waters unless otherwise indicated. Thoroughly clean all items before final sterilization using laboratory standard operating procedures.

 

  1. Sterilize all contaminated materials before discarding.

 

  1. Disinfect all spills and splatters.

 

STERILIZATION TECHNIQUES

 

Solutions:

 

  1. Sterilize all solutions, except those used for cleansing, standard buffers, hydrochloric acid (HCl), sodium hydroxide (NaOH), and disinfectants by autoclaving them at 121 C for at least 15 min.

The HCl and NaOH solutions and disinfectants used are self-sterilizing. When autoclav- ing buffered beef extract, use a vessel large enough to accommodate foaming.

 

Autoclavable Glassware, Plasticware, and Equipment:

Water speeds the transfer of heat in larger vessels during autoclaving and thereby speeds the sterilization process. Add dH2O to vessels in quantities indicated in Table VIII-3. Lay large vessels on their sides in the autoclave, if possible, to facilitate the displacement of air in the vessels by flowing steam.

 

  1. Cover the openings into autoclavable glassware, plasticware, and equipment loosely with aluminum foil before autoclaving. Autoclave at 121 C for at least 30 min.

Glassware may also be sterilized in a dry heat oven at a temperature of 170 C for at least

1 h.

 

  1. Sterilize stainless steel vessels (dispensing pressure vessel) in an autoclave at 121 C for at least 30 min.

Vent-relief valves on vessels so equipped must be open during autoclaving and closed immediately when vessels are removed from autoclave.

 

  1. Presterilize 1MDS filter cartridges and prefilter cartridges by wrapping the filters in Kraft paper and autoclaving at 121 C for 30 min.

 

 

 

VIII-40

 

Table VIII-3. Water Quantity to be Added to Vessels Before Autoclaving
Vessel Size (liter) Quantity of dH2O (mL)
2 and 3 25
4 50
8 100
24 500
54 1000

 

  1. Sterilize instruments, such as scissors and forceps, by immersing them in 95% ethanol and flaming them be- tween uses.

 

Chlorine Sterilization:

Sterilize pumps, plastic- ware (filter housings) and tubing that cannot withstand autoclaving, and vessels that are too large for the autoclave by chlorination.

Prefilters, but not 1MDS fil-

ters, may be presterilized with chlorine as an alternative to autoclaving. Filter apparatus modules should be disinfected by sterilization and then cleaned according to laboratory standard operating procedures before final sterilization.

 

  1. Media and Reagents

 

  1. 0.1% chlorine (HOCl) — add 19 mL of household bleach (Clorox, The Clorox Co.) to 900 mL of dH2O and adjust the pH of the solution to 6-7 with 1 M HCl. Bring to 1 liter with dH2O.

 

  1. Procedures

Ensure that the solutions come in full contact with all surfaces when performing these procedures.

 

  1. Sterilize filter apparatus modules, injector tubing and plastic bags for transporting injector tubing by recirculating or immersing the items in 0.1% chlorine for 30 min. Drain the chlorine solution from objects being sterilized. Dechlorinate using a solution containing 2.5 mL of 2% sterile sodium thiosulfate per liter of sterile dH2O.

 

  1. Thoroughly rinse pH electrodes after each use to remove particulates. Sterilize before and after each use by immersing the tip of the electrode in 0.1% chlorine for at least 1 min. Dechlorinate the electrode as in Step 2a above. Rinse with sterile dH2O.

 

PROCEDURE FOR VERIFYING STERILITY OF LIQUIDS

 

Do not add antibiotics to media or medium components until after their sterility has been demonstrated. The BGM cell line used should be checked every six months for mycoplasma contamination according to test kit instructions. Cells that are contaminated should be discarded.

 

 

VIII-41

 

Media and Reagents:

 

  1. Mycoplasma testing kit (Irvine Scientific Product No. T500-000). Use as directed by the manufacturer.

 

  1. Thioglycollate medium (Difco Laboratories Product No. 0257-01-9). Prepare broth medium as directed by the manufacturer.

 

Verifying Sterility of Small Volumes of Liquids:

 

Step 1.    Inoculate 1 mL portions of the material to be tested for sterility into tubes containing 9 mL of thioglycollate broth by stabbing the inoculum into the broth. Incubate at 36.5 ± 1 C.

 

Step 2.    Examine the inoculated broth daily for seven days to determine whether growth of contaminating organisms has occurred.

Containers holding the thioglycollate medium must be tightly sealed before and after the medium is inoculated.

 

Visual Evaluation of Media for Microbial Contaminants:

 

Step 1.    Incubate either the entire stock of prepared media or portions taken during prepara- tion that represent at least 5% of the final volume at 36.5 ± 1 C for at least one week before use.

 

Step 2.    Visually examine and discard any media that lose clarity.

A clouded condition that develops in the media indicates the occurrence of contaminating organisms.

 

CONTAMINATED MATERIALS

 

  1. Autoclave contaminated materials for at least 30 min at 121 C. Be sure that steam can enter contaminated materials freely.

 

  1. Many commercial disinfectants do not adequately kill enteric viruses. To ensure thorough disinfection, disinfect spills and other contamination on surfaces with either a solution of 0.5% iodine in 70% ethanol (5 g I2 per liter) or 0.1% chlorine. The iodine solution has the advantage of drying more rapidly on surfaces than chlorine, but may stain some surfaces.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

VIII-42

 

PART 6 — BIBLIOGRAPHY AND SUGGESTED READING

 

APHA. 1995. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater (A. D. Eaton,

  1. S. Clesceri and A. E. Greenberg, ed), 19th Edition. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.

 

Barron, A. L., C. Olshevsky and M. M. Cohen. 1970. Characteristics of the BGM line of cells from African green monkey kidney. Archiv. Gesam. Virusforsch. 32:389-392.

 

Berg, G., R. S. Safferman, D. R. Dahling, D. Berman and C. J. Hurst. 1984. USEPA Manual of Methods for Virology. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Publication No. EPA/600/4- 84/013, Cincinnati, OH.

 

Chang, S. L., G. Berg, K. A. Busch, R. E. Stevenson, N. A. Clarke and P. W. Kabler. 1958. Application of the “most probable number” method for estimating concentration of animal viruses by the tissue culture technique. Virology 6:27-42.

 

Crow, E. L. 1956. Confidence intervals for a proportion.  Biometrika.  43:423-435.

 

Dahling, D. R. and B. A. Wright. 1986. Optimization of the BGM cell line culture and viral assay procedures for monitoring viruses in the environment. Appl. Environ. Microbiol.

51:790-812.

 

Dahling, D. R. and B. A. Wright. 1987. Comparison of the in-line injector and fluid propor- tioner used to condition water samples for virus monitoring. J. Virol. Meth. 18:67-71.

 

Dahling, D. R., G. Berg and D. Berman. 1974. BGM, a continuous cell line more sensitive than primary rhesus and African green kidney cells for the recovery of viruses from water. Health Lab. Sci. 11:275-282.

 

Dahling, D. R., R. S. Safferman and B. A. Wright. 1984. Results of a survey of BGM cell culture practices.  Environ. Internat. 10:309-313.

 

Eagle, H. 1959. Amino acid metabolism in mammalian cell cultures.  Science. 130:432-437.

 

EPA. 1989. Guidance manual for compliance with the filtration and disinfection requirements for public water systems using surface water sources. Office of Drinking Water, Washington, D.C.

 

Freshney, R. I. 1983. Culture of Animal Cells: A Manual of Basic Technique. Alan R. Liss, New York, NY.

 

 

 

 

VIII-43

 

Hay, R. J. 1985. ATCC Quality Control Methods for Cell Lines. American Type Culture Collection, Rockville, MD.

 

Hurst, C. J. 1990. Field method for concentrating viruses from water samples, pp. 285-295. In G. F. Craun (ed.), Methods for the Investigation and Prevention of Waterborne Disease Outbreaks. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Publication No. EPA/600/1-90/005a, Washington, D.C.

 

Hurst, C. J. 1991. Presence of enteric viruses in freshwater and their removal by the conven- tional drinking water treatment process. Bull. W.H.O. 69:113-119.

 

Hurst, C. J. and T. Goyke. 1983. Reduction of interfering cytotoxicity associated with wastewater sludge concentrates assayed for indigenous enteric viruses. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 46:133-139.

 

Katzenelson, E., B. Fattal and T. Hostovesky. 1976. Organic flocculation: an efficient second-step concentration method for the detection of viruses in tap water. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 32:638-639.

 

Laboratory Manual in Virology. 1974. 2nd Ed. Ontario Ministry of Health, Toronto, Ontario, Canada.

 

Leibovitz, A. 1963. The growth and maintenance of tissue-cell cultures in free gas exchange with the atmosphere. Amer. J. Hyg. 78:173-180.

 

Lennette, E. H., D.A. Lennette and E.T. Lennette (ed.). 1995. Diagnostic Procedures for Viral, Rickettsial and Chlamydial Infections, 7th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.

 

Malherbe, H. H. and M. Strickland-Cholmley. 1980. Viral Cytopathology. CRC Press. Boca Raton, FL.

 

Morris, R. and W. M. Waite. 1980. Evaluation of procedures for recovery of viruses from water—II detection systems. Water Res. 14:795-798.

 

Paul, J. 1975. Cell and Tissue Culture. 5th Ed. Churchill Livingstone, London, Great Britain.

 

Payment, P. and M. Trudel. 1985. Influence of inoculum size, incubation temperature, and cell culture density on virus detection in environmental samples. Can. J. Microbiol. 31:977- 980.

 

 

 

 

VIII-44

 

Rovozzo, G. C. and C. N. Burke. 1973. A Manual of Basic Virological Techniques. Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ.

 

Sobsey, M. D. 1976. Field monitoring techniques and data analysis, pp. 87-96. In L. B. Baldwin, J. M. Davidson and J. F. Gerber (eds.), Virus Aspects of Applying Municipal Waste to Land. University of Florida, Gainesville, FL.

 

Sobsey, M. D. 1980. Poliovirus concentration from tap water with electropositive adsorbent filters. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 40:201-210.

 

Thomas, H. A., Jr. 1942. Bacterial densities from fermentation tube tests. J. Amer. Water Works Assoc. 34:572-576.

 

Waymouth, C., R. G. Ham and P. J. Chapple. 1981. The Growth Requirements of Vertebrate Cells In Vitro. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, Great Britain.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

VIII-45

 

PART 7 — VENDORS

 

The vendors listed below represent one possible source for required products. Other vendors may supply the same or equivalent products.

 

American Type Culture Collection                        Continental Glass & Plastics 12301 Parklawn Dr.                                                         841 W. Cermak Rd.

Rockville, MD 20852                                           Chicago, IL 60608

(800) 638-6597                                                     (312) 666-2050

 

Baxter Diagnostics, Scientific Products Div.         Corning: products may be ordered through 1430 Waukegan Rd.                                                       most major scientific supply houses McGaw Park, IL 60085

(800) 234-5227                                                     Costar Corp.

7035 Commerce Circle BBL Microbiology Systems: products may                   Pleasanton, CA 94588 be ordered through several major scientific                              (800) 882-7711

supply houses

Cuno, Inc.

Becton Dickinson Microbiology Systems             400 Research Parkway 250 Schilling Circle                                                      Meriden, CT 06450

Cockeysville, MD 21030                                      (800)243-6894

(410) 771-0100 (Ask for a local distributor)

Curtin Matheson Scientific

Bellco Glass                                                          P.O. Box 1546

340 Edrudo Rd.                                                     Houston, TX 77251

Vineland, NJ 08360                                              (713) 820-9898

(800) 257-7043

DEMA Engineering Co. Brockway:  products may be ordered                                        10014 Big Bend Blvd. through Continental Glass & Plastics                                  Kirkwood, MO 63122

(800) 325-3362

Cincinnati Valve and Fitting Co.

3710 Southern Ave.                                              Difco Laboratories

Cincinnati, OH 45227                                           P.O. Box 331058

(513) 272-1212                                                     Detroit, MI 48232

(800) 521-0851 (Ask for a local distributor)

Cole-Parmer Instrument Co.

7425 N. Oak Park Ave.                                         Fisher Scientific

Niles, IL 60714                                                     711 Forbes Ave.

(800) 323-4340                                                     Pittsburgh, PA 15219

(800) 766-7000

 

 

 

VIII-46

 

Gelman Sciences                                                   Plast-o-matic Valves, Inc.

600 S. Wagner Rd.                                                1384 Pompton Ave

Ann Arbor, MI 48103                                           Cedar Grove, NJ 07009

(800) 521-1520                                                     (201) 256-3000 (Ask for a local distributor)

 

ICN Biomedicals                                                   Parker Hannifin Corp.

3300 Hyland Ave.                                                 Commercial Filters Div.

Costa Mesa, CA 92626                                         1515 W. South St., Lebanon, IN 46052

(800) 854-0530                                                     (317) 482-3900

 

Irvine Scientific                                                     Ryan Herco

2511 Daimler Street                                               2509 N. Naomi St.

Santa Ana, CA 92705                                           Burbank, CA 91504

(800) 437-5706                                                     (800) 848-1141

 

Life Technologies                                                  Sigma Chemical

P.O. Box 68                                                          P.O. Box 14508

Grand Island, NY 14072                                       St. Louis, MO 63178

(800) 828-6686                                                     (800) 325-3010

 

Millipore Corp.                                                      United States Plastic Corp.

397 Williams St.                                                    1390 Neubrecht Rd.

Marlboro, MA 01752                                           Lima, OH 45801

(800) 225-1380                                                     (800) 537-9724

 

Nalge Co.                                                              Watts Regulator

P.O. Box 20365                                                    Box 628

Rochester, NY 14602                                            Lawrence, MA 01845

(716) 586-8800 (Ask for a local distributor)           (508) 688-1811

 

Neptune Equipment Co. 520 W. Sharon Rd.

Forest Park, OH 45240 (800) 624-6975

 

OMEGA Engineering, Inc.

P.O. Box 4047 Stamford, CT 06907 (800) 826-6342

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

VIII-47

 

PART 8 — EXAMPLES

 

EXAMPLE 1

 

A source water sample of 211.98 L was collected at the Sampleville Water Works on 5/1/95 and shipped by overnight courier to CEPOR Laboratories. CEPOR Laboratories processed the sample on 5/2/95.  After elution, the pH of the beef extract V eluate was adjusted to 7.3 with 1 M HCl. The volume of the pH-adjusted eluate, 980 mL, was recorded. Volumes of 34.3 mL (980 × 0.035) and 98.0 mL (980 × 0.1) were removed for the Coliphage Assay (Section IX) and for archiving, respectively. An Adjusted Total Sample Volume (ATSV) was then calculated by multiplying 211.98 L × 0.865. An ATSV of 183 L was recorded on the Virus Data Sheet.

 

The sample was immediately processed by the Organic Flocculation Concentration Procedure. Following centrifugation at 4,000 ×g, the supernatant was adjusted to pH 7.3 and passed through a sterilizing filter. A Final Concentrated Sample Volume (FCSV) of 28.0 mL was obtained.

 

 

The Assay Sample Volume was calculated using the formula:

 

ASSAY  SAMPLE VOLUME (S)    D     

ATSV

 

× FCSV

 

 

 

where D is the Volume of Original Water Sample Assayed (i.e., 100 L for source water or 1000 L for finished water). Thus the Assay Sample Volume for Sampleville-01 is:

 

 

S     100 liters 183 liters

× 28.0 ml     15.3 ml

 

 

The 15.3 mL is the volume of the Final Concentrated Sample that must be inoculated onto tissue culture and that represents 100 L of the source water.

 

Two subsamples were prepared from the Final Concentrated Sample. Subsample 1 was prepared by placing 0.55 × 15.3 mL = 8.4 mL into a separate container. Subsample 2 was prepared by placing 0.67 × 15.3 mL = 10.2 mL into a third container. Although only 0.5

× 15.3 = 7.65 mL (representing 50 L of source water) must be inoculated onto tissue culture flasks for each subsample, the factor “0.55″ was used for subsample 1 to account for unrecov- erable losses associated with removing a subsample from its container. The factor “0.67″ was used for subsample 2 to account for losses associated with the container and to provide additional sample for the preparation of dilutions, if required.

 

 

VIII-48

 

Subsample 2 and the remaining portions of the Final Concentrated Sample were frozen at -70 C.

 

The inoculation volume was calculated to be 15.3 mL ÷ 20 = 0.76 mL per flask.  To make the inoculation procedure more convenient, it was decided to dilute subsample 1 so that

1.0 mL of inoculum contained an amount of subsample 1 equal to the inoculum volume. To

do this, 10.5 × (1.00 – 0.76) = 2.52 mL of 0.15 M Na2HPO4   7H2O, pH 7.3, was added to 10.5

× 0.76 = 7.98 mL of subsample 1. One milliliter of diluted subsample 1 was then inoculated

onto each of ten 25 cm2 flasks of BGM cells at passage 123. A negative control was prepared

by inoculating a flask with 1.0 mL of 0.15 M Na2HPO4   7H2O, pH 7.3. A positive control

was prepared by inoculating a flask with 1.0 mL of 0.15 M Na2HPO4   7H2O, pH 7.3 contain-

ing 200 PFU/mL of attenuated poliovirus type 3. Following adsorption, 9.0 mL of mainte-

nance medium was added and the cultures were incubated at 36.5 C. These cultures and those described below were observed for CPE as described in the protocol and positive cultures were frozen when 75% of a flask showed signs of CPE.

 

On May 9th five flasks inoculated with subsample 1 and the positive control showed signs of CPE. Because fewer than eight flasks inoculated with subsample 1 showed CPE, 10 additional 25 cm2 flasks of BGM cells at passage 124 were inoculated with 1.0 mL each of subsample 2 diluted in the same manner as subsample 1. Another negative control and positive control were also prepared and inoculated.

 

By May 16th a total of seven flasks inoculated with subsample 1 showed signs of CPE. The flasks that had not been previously frozen were now frozen at -70 C and then all flasks were thawed. Several milliliters of fluid from each of the eight positive flasks (seven samples plus the positive control) were passed through a sterilizing filter. Twelve flasks of BGM cells at passage 125 were inoculated with one milliliter of the supernatant from either negative cultures or from filtered positive cultures.

 

By May 23rd a total of five flasks from subsample 2 showed signs of CPE. All flasks were frozen, thawed and then passaged as described for subsample 1 using BGM cells at passage 126.

 

By May 30th only six flasks from the second passage of subsample 1 and the positive control showed CPE. Thus one culture from the 1st passage failed to confirm in the second pass and a value of 6 was recorded in the Number of Replicates with CPE column of the Total Culturable Virus Data Sheet . The flasks were then discarded.

 

On June 6th seven flasks (the five original plus two new flasks) from the second passage of subsample 2 demonstrated CPE. The two new flasks and controls were frozen at -70 C, thawed and passaged a third time as described above using BGM cells at passage 127.

All other flasks were discarded.

 

 

 

VIII-49

 

By June 12 the positive control and the two third passage flasks had developed CPE. All flasks were discarded at this time (the flasks would have been examined until 6/20 if at least one had remained negative). A value of 7 was recorded into the Number of Replicates with CPE column of the Total Culturable Virus Data Sheet .

 

The MPN software program supplied by the U.S. EPA was used to calculate the MPN/mL and 95% confidence limit values. “I. SIZE OF INOCULUM VOLUME (mL)” on the main screen was changed from 1 to 0.76. “A. PROCEED WITH DATA INPUT” was pressed followed by “ENTER” to overwrite the existing output file.  Alternatively, “NO” could have been entered and the output file renamed. The number of positive replicates, “13,” was then entered. Following the calculation by the program, the MPN and 95% Confidence Limit values were recorded onto the Quantitation of Total Culturable Virus Data Sheet .

The program was exited by pressing “I. EXIT THE PROGRAM.”

 

The MPN per 100 liter value (Ml) was calculated according to the formula:

 

 

M       100 MmS

l                      D

 100  ×  1.38 × 15.3     21.1

100

 

 

where Mm is the MPN value per milliliter from the Quantitation of Total Culturable Virus Data Sheet, S is the Assay Sample Volume and D is the Volume of Original Water Sample Assayed (S and D are obtained from the Virus Data Sheet).

 

The Lower 95% Confidence Limit per 100 liter (CLl) was calculated according to the formula:

 

 

CLl

100 CLlmS D

 100  ×  0.70 × 15.3     10.7

100

 

 

where CLlm is the lower 95% confidence limit per milliliter from the Quantitation of Total Culturable Virus Data Sheet.

 

The Upper 95% Confidence Limit per 100 liter (CLu) was calculated according to the formula:

 

 

 

CLu

100 CLumS D

 100  ×  2.27 × 15.3     34.7

100

 

 

 

 

 

 

VIII-50

 

where CLum is the upper 95% confidence limit per milliliter from the Quantitation of Total Culturable Virus Data Sheet.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

VIII-51

 

SAMPLE DATA SHEET
SAMPLE NUMBER:       Sampleville-01
UTILITY NAME:            Sampleville Water Works
UTILITY ADDRESS:     1 Water Street

CITY:  Sampleville                                              STATE:  OH             ZIP:  45999

SAMPLER’S NAME:  Mr. Brian Hall
WATER TEMPERATURE:  23.5  C                                     TURBIDITY:   3.6      NTU
WATER pH:  7.8
ADJUSTED WATER pH:  NA
THIOSULFATE ADDED:                     (CHECK)        YES                X NO
INIT. METER READING:  6048.10           CHECK UNITS:      X gallons     ft3

date:      5/1/95                                                 time:   9 am

FINAL METER READING:  6104.10         CHECK UNITS:      X gallons     ft3

date:      5/1/95                                                 time:   9:30 am

TOTAL SAMPLE VOLUME:                                   211.98  L

(Final-Initial meter readings × 3.7854 (for readings in gallons) or × 28.316 (for readings in ft3))

SHIPMENT DATE:  5/1/95
CONDITION ON ARRIVAL:  Cold/Not frozen
COMMENTS:

 

 

 

VIII-52

 

VIRUS DATA SHEET
SAMPLE NUMBER:  SAMPLEVILLE-01
ANALYTICAL LABORATORY NAME:   CEPOR LABORATORIES
ANALYTICAL LABORATORY ADDRESS: 42 RUECKERT ST.

CITY:   CINCINNATI                           STATE:  OH                         ZIP:  45219

ADJUSTED TOTAL SAMPLE VOLUME (ATSV): 1                               183  L
DATE ELUTED:  5/2/95 TIME:   10 am
ELUATE VOLUME RECOVERED:                                               980  mL
VOLUME OF ELUATE ARCHIVED:                                            98.0  mL
DATE CONCENTRATED:  5/2/95 TIME:   1 pm
FINAL CONCENTRATED SAMPLE VOLUME (FCSV):          28.0  mL
ASSAY SAMPLE VOLUME (S):                                                     15.3  mL
VOLUME OF ORIGINAL WATER SAMPLE

ASSAYED (D):                                                                                    100  L2

INOCULUM VOLUME:                                                                   0.76  mL
DATES ASSAYED                                                                                          3rd Passage

BY CPE:                                 1st Passage                   2nd Passage              (If necessary)

Subsample 1: 5/2/95 5/16/95
Subsample 2: 5/9/95 5/23/95 6/6/95
 

MPN/100 L3:       21

95% CONFIDENCE LIMITS

LOWER:    11           UPPER:    35

COMMENTS:
ANALYST: B.G. Moore
1Enter the Total Sample Volume times 0.965 if a coliphage sample is taken, times 0.9 if archiving is required, times 0.865 if a coliphage sample is taken and archiving is required or times 1 if a coliphage sample is not taken and archiving is not required.

2Must be at least 100 L for source water and 1000 L for finished water.

3Value calculated from the Quantitation of Total Culturable Virus form as described in the Virus Quantitation section of Part 3.

 

VIII-53

 

 

TOTAL CULTURABLE VIRUS DATA SHEET
SAMPLE #: Sampleville-01
Total Number of Replicates
Subsample 1 Subsample 2
Sample Inoculated Without CPE With CPE Inoculated Without CPE With CPE
1st Passage Neg. Cont. 1 1 0 1 1 0
Pos. Cont. 1 0 1 1 0 1
Undiluted 10 3 7 10 5 5
1:5 Dil.
1:25 Dil.
2nd Passage1

Neg. Cont.

1 1 0 1 1 0
Pos. Cont. 1 0 1 1 0 1
Undiluted 10 4 6 10 3 7
1:5 Dil.
1:25 Dil.
3rd Passage2

Neg. Cont.

1 1 0
Pos. Cont. 1 0 1
Undiluted 2 0 2
1:5 Dil.
1:25 Dil.
1A portion of medium from each 1st passage vessel, including controls, must be repas- saged for conformation. The terms “Undiluted,” “1:5 Dilution” and “1:25 Dilution” under the 2nd and 3rd Passage headings refer to the original sample dilutions for the 1st passage. If higher dilutions are used, record the data from the three highest dilutions showing positive results and place the actual dilution amount in the sample column.

2Samples that were negative on the first passage and positive on the 2nd passage must be passaged a third time for conformation. If a third passage is required, all controls must be passaged again.

 

 

 

VIII-54

 

QUANTITATION OF TOTAL CULTURABLE VIRUS   DATA SHEET
SAMPLE NUMBER: Sampleville-01
 

Sample

Number Replicates inoculated  

Number with CPE

 

MPN/mL1

95% Confidence Limits
Lower Upper
Undiluted Samples  

1.38

 

0.70

 

2.27

Subsample 1 10 6
Subsample 2 10 7
Total Undiluted 20 13
Subsample 2 results (Dilutions Required)
Undiluted
1:5 Dilution
1:25 Dilution
1Use the values recorded in the Total Undiluted row to calculate the MPN/mL result and confidence limits when dilutions are not required. If dilutions are required, base the calculation upon the values recorded in the Undiluted, 1:5 Diluted and 1:25 Diluted rows for subsample 2. If higher dilutions are used for subsample 2, record the data from the three highest dilutions showing positive results and place the actual dilution amount in the sample column. The MPN/mL and 95% Confidence Limit values must be obtained using the computer program supplied by the U.S. EPA.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

VIII-55

 

EXAMPLE 2

 

A source water sample of 200.63 L was collected at the Sampleville Water Works on 6/5/95 and shipped by overnight courier to CEPOR Laboratories. CEPOR Laboratories processed the sample on 6/6/95. After elution, the pH was adjusted to 7.3. A volume of 985 mL of pH-adjusted eluate was obtained and 34.5 mL (985 mL × 0.035) was removed for the Coliphage Assay (Section IX). Archiving was not required. An Adjusted Total Sample Volume of 194 L (200.63 L × 0.965) was recorded on the Virus Data Sheet.

 

The sample was immediately processed by the Organic Flocculation Concentration Procedure. Following centrifugation at 4,000 ×g, the supernatant was adjusted to pH 7.3 and passed through a sterilizing filter. A Final Concentrated Sample Volume of 32.0 mL was obtained, giving an Assay Sample Volume for Sampleville-02 of:

 

 

S      100 liters

194 liters

× 32.0 ml     16.5 ml

 

 

Subsample 1 was prepared by placing 0.55 × 16.5 mL = 9.1 mL into a separate container. Subsample 2 was prepared by placing 0.67 × 16.5 mL = 11.1 mL into a third container. Subsample 2 and the remaining portions of the Final Concentrated Sample were frozen at -70 C.

 

Subsample 1 was inoculated onto each of ten 25 cm2 flasks of BGM cells at passage 127 using an inoculation volume of 16.5 mL ÷ 20 = 0.82 mL per flask. A negative control

was prepared by inoculating a flask with 0.82 mL of 0.15 M Na2HPO4 7H2O, pH 7.3. A

positive control was prepared by inoculating a flask with 0.82 mL of 0.15 M Na2HPO4

7H2O, pH 7.3 containing 241.0 PFU/mL (200.0 PFU/0.82 mL) of attenuated poliovirus type 3. Following adsorption, 9.18 mL of maintenance medium was added and the cultures were incubated at 36.5 C.

 

On June 13 nine flasks inoculated with subsample 1 and the positive control showed signs of CPE. After thawing subsample 2, a 1:5 dilution was prepared by mixing 0.1334 ×

16.5 = 2.20 mL of subsample 2 with 0.5334 × 16.5 = 8.80 mL of 0.15 M Na2HPO4   7H2O,

pH 7.3. A 1:25 dilution was prepared by mixing 2.20 mL of the 1:5 dilutions with 8.80 mL of

2

0.15 M Na2HPO4   7H2O, pH 7.3. Ten 25 cm  flasks of BGM cells at passage 128 were then

inoculated with 0.82 mL each of undiluted subsample 2. Ten flasks were inoculated with

0.82 mL each of subsample 2 diluted 1:5 and ten flasks were inoculated with 0.82 mL each of subsample 2 diluted 1:25. Another negative control and positive control were also prepared and inoculated.

 

By June 20 all 10 flasks inoculated with subsample 1 showed signs of CPE and were repassaged as described in example 1.

 

VIII-56

 

By June 27 all 10 flasks inoculated with undiluted subsample 2 had developed CPE. Eight flasks inoculated with the 1:5 dilution of subsample 2 and four flasks inoculated with the 1:25 dilution of subsample 2 demonstrated CPE. All flasks were re-passaged as described for example 1.

 

By July 5th all 10 flasks from the second passage of subsample 1 were confirmed as positive and were discarded.

 

By July 11th all 10 flasks inoculated with the second passage of undiluted subsample 2 had developed CPE. The eight positive flasks from the 1st passage of the 1:5 dilution of subsample 2 were positive in the second passage. Three flasks inoculated with the second passage of the 1:25 dilution of subsample 2 remained positive.

 

The MPN software program supplied by the U.S. EPA was used to calculate the MPN/mL and 95% confidence limit values. After the main screen appeared, “G. NUMBER OF DILUTIONS” was changed from 1 to 3. “H. NUMBER OF REPLICATES PER DILU-

TION” was changed from 20 to 10 and “I. SIZE OF INOCULUM VOLUME (mL)” was changed from 1 to 0.82. “A. PROCEED WITH DATA INPUT” was pressed followed by “ENTER” to overwrite the existing output file. The number of positive replicates per dilution, “10, 8, and 3” was entered with the values separated by spaces. Following program calcula- tions, the MPN/mL and 95% Confidence Limit values/mL were recorded onto the Quantitation of Total Culturable Virus Data Sheet .  The program was exited by pressing “I. EXIT THE PROGRAM.”

 

The MPN per 100 liter value (Ml) was calculated according to the formula:

 

 

M       100 MmS

l                      D

100  ×  10.15 × 16.5     167

100

 

 

where Mm is the MPN value per milliliter from the Quantitation of Total Culturable Virus Data Sheet, S is the Assay Sample Volume and D is the Volume of Original Water Sample Assayed (S and D are obtained from the Virus Data Sheet).

 

The Lower 95% Confidence Limit per 100 liter (CLl) was calculated according to the formula:

 

 

CLl

100 CLlmS D

100  ×  5.04 × 16.5     83.1

100

 

where CLlm is the lower 95% confidence limit per milliliter from the Quantitation of Total Culturable Virus Data Sheet.

 

 

 

 

VIII-57

 

The Upper 95% Confidence Limit per 100 liter (CLu) was calculated according to the formula:

 

 

CLu

100 CLumS D

100  ×  18.25 × 16.5     301

100

 

 

where CLum is the upper 95% confidence limit per milliliter from the Quantitation of Total Culturable Virus Data Sheet.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

VIII-58

 

SAMPLE DATA SHEET
SAMPLE NUMBER:       Sampleville-02
UTILITY NAME:            Sampleville Water Works
UTILITY ADDRESS:     1 Water Street

CITY:   Sampleville                                              STATE:  OH             ZIP:  45999

SAMPLER’S NAME:  Mr. Brian Hall
WATER TEMPERATURE:  26.5  C                                     TURBIDITY:   2.3      NTU
WATER pH:  7.7
ADJUSTED WATER pH:  NA
THIOSULFATE ADDED:                     (CHECK)        YES                X NO
INIT. METER READING:  6129.3             CHECK UNITS:      X gallons     ft3

date:      6/5/95                                                 time:   8:30 am

FINAL METER READING:  6182.3           CHECK UNITS:      X gallons     ft3

date:      6/5/95                                                 time:   9:00 am

TOTAL SAMPLE VOLUME:                                   200.63  L

(Final-Initial meter readings × 3.7854 (for readings in gallons) or × 28.316 (for readings in ft3))

SHIPMENT DATE:  6/5/95
CONDITION ON ARRIVAL:  Cold/Not frozen
COMMENTS:

 

 

VIII-59

 

VIRUS DATA SHEET
SAMPLE NUMBER:  SAMPLEVILLE-02
ANALYTICAL LABORATORY NAME:   CEPOR LABORATORIES
ANALYTICAL LABORATORY ADDRESS: 42 RUECKERT ST.

CITY:  CINCINNATI                            STATE:  OH                         ZIP:  45219

ADJUSTED TOTAL SAMPLE VOLUME (ATSV): 1                               194  L
DATE ELUTED:  6/6/95 TIME:   9:50 am
ELUATE VOLUME RECOVERED:                                               985  mL
VOLUME OF ELUATE ARCHIVED:                                                 0  mL
DATE CONCENTRATED:  6/6/95 TIME:   1 pm
FINAL CONCENTRATED SAMPLE VOLUME (FCSV):          32.0  mL
ASSAY SAMPLE VOLUME (S):                                                     16.5  mL
VOLUME OF ORIGINAL WATER SAMPLE

ASSAYED (D):                                                                                    100  L2

INOCULUM VOLUME:                                                                   0.82  mL
DATES ASSAYED BY                                                                                 3rd Passage

CPE:                                          1st Passage               2nd Passage             (If necessary)

Subsample 1: 6/6/95 6/20/95
Subsample 2: 6/13/95 6/27/95
 

MPN/100 L3:       167

95% CONFIDENCE LIMITS

LOWER:    83           UPPER:   301

COMMENTS:
ANALYST: B.G. Moore
1Enter the Total Sample Volume times 0.965 if a coliphage sample is taken, times 0.9 if archiving is required, times 0.865 if a coliphage sample is taken and archiving is required or times 1 if a coliphage sample is not taken and archiving is not required.

2Must be at least 100 L for source water and 1000 L for finished water.

3Value calculated from the Quantitation of Total Culturable Virus form as described in the Virus Quantitation section of Part 3.

 

VIII-60

 

TOTAL CULTURABLE VIRUS DATA SHEET
SAMPLE #: Sampleville-02
Total Number of Replicates
Subsample 1 Subsample 2
Sample Inoculated Without CPE With CPE Inoculated Without CPE With CPE
1st Passage Neg. Cont. 1 1 0 1 1 0
Pos. Cont. 1 0 1 1 0 1
Undiluted 10 0 10 10 0 10
1:5 Dil. 10 2 8
1:25 Dil. 10 6 4
2nd Passage1

Neg. Cont.

1 1 0 1 1 0
Pos. Cont. 1 0 1 1 0 1
Undiluted 10 0 10 10 0 10
1:5 Dil. 10 2 8
1:25 Dil. 10 7 3
3rd Passage2

Neg. Cont.

Pos. Cont.
Undiluted
1:5 Dil.
1:25 Dil.
1A portion of medium from each 1st passage vessel, including controls, must be repas- saged for conformation. The terms “Undiluted,” “1:5 Dilution” and “1:25 Dilution” under the 2nd and 3rd Passage headings refer to the original sample dilutions for the 1st passage. If higher dilutions are used, record the data from the three highest dilutions showing positive results and place the actual dilution amount in the sample column.

2Samples that were negative on the first passage and positive on the 2nd passage must be passaged a third time for conformation. If a third passage is required, all controls must be passaged again.

 

 

 

 

VIII-61

 

QUANTITATION OF TOTAL CULTURABLE VIRUS DATA SHEET
SAMPLE NUMBER: Sampleville-02
 

Sample

Number Replicates inoculated  

Number with CPE

 

MPN/mL1

95% Confidence Limits
Lower Upper
Undiluted Samples  

10.15

 

5.04

 

18.25

Subsample 1 10 10
Subsample 2
Total Undiluted NA NA
Subsample 2 results (Dilutions Required)
Undiluted 10 10
1:5 Dilution 10 8
1:25 Dilution 10 3
1Use the values recorded in the Total Undiluted row to calculate the MPN/mL result and confidence limits when dilutions are not required. If dilutions are required, base the calculation upon the values recorded in the Undiluted, 1:5 Diluted and 1:25 Diluted rows for subsample 2. If higher dilutions are used for subsample 2, record the data from the three highest dilutions showing positive results and place the actual dilution amount in the sample column. The MPN/mL and 95% Confidence Limit values must be obtained using the computer program supplied by the U.S. EPA.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

VIII-62

 

PART 9 — DATA SHEETS 7

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7Copies of all Data Sheets are available upon request in WordPerfect for Windows, version 6.1 format.  Send requests to the ICR Laboratory Coordinator, USEPA, TSD,  26

  1. Martin Luther King Drive, Cincinnati, OH 45268.

 

VIII-63

 

SAMPLE DATA SHEET
SAMPLE NUMBER:
UTILITY NAME:
UTILITY ADDRESS: CITY:  

STATE:                     ZIP:

SAMPLER’S NAME:
WATER TEMPERATURE: C                                       TURBIDITY: NTU
WATER pH:
ADJUSTED WATER pH:
THIOSULFATE ADDED: (CHECK)    YES        NO
INIT. METER READING:

date:

CHECK UNITS:      gallons time:     ft3
FINAL METER READING:

date:

CHECK UNITS:      gallons time:     ft3
TOTAL SAMPLE VOLUME:                                                 L

(Final-Initial meter readings × 3.7854 (for readings in gallons) or × 28.316 (for readings in ft3))

SHIPMENT DATE:
CONDITION ON ARRIVAL:
COMMENTS:

 

 

VIII-64

 

VIRUS DATA SHEET
SAMPLE NUMBER:
ANALYTICAL LABORATORY NAME:
ANALYTICAL LABORATORY ADDRESS: CITY:                                                                    STATE:  

ZIP:

ADJUSTED TOTAL SAMPLE VOLUME (ATSV): 1 L
DATE ELUTED: TIME:
ELUATE VOLUME RECOVERED: mL
VOLUME OF ELUATE ARCHIVED: mL
DATE CONCENTRATED: TIME:
FINAL CONCENTRATED SAMPLE VOLUME (FCSV): mL
ASSAY SAMPLE VOLUME (S): mL
VOLUME OF ORIGINAL WATER SAMPLE ASSAYED (D):  

L

INOCULUM VOLUME: mL
DATES ASSAYED

BY CPE:                                 1st Passage                 2nd Passage

3rd Passage (If necessary)
Subsample 1:
Subsample 2:
 

MPN/100 L3:

95% CONFIDENCE LIMITS

LOWER:                   UPPER:

COMMENTS:
ANALYST:
1Enter the Total Sample Volume times 0.965 if a coliphage sample is taken, times 0.9 if archiving is required, times 0.865 if a coliphage sample is taken and archiving is required or times 1 if a coliphage sample is not taken and archiving is not required.

2Must be at least 100 L for source water and 1000 L for finished water.

3Value calculated from the Quantitation of Total Culturable Virus form as described in the Virus Quantitation section of Part 3.

 

VIII-65

 

TOTAL CULTURABLE VIRUS DATA SHEET
SAMPLE #:
Total Number of Replicates
Subsample 1 Subsample 2
Sample Inoculated Without CPE With CPE Inoculated Without CPE With CPE
1st Passage Neg. Cont.
Pos. Cont.
Undiluted
1:5 Dil.
1:25 Dil.
2nd Passage1

Neg. Cont.

Pos. Cont.
Undiluted
1:5 Dil.
1:25 Dil.
3rd Passage2

Neg. Cont.

Pos. Cont.
Undiluted
1:5 Dil.
1:25 Dil.
1A portion of medium from each 1st passage vessel, including controls, must be re- passaged for conformation. The terms “Undiluted,” “1:5 Dilution” and “1:25 Dilution” under the 2nd and 3rd Passage headings refer to the original sample dilutions for the 1st passage. If higher dilutions are used, record the data from the three highest dilutions showing positive results and place the actual dilution amount in the sample column.

2Samples that were negative on the first passage and positive on the 2nd passage must be passaged a third time for conformation. If a third passage is required, all controls must be passaged again.

 

 

 

 

VIII-66

 

QUANTITATION OF TOTAL CULTURABLE VIRUS DATA SHEET
SAMPLE NUMBER:
 

Sample

Number Replicates inoculated  

Number with CPE

 

MPN/mL1

95% Confidence Limits
Lower Upper
Undiluted Samples
Subsample 1
Subsample 2
Total Undiluted
Subsample 2 results (Dilutions Required)
Undiluted
1:5 Dilution
1:25 Dilution
1Use the values recorded in the Total Undiluted row to calculate the MPN/mL result and confidence limits when dilutions are not required. If dilutions are required, base the calculation upon the values recorded in the Undiluted, 1:5 Diluted and 1:25 Diluted rows for subsample 2. If higher dilutions are used for subsample 2, record the data from the three highest dilutions showing positive results and place the actual dilution amount in the sample column. The MPN/mL and 95% Confidence Limit values must be obtained using the computer program supplied by the U.S. EPA.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

VIII-67

 

SECTION IX. COLIPHAGE ASSAY

 

This Section outlines the procedures for coliphage detection by plaque assay. It should be noted that the samples to be analyzed may contain pathogenic human enteric viruses.

Laboratories performing the coliphage analysis are responsible for establishing an adequate safety plan.

 

ASSAY COMPONENTS

 

Apparatus and Materials:

 

  1. Sterilizing filter — 0.45 µm (Nuclepore Product No. 140667 or equivalent).

 

Always pass about 10 mL of 1.5% beef extract through the filter just prior to use to minimize phage adsorption to the filter.

 

  1. Water bath set at 44.5 ± 1 C.

 

  1. Incubator set at 36.5 ± 1 C.

 

Media and Reagents:

 

The amount of media prepared may be increased proportionally to the number of samples to be analyzed.

 

  1. Saline-calcium solution — dissolve 8.5 g of NaCl and 0.22 g of CaCl2 in a total of 1 L of dH2O. Dispense in 9 mL aliquots in 16 × 150 mm screw-capped test tubes (Baxter Product No. T1356-6A or equivalent) and sterilize by autoclaving at 121 C for 15 min.

 

  1. Tryptone agar slants — add 1.0 g tryptone (Difco Product No. 0123 or equivalent), 0.1 g yeast extract (Difco Product No. 0127 or equivalent), 0.1 g glucose, 0.8 g NaCl, 0.022 g CaCl2, and 1.2 g of Bacto-agar (Difco Product No. 0140 or equivalent) to a total volume of 100 mL of dH2O in a 250 mL flask. Dissolve by autoclaving at 121 C for 20 min and dispense 8 mL aliquots into 16 × 150 mm test tubes with tube closures (Baxter Product Nos. T1311-16XX and T1291-16 or equivalent). Prepare slants by allowing the agar to solidify with the tubes at about a 20  angle. Slants may be stored at 4 C for up to two months.

 

  1. Tryptone bottom agar — Prepare one day prior to sample analysis using the ingredients and concentrations listed for tryptone agar slants, except use 1.5 g of Bacto-agar. After autoclaving, pipet 15 mL aliquots aseptically into sterile 100 × 15 mm petri plates and allow the agar to harden. Store the plates at 4 C overnight and warm to room temperature for 1 h before use.

 

 

 

IX-1

 

  1. Tryptone top agar — Prepare the day of sample analysis using the ingredients and concentrations listed for tryptone agar slants, except use 0.7 g of Bacto-agar. Autoclave and place in the 44.5 ± 1 C water bath.

 

  1. Tryptone broth — Prepare on the day prior to sample analysis as for tryptone agar slants, except without agar.

 

  1. Beef extract V powder (BBL Microbiology Systems Product No. 97531) — prepare buffered 1.5% beef extract by dissolving 1.5 g of beef extract powder and 0.375 g of glycine (final glycine concentration = 0.05 M) in 90 mL of dH2O. Adjust the pH to 7.0 – 7.5, if necessary, and bring the final volume to 100 mL with dH2O. Autoclave at 121 C for 15 min and use at room temperature.

Beef extract solutions may be stored for one week at 4 C or for longer periods at -20 C.

 

SAMPLE PROCESSING

 

Step 1. To measure the concentration of coliphage in water samples, use the coliphage sample prepared from the pH-adjusted 1MDS eluate as described in the Elution Procedure in Part 2 of Section VII. Virus Monitoring Protocol .

 

Step 2. Filter the coliphage sample through a 0.45 µm sterilizing filter.

 

Step 3. Assay ten 1 mL volumes each for somatic and male-specific coliphage within 24 h. Store the remaining eluate at 4 C to serve as a reserve in the event of sample contamination or high coliphage densities. If the coliphage density is expected or demonstrated to be greater than 100 PFU/mL, dilute the original or remaining eluate with a serial 1:10 dilution series into saline-calcium solutions.  Assay the dilutions which will result in plaque counts of 100 or less.

 

SOMATIC COLIPHAGE ASSAY

 

Storage of E. coli C Host Culture for Somatic Coliphage Assay:

 

  1. For short term storage inoculate a Escherichia coli C (American Type Culture Collection Product No. 13706) host culture onto tryptone agar slants with a sterile inoculating loop by spreading the inoculum evenly over entire slant surface. Incubate the culture overnight at 36.5

± 1  C. Store at 4  C for up to two weeks.

 

  1. For long term storage inoculate a 5-10 mL tube of tryptone broth with the host culture. Incubate the broth culture overnight at 36.5 ± 1 C. Add 1/10th volume of sterile glycerol. Dispense into 1 mL aliquots in cryovials (Baxter Product No. T4050-8 or equivalent) and store at -70 C.

 

 

 

 

IX-2

 

Preparation of Host for Somatic Coliphage Assay:

 

Step 1.    Inoculate 5 mL of tryptone broth with E. coli C from a slant with an inoculating loop and incubate for 16 h at 36.5 ± 1 C.

 

Step 2. Transfer 1.5 mL of the 16 h culture to 30 mL of tryptone broth in a 125 mL flask and incubate for 4 h at 36.5 ± 1 C with gentle shaking. The amount of inoculum and broth used in this step can be proportionally altered according to need.

 

Preparation of X174 Positive Control:

 

Step 1.    Rehydrate a stock culture of X174 (American Type Culture Collection Product No. 13706-B1) and store at 4 C.

 

Step 2.    Prepare a 30 mL culture of E. coli C as described in section titled Preparation of Host for Somatic Coliphage Assay. Incubate for 2 h at 36.5 ± 1 C with shaking. Add 1 mL of rehydrated phage stock and incubate for an additional 4 h at 36.5 ± 1 C.

 

Step 3.    Filter the culture through a 0.45 µm sterilizing filter.

 

Step 4.    Prepare 10-7, 10-8 and 10-9 dilutions of the filtrate using saline-calcium solution tubes.

 

These dilutions should be sufficient for most X174 stocks. Some stocks may require higher or lower dilutions.

 

Step 5.    Add 1 mL of the 10-9 dilution into each of five 16 × 150 mm test tubes. Using the same pipette, add 1 mL of the 10-8 dilution into each of five additional tubes and then 1 mL of the 10-7 dilution into five tubes. Label the tubes with the appropriate dilution.

 

Step 6.    Add 0.1 mL of the host culture into each of the 15 test tubes from Step 5.

 

Step 7.    Add 3 mL of the melted tryptone top agar held in the 44.5 ± 1 C water bath to one test tube at a time. Mix and immediately pour the contents of the tube over the bottom agar of a petri dish labeled with sample identification information. Rotate the dish to spread the suspension evenly over the surface of the bottom agar and place it onto a level surface to allow the agar to solidify.

 

Step 8.    Incubate the inoculated plates at 36.5 ± 1 C overnight and examine for plaques the following day.

 

Step 9.    Count the number of plaques on each of the 15 plates (don’t count plates giving plaque counts significantly more than 100). The five plates from one of the dilutions should

 

 

 

IX-3

 

give plaque counts of about 20 to 100 plaques. Average the plaque counts on these five plates and multiply the result by the reciprocal of the dilution to obtain the titer of the undiluted stock.

 

Step 10.     Dilute the filtrate to 30 to 80 PFU/mL in tryptone broth for use in a positive control in the coliphage assay. Store the original filtrate and the diluted positive control at 4 C.

 

Before using the positive control for the 1st time, place 1 mL each into ten 16 × 150 mm test tubes and assay using Steps 6-8. Count the plaques on all plates and divide by 10. If the result is not 30 to 80, adjust the dilution of the positive control sample and assay again.

 

Procedure for Somatic Coliphage Assay:

 

Step 1. Sample preparation:

 

  1. Add 1 mL of the water eluate sample to be tested to each of ten 16 × 150 mm test tubes.

 

  1. Add 1 mL of buffered 1.5% beef extract to a 16 × 150 mm test tube for a negative control.

 

  1. Add 1 mL of the diluted X174 positive control to another 16 × 150 mm test tube.

 

Step 2. Add 0.1 mL of the host culture to each test tube containing eluate or positive control.

 

Step 3. Add 3 mL of the melted tryptone top agar held in the 44.5 ± 1 C water bath to one test tube at a time. Mix and immediately pour the contents of the tube over the bottom agar of a petri dish labeled with sample identification information. Tilt and rotate the dish to spread the suspension evenly over the surface of the bottom agar and place it onto a level surface to allow the agar to solidify.

 

Step 4. Incubate the inoculated plates at 36.5 ± 1 C overnight and examine for plaques the following day.

 

Step 5.    Count the total number of plaques on the ten plates receiving the water eluate. Step 6. Somatic coliphage enumeration.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

IX-4

 

  1. Calculate the somatic coliphage titer (Vs) in PFU per 100 L according to the formula:

 

V       100 ×  ×  × E

S                               × C

 

 

where P is the total number of plaques from Step 5, D is the reciprocal of the dilution made on the inoculum before plating (D = 1 for undiluted samples) and E is the total vol- ume of eluate recovered (from the Virus Data Sheet of the Total Culturable Virus Proto- col). I is the total volume (in mL) of the eluate sample assayed on the ten plates. C is the amount of water sample filtered in liters (from the Sample Data Sheet of the Total Cultur- able Virus Protocol). Record the value of VS in the ICR database.

 

  1. Count the plaques on the positive control plate.  Maintain a record of the plaque count as a check on the virus sensitivity of the E. coli C host. Assay any water eluate samples again where the positive control counts are more than one log below their normal average.

 

MALE-SPECIFIC COLIPHAGE ASSAY

 

Storage of E. coli Famp Host Culture for Male-Specific Coliphage Assay: 1

 

  1. For short term storage inoculate a Escherichia coli Famp host culture onto tryptone agar slants with a sterile inoculating loop by spreading the inoculum evenly over entire slant surface. Incubate the culture overnight at 36.5 ± 1 C. Store at 4 C for up to two weeks.

 

  1. For long term storage inoculate a 5-10 mL tube of tryptone broth with the host culture. Incubate the broth culture overnight at 36.5 ± 1 C. Add 1/10th volume of sterile glycerol. Dispense into 1 mL aliquots in cryovials (Baxter Product No. T4050-8 or equivalent) and store at -70 C.

 

Preparation of Host for Male-Specific Coliphage Assay:

 

Step 1. Inoculate 5 mL of tryptone broth with E. coli Famp from a slant with an inoculating loop and incubate for 16 h at 36.5 ± 1 C.

 

 

 

 

 

1The term “male-specific coliphage” refers to coliphages whose receptor sites are located on the bacterial F-pilus. The E. coli Famp strain to be used for ICR monitoring will be provided to virus analytical laboratories by a U.S. EPA  contractor.

 

IX-5

 

Step 2. Transfer 1.5 mL of the 16 h culture to 30 mL of tryptone broth in a 125 mL flask and incubate for 4 h at 36.5 ± 1 C with gentle shaking. The amount of inoculum and broth used in this step can be proportionally altered according to need.

 

Preparation of MS22 Positive Control:

 

Step 1. Rehydrate a stock culture of MS2 (American Type Culture Collection Product No. 15597-B1) and store at 4 C.

 

Step 2. Prepare a 30 mL culture of E. coli Famp as described in section titled Preparation of Host for Male-Specific Coliphage Assay. Incubate for 2 h at 36.5 ± 1 C with shaking. Add 1 mL of rehydrated phage stock and incubate for an additional 4 h at 36.5 ± 1 C.

 

Step 3. Filter the culture through a 0.45 µm sterilizing filter.

 

Step 4. Prepare 10-7, 10-8 and 10-9 dilutions of the filtrate using saline-calcium solution tubes.

 

These dilutions should be sufficient for most MS2 stocks. Some stocks may require higher or lower dilutions.

 

Step 5. Add 1 mL of the 10-9 dilution into each of five 16 × 150 mm test tubes.  Using the same pipette, add 1 mL of the 10-8 dilution into each of five additional tubes and then 1 mL of the 10-7 dilution into five tubes. Label the tubes with the appropriate dilution.

 

Step 6. Add 0.1 mL of the host culture into each of the 15 test tubes from Step 5.

 

Step 7. Add 3 mL of the melted tryptone top agar held in the 44.5 ± 1 C water bath to one test tube at a time. Mix and immediately pour the contents of the tube over the bottom agar of a petri dish labeled with sample identification information. Rotate the dish to spread the suspension evenly over the surface of the bottom agar and place it onto a level surface to allow the agar to solidify.

 

Step 8. Incubate the inoculated plates at 36.5 ± 1 C overnight and examine for plaques the following day.

 

Step 9. Count the number of plaques on each of the 15 plates (don’t count plates giving plaque counts significantly more than 100). The five plates from one of the dilutions should give plaque counts of about 20 to 100 plaques. Average the plaque counts on these five plates and multiply the result by the reciprocal of the dilution to obtain the titer of the undiluted stock.

 

2The MS2 positive control strain or a mixture of male-specific coliphage strains to be used for positive or quality controls will be supplied to virus analytical laboratories by  a

U.S. EPA contractor.

 

IX-6

 

Step 10.     Dilute the filtrate to 30 to 80 PFU/mL in tryptone broth for use in a positive control in the coliphage assay. Store the original filtrate and the diluted positive control at 4 C.

 

Before using the positive control for the 1st time, place 1 mL each into ten 16 × 150 mm test tubes and assay using Steps 6-8. Count the plaques on all plates and divide by 10. If the result is not 30 to 80, adjust the dilution of the positive control sample and assay again.

 

Procedure for Male-Specific Coliphage Assay:

 

Step 1. Sample preparation:

 

  1. Add 1 mL of the water eluate sample to be tested to each of ten 16 × 150 mm test tubes.

 

  1. Add 1 mL of buffered 1.5% beef extract to a 16 × 150 mm test tube for a negative control.

 

  1. Add 1 mL of the diluted MS2 positive control to another 16 × 150 mm test tube.

 

Step 2. Add 0.1 mL of the host culture to each test tube containing eluate or positive control.

 

Step 3. Add 3 mL of the melted tryptone top agar held in the 44.5 ± 1 C water bath to one test tube at a time. Mix and immediately pour the contents of the tube over the bottom agar of a petri dish labeled with sample identification information. Tilt and rotate the dish to spread the suspension evenly over the surface of the bottom agar and place it onto a level surface to allow the agar to solidify.

 

Step 4. Incubate the inoculated plates at 36.5 ± 1 C overnight and examine for plaques the following day.

 

Step 5.    Count the total number of plaques on the ten plates receiving the water eluate. Step 6. Male Specific coliphage enumeration.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

IX-7

 

  1. Calculate the male specific coliphage titer (VM) in PFU per 100 L according to the formula:

V        100 ×  ×  × E

M                               × C

 

 

where P is the total number of plaques from Step 5, D is the reciprocal of the dilution made on the inoculum before plating (D = 1 for undiluted samples) and E is the total vol- ume of eluate recovered (from the Virus Data Sheet of the Total Culturable Virus Proto- col). I is the total volume (in mL) of the eluate sample assayed on the ten plates. C is the amount of water sample filtered in liters (from the Sample Data Sheet of the Total Cul- turable Virus Protocol). Record the value of VM in the ICR database.

 

  1. Count the plaques on the positive control plate.  Maintain a record of the plaque count as a check on the virus sensitivity of the bacterial host. Assay any water eluate samples again where the positive control counts are more than one log below their normal average.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

IX-8

 

SECTION X. MEMBRANE FILTER METHOD FOR    E. coli

 

  1. CitationMETHOD 1103.1, 1985

 

2.       Scope

 

  • 1 This method describes a membrane filter (MF) procedure for the detection and enumeration of Escherichia coli (E. coli). Because the bacterium is a natural inhabitant only of the intestinal tract of warm-blooded animals, its presence in water samples is an indication of fecal pollution and the possible presence of enteric pathogens.

 

  • 2 The E. coli test is used as a measure of recreational water quality. Epidemiological studies have led to the development of criteria which can be used to promulgate recreational water standards based on established relationships between health effects and water quality. The significance of finding E. coli in recreational water samples is the direct relationship between the density of E. coli and the risk of gastrointestinal illness associated with swimming in the water (1).

 

  • 3 The test for E. coli can be applied to fresh, estuarine and marine waters.

 

  • 4 Since a wide range of sample volumes or dilutions thereof can be analyzed by the MF technique, a wide range of E. coli levels in water can be detected and enumer- ated.

 

  1. Summary – The MF method provides a direct count of bacteria in water based on the development of colonies on the surface of the membrane filter (2). A water sample is filtered through the membrane which retains the bacteria. After filtration, the membrane containing the bacterial cells is placed on a selective and differential medium, M-TEC, incubated at 35 C for 2 h to resuscitate injured or stressed bacteria, and then incubated at

44.5 C for 22 h.  Following incubation, the filter is transferred to a filter pad saturated with urea substrate. After 15 min, yellow or yellow-brown colonies are counted with the aid of a fluorescent lamp and a magnifying lens.

 

  1. Definition – In this method, E. coli are those bacteria which produce yellow or yellow- brown colonies on a filter pad saturated with urea substrate broth after primary culturing on M-TEC medium.

 

  1. Interferences – Water samples containing colloidal or suspended particulate material can clog the membrane filter and prevent filtration, or cause spreading of bacterial colonies which could interfere with identification of target colonies.

 

 

 

 

X-1

 

6.       Safety Precautions

 

  • 1 The analyst/technician must know and observe the normal safety procedures required in a microbiology laboratory while preparing, using, and disposing of cultures, reagents and materials and while operating sterilization equipment.

 

  • 2 Mouth-pipetting is prohibited.

 

7.       Apparatus and Equipment

 

  • 1 Glass lens, 2-5X magnification, or stereoscopic microscope.

 

  • 2 Lamp with cool, white fluorescent tube and diffuser.

 

  • 3 Hand tally or electronic counting device.

 

  • 4 Pipet container, stainless steel, aluminum, or borosilicate glass, for glass pipets.

 

  • 5 Pipets, sterile, T.D. bacteriological or Mohr, glass or plastic, of appropriate volume.

 

  • 6 Graduated cylinders, covered with aluminum foil or kraft paper and sterile.

 

  • 7 Membrane filtration units (filter base and funnel), glass, plastic or stainless steel, wrapped with aluminum foil or kraft paper and sterile.

 

  • 8 Ultraviolet unit for sterilizing the filter funnel between filtrations (optional).

 

  • 9 Line vacuum, electric vacuum pump, or aspirator for use as a vacuum source. In an emergency, or in the field, a hand pump, or a syringe equipped with a check valve to prevent the return flow of air, can be used.

 

  • 10 Flask, filter vacuum, usually 1 L, with appropriate tubing. A filter manifold to hold a number of filter bases is optional.

 

  • 11 Flask for safety trap, placed between the filter flask and the vacuum source.

 

  • 12 Forceps, straight or curved, with smooth tips to handle filters without damage.

 

  • 13 Ethanol, methanol or isopropanol in a small, wide-mouth container, for flame- sterilizing forceps.

 

  • 14 Burner, Bunsen or Fisher type, or electric incinerator unit for sterilizing inoculation loops.

 

 

X-2

 

  • 15 Thermometer, checked against a National Institute of Science & Technology (NIST) certified thermometer, or one traceable to an NIST thermometer.

 

  • 16 Petri dishes, sterile, plastic, 50 × 12 mm, with tight-fitting lids, or 60 × 15 mm, glass or plastic, with loose-fitting lids. 100 × 15 mm dishes may also be used.

 

  • 17 Bottles, milk dilution, borosilicate glass, screw-cap with neoprene liners, marked at 99 mL for 1-100 dilutions. Dilution bottles marked at 90 mL, or tubes marked at 9 mL may be used for 1-10 dilutions.

 

  • 18 Flasks, borosilicate glass, screw-cap, 250-2000 mL volume.

 

  • 19 Membrane filters, sterile, white grid marked, 47 mm diameter, with 0.45 ± 0.02 µm pore size.

 

  • 20 Absorbent pads, sterile, 47 mm diameter (usually supplied with membrane filters).

 

  • 21 Inoculation loops, at least 3 mm diameter, and needles, nichrome and platinum wire, 26 B & S gauge, in suitable holders. Disposable applicator sticks or plastic loops are alternatives to inoculation loops. Note: A platinum loop is required for the cytochrome oxidase test in 15.3.

 

  • 22 Incubator maintained at 35 ± 0.5 C, with approximately 90 percent humidity if loose-lidded petri dishes are used.

 

  • 23 Waterbath incubator maintained at 44.5 ± 0.2 C.

 

  • 24 Waterbath maintained at 44-46 C for tempering agar.

 

  • 25 Test tubes, 150 × 20 mm, borosilicate glass or plastic.

 

  • 26 Test tubes, 75 × 10 mm, borosilicate glass.

 

  • 27 Test tube caps, aluminum or autoclavable plastic, for 20 mm diameter test tubes.

 

  • 28 Test tubes, screw-cap, 125 × 16 mm or other appropriate size.

 

  • 29 Filter paper.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

X-3

 

8.       Reagents and Materials

 

  • 1 Purity of Reagents: Reagent grade chemicals shall be used in all tests. Unless otherwise indicated, reagents shall conform to the specifications of the Committee on Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society (3). The agar used in preparation of culture media must be of microbiological grade.

 

  • 2 Whenever possible, use commercial culture media as a means of quality control.

 

  • 3 Purity of Water: Reagent water conforming to Specification D1193, Type II water,
ASTM Annual Book of Standards (4).

 

  • 4 Buffered Dilution Water

 

8.4.1 Composition:
Sodium Dihydrogen Phosphate 0.58 g
Sodium Monohydrogen Phosphate 2.50 g
Sodium Chloride 8.50 g

 

  • 4.2 Preparation:  Dissolve the ingredients in 1 L of reagent water in a flask and dispense in appropriate amounts for dilutions in screw-cap bottles or culture tubes, and/or into containers for use as rinse water. Autoclave after preparation at 121 C (15 lb pressure) for 15 min. Final pH should be 7.4 ± 0.2.

 

  • 5 M-TEC Agar (Difco 0334-15-0)

 

8.5.1 Composition:
Proteose Peptone #3 5.0 g
Yeast Extract 3.0 g
Lactose 10.0 g
NaCl 7.5 g
Dipotassium Phosphate 3.3 g
Monopotassium Phosphate 1.0 g
Sodium Lauryl Sulfate 0.2 g
Sodium Desoxycholate 0.1 g
Brom Cresol Purple 0.08 g
Brom Phenol Red 0.08 g
Agar 15.0 g

 

  • 5.2 Preparation: Add 45.26 g of M-TEC medium to 1 L of reagent water in a flask and heat to boiling, until ingredients dissolve.  Autoclave at 121  C (15 lb pressure) for 15 min. and cool in a 44-46 C waterbath. Pour the

 

X-4

 

medium into each 50 × 10 mm culture dish to a 4-5 mm depth (approxi- mately 4-6 mL) and allow to solidify. Final pH should be 7.3 ± 0.2. Store in a refrigerator.

 

8.6           Urea Substrate Medium

 

8.6.1 Composition:
Urea 2.0 g
Phenol red 0.01 g

 

  • 6.2 Preparation: Add dry ingredients to 100 mL reagent water in a flask. Stir to dissolve and adjust to pH 5.0 with a few drops of 1N HC1. The substrate solution should be a straw-yellow color at this pH.

 

  • 7 Nutrient Agar (Difco 0001-02, BBL 11471)

 

8.7.1 Composition:

Peptone

 

5.0

 

g

Beef Extract 3.0 g
Agar 15.0 g

 

  • 7.2 Preparation: Add 23 g of nutrient agar ingredients to 1 L of reagent water and mix well. Heat in boiling waterbath to dissolve the agar completely. Dispense in screw-cap tubes, bottles or flasks and autoclave at 121 C (15 lb pressure) for 15 min. Remove tubes and slant. The final pH should be 6.8

± 0.2.

 

  • 8 Tryptic Soy Broth (Difco 0370-02) or Trypticase Soy Broth (BBL 12464)

 

8.8.1 Composition:
Tryptone or Trypticase 17.0 g
Soytone or Phytone 3.0 g
Sodium Chloride 5.0 g
Dextrose 2.5 g
Dipotassium Phosphate 2.5 g

 

  • 8.2 Preparation: Add 30 g of Tryptic (Trypticase) soy broth to 1 L of reagent water. Warm the broth and mix gently to dissolve the medium completely. Dispense in screw-cap tubes and autoclave at 121 C (15 lb pressure) for 15 min. The final pH should be 7.3 ± 0.2.

 

 

 

 

 

X-5

 

  • 9 Simmons’ Citrate Agar (BBL 11619, Difco 0091-02)

 

8.9.1 Composition
Magnesium Sulfate 0.2 g
Monoammonium Phosphate 1.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate 1.0 g
Sodium Citrate 2.0 g
Sodium Chloride 5.0 g
Brom Thymol Blue 0.08 g
Agar 15.0 g

 

8.9.2       Preparation: Add 24.28 g of Simmons’ citrate agar to 1 L of reagent water. Heat in boiling waterbath with mixing for complete solution. Dispense in screw-cap tubes and sterilize at 121 C (15 lb pressure) for 15 min. Cool tubes as slants. The final pH should be 6.8 ± 0.2.

 

  • 10 Tryptone (Difco 0123-02) or Trypticase Peptone (BBL 11920) Broth

 

8.10.1        Composition:

Tryptone or Trypticase peptone             10.0      g

 

  • 10.2 Preparation: Add 10 g of tryptone or trypticase peptone to 900 mL of reagent water and heat with mixing until dissolved. Bring solution to 1000 mL in a graduate or flask. Dispense in five mL volumes in tubes and autoclave at 121 C (15 lb pressure) for 15 min. The final pH should be 7.2

± 0.2.

 

  • 11 EC Broth (Difco 0314-02) or EC Broth (BBL 12432)

 

8.11.1 Composition:
Tryptose or Trypticase Peptone 20.0 g
Lactose 5.0 g
Bile Salts No. 3 or
Bile Salts Mixture 1.5 g
Dipotassium Phosphate 4.0 g
Monopotassium Phosphate 1.5 g
Sodium Chloride 5.0 g

 

8.11.2     Preparation: Add 37 g of EC medium to 1 L of reagent water and warm to dissolve completely. Dispense into fermentation tubes (150 × 20 mm tubes containing inverted 75 × 10 mm vials). Sterilize at 121 C (15 lb pressure) for 15 min. The final pH should be 6.9 ± 0.2.

 

 

 

X-6

 

  • 12 Cytochrome Oxidase Reagent: N, N, N1, N1 tetramethyl-p-phenylenediamine dihydrochloride, 1% aqueous solution.

 

  • 13 Kovacs’ Indole Reagent: Dissolve 10 g p-dimethylaminobenzaldehyde in 150 mL amyl or isoamyl alcohol and then slowly add 50 mL concentrated hydro- chloric acid and mix.

 

9.       Sample Collection, Preservation and Holding Times

 

  • 1 Sampling procedures are described in detail in the USEPA Microbiology Methods Manual, Section II, A (5). Adherence to sample preservation procedures and holding time limits is critical to the production of valid data. Samples not collected according to these rules should not be analyzed.

 

  • 1.1 Storage Temperature and Handling Conditions: Ice or refrigerate water samples at a temperature of 1-4 C during transit to the laboratory. Use insulated containers to assure proper maintenance of storage temperature. Take care that sample bottles are not totally immersed in water during transit or storage.

 

  • 1.2 Holding Time Limitations: Examine samples as soon as possible after collection. Do not hold samples longer than 8 h between collection and initiation of analyses.

 

10.    Calibration and Standardization

 

  • 1 Check temperatures in incubators daily to insure operation within stated limits.

 

  • 2 Check thermometers at least annually against an NIST certified thermometer or one traceable to NIST. Check mercury columns for breaks.

 

11.    Quality Control

 

  • 1 See recommendations on quality control for microbiological analyses in the

USEPA Microbiology Methods Manual , Part IV, C (5).

 

12.    Procedures

 

  • 1 Prepare the M-TEC agar and urea substrate as directed in Sections 8.5 and 8.6.

 

  • 2 Mark the petri dishes and report forms with sample identification and sample volumes.

 

 

 

X-7

 

  • 3 Place a sterile membrane filter on the filter base, grid-side up and attach the funnel to the base; the membrane filter is now held between the funnel and the base.

 

  • 4 Shake the sample bottle vigorously about 25 times to distribute the bacteria uniformly and measure the desired volume of sample or dilution into the funnel.

 

  • 5 For ambient surface waters and waste waters, select sample volumes based on previous knowledge of pollution level, to produce 20-80 E. coli colonies on the membranes. Sample volumes of 1-100 mL are normally tested at half-log intervals.

 

  • 6 Smaller sample size or sample dilutions can be used to minimize the interference of turbidity or high bacterial densities. Multiple volumes of the same sample dilution may be filtered and the results combined.

 

  • 7 Filter the sample and rinse the sides of the funnel at least twice with 20-30 mL of sterile rinse water. Turn off the vacuum and remove the funnel from the filter base.

 

  • 8 Use sterile forceps to aseptically remove the membrane filter from the filter base and roll it onto the M-TEC agar to avoid the formation of bubbles between the membrane and the agar surface. Reseat the membrane, if bubbles occur. Close the dish, invert, and incubate at 35 C for 2 h.

 

  • 9 After 2 h incubation at 35 C, transfer the plates to Whirl-Pak bags, seal, and place inverted in a 44.5 C waterbath for 22-24 h.

 

  • 10 After 22-24 h, remove the dishes from the waterbath. Place absorbent pads in new petri dishes or the lids of the same petri dishes, and saturate with urea broth. Aseptically transfer the membranes to absorbent pads saturated with urea substrate and hold at room temperature.

 

  • 11 After 15-20 min. incubation on the urea substrate at room temperature, count and record the number of yellow or yellow-brown colonies on those membrane filters ideally containing 20-80 colonies.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

X-8

 

13.    Calculation of Results

 

13.1        Select the membrane filter with the number of colonies within the acceptable range (20-80) and calculate the count per 100 mL according to the general formula:

 

  1. coli/100 mL =      NoEcoli  Colonies Counted     

Volume  in  mL  of  Sample Filtered

×  100 mL

 

 

13.2        See general counting rules in the USEPA Microbiology Methods Manual , Part II, C, 3.5 (5).

 

14.    Reporting Results

 

  • 1 Report the results as E. coli per 100 mL of sample.

 

15.    Verification Procedure

 

  • 1 Yellow or yellow-brown colonies from the urease test can be verified as E. coli. Verification of colonies may be required in evidence gathering, and is also recommended as a QC procedure with initial use of the test and with changes in sample sites, lots of commercial media or major ingredients in media com- pounded in the laboratory. The verification procedure follows:

 

  • 1.1 Using a sterile inoculation loop, transfer growth from the centers of at least 10 well-isolated typical colonies to nutrient agar plates or slants and to Tryptic (Trypticase) soy broth. Incubate the agar and broth cultures for 24 h at 35 C.

 

  • 1.2 After incubation remove a generous portion of material from the nutrient agar with a platinum loop and deposit on the surface of filter paper that has been saturated with cytochrome oxidase reagent prepared fresh that day. A positive test is indicated within 15 s by the development of a deep purple color where the bacteria were deposited.

 

  • 1.3 Transfer growth from the Tryptic (Trypticase) soy broth to Simmons’ citrate agar, Tryptone (Trypticase peptone) broth and EC broth in a fermentation tube. Incubate the Simmons’ citrate agar for 24 h and Tryptone (Trypticase peptone) broth for 48 h at 35 C. Incubate the EC broth at 44.5 C in a waterbath for 24 h. The water level must be above the level of the EC broth in the tube. Add one-half mL of Kovacs’ indole reagent to the 48 h Tryptone (Trypticase peptone) broth culture and shake the tube gently. A positive test for indole is indicated by a deep red color which develops in

 

 

X-9

 

the alcohol layer. E. coli is EC gas positive, indole positive, oxidase negative, and does not grow on citrate medium.

 

16.    Precision and Bias

 

  • 1 Performance Characteristics

 

  • 1.1 Precision – The degree of agreement of repeated measurements of the same parameter expressed quantitatively as the standard deviation or as the 95% confidence limits of the mean computed from the results of a series of controlled determinations. The M-TEC method precision was found to be fairly representative of what would be expected from counts with a Poisson distribution (2).

 

  • 1.2 Bias – The persistent positive or negative deviation of the average value of the method from the assumed or accepted true value. The bias of the M- TEC method has been reported to be -2% of the true value (2).

 

  • 1.3 Specificity – The ability of a method to select and/or distinguish the target bacteria under test from other bacteria in the same water sample. The specificity characteristic of a method is usually reported as the percent of false-positive and false-negative results. The false-positive rate reported for M-TEC medium averaged 9% for marine and fresh water samples. Less than 1% of the E. coli colonies observed gave a false-negative reaction (2).

 

  • 1.4 Upper Counting Limit (UCL) – That colony count above which there is an unacceptable counting error. The error may be due to overcrowding or antibiosis. The UCL for E. coli on M-TEC medium has been reported as 80 colonies per filter (2).

 

16.2            Collaborative Study Data

 

  • 2.1 A collaborative study was conducted among eleven volunteer laboratories, each with two analysts who independently tested local fresh and marine recreational waters and sewage treatment plant effluent samples, in dupli- cate. The data were reported to the Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory – Cincinnati, Ohio, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, for statistical calculations.

 

  • 2.2 The results of the study are shown in Figure X-1 where So equals standard deviation among replicate counts from a single analyst and Sb equals standard deviation between means of duplicates from analysts in the same

 

 

 

X-10

 

 

 

Figure X-1.  Precision Estimates for E. coli in Water by the Membrane Filter M-TEC Method

 

SO = Standard Deviation among Replicate Counts from a Single Analyst

SB = Standard Deviation between the Means of Duplicate Counts by Analysts in the Same Laboratory

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

laboratory. The precision estimates from this study did not show any difference among the water types analyzed.

 

  • 2.3 The precision of the method can be generalized as: So = 0.028 count/100 mL + 6.11 (dilution factor) and

Sb = 0.233 count/100 mL + 0.82 (dilution factor), where the

 

 

dilution factor =

                                      100                                     

VOLUME  OF  ORIGINAL  SAMPLE FILTERED

 

 

  • 2.4 Because of the instability of microbial populations in water samples, each laboratory analyzed its own sample series and no full measure of recovery or bias was possible. However, all laboratories analyzed a single surrogate sample prepared from a freeze-dried culture of E. coli. The mean count (x) and the overall standard deviation of the counts (St) (which includes the variability among laboratories for this standardized E. coli sample) were 31.6 colonies/membrane and 7.61 colonies/membrane, respectively.

 

17.    REFERENCES

 

  1. Cabelli, V.J., A.P. Dufour, M.A. Levin, L.J. McCabe, and P.W. Haberman. 1979. Relationship of Microbial Indicators to Health Effects at Marine Bathing Beaches. Amer. Jour. Public Health 69:690-696.

 

  1. Dufour, A.P., E. Strickland, and V.J. Cabelli. 1981. Membrane Filter Method for Enumerating Escherichia coli. Appl. and Environ. Microbiol. 41:1152-1158.

 

  1. Reagent Chemicals. 1981. American Chemical Society Specifications, 6th Edition, Am. Chem. Soc., Washington, D.C. For suggestions on the testing of reagents not listed by the American Chemical Society, see Reagent Chemicals and Standards. 1967. Joseph Rosin, D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc., Princeton, N.J., and the United States Pharmacopeia, Nineteenth Edition. 1974. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.

 

  1. Annual Book of ASTM Standards. 1985. Vol. 1101, Water, American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA.

 

  1. Bordner, R., J.A. Winter and P.V. Scarpino (eds.). 1978. Microbiological Methods for Monitoring the Environment. Water and Wastes, EPA-600/8-78-077, U.S. Environmen- tal Protection Agency, Office of Research and Development, Environmental Monitoring Support Laboratory – Cincinnati, Cincinnati, Ohio.

 

 

X-12

 

SECTION XI. MEMBRANE FILTER METHOD FOR   C. perfringens

 

1.       Scope and Application

 

  • 1 This procedure enumerates Clostridium perfringens spores from surface and drinking water. Since C. perfringens is present in large numbers in human and animal wastes and its spores are resistant to wastewater treatment practices, extremes in temperature and environmental stress, it is an indicator of present fecal contamination as well as a conservative tracer of past fecal contamination. Some investigators have proposed C. perfringens as an indicator of the presence and the density of pathogenic viruses and possibly other microorganisms.

 

  • 2 It is the user’s responsibility to insure the validity of this method for untested matrices.

 

  1. Summary of Method – An appropriate volume of water sample is passed through a membrane filter that retains the bacteria present in the sample. The membrane filter is placed on mCP agar and incubated anaerobically for 24 h at 44.5 C using a medium modified by Armon and Payment from Bisson and Cabelli (1,2). Upon exposure to ammonium hydroxide, the yellow straw-colored C. perfringens colonies turn dark pink to magenta and are counted as presumptive C. perfringens. Because of the selectivity of the mCP medium, a presumptive count is normally reported for routine monitoring purposes. Verification is not required for ICR monitoring, but if desired, colonies are confirmed by anaerobic growth in thioglycollate, a positive gram stain reaction and stormy fermentation of iron milk. The mCP counts are adjusted based on the percent confirmation. This method was originally prepared by Irwin Katz, U.S. EPA Region 2 for ASTM Subcom- mittee D19.24, Water Microbiology.

 

3.       Definitions

 

  • 1 C. perfringens – An obligate anaerobic gram-positive, spore forming, non-motile bacillus that ferments lactose with stormy gas production and ferments sucrose but does not ferment cellobiose. C. perfringens produces acid phosphatase and also produces exotoxins which cause gas gangrene and gastroenteritis.

 

  • 2 Spores – C. perfringens produces single oval subterminal spores less than 1 µm in diameter during adverse conditions. Sporulation can also occur in the intestinal tract. The endospore that develops is a highly refractile body formed  within the cell. Spores are resistant to heat, drying and chemical disinfectants, which would kill the vegetative cells of C. perfringens. This resistance to unfavorable conditions preserves the organisms for long periods of time.

 

 

 

 

XI-1

 

4.       Interferences

 

  • 1 Waters containing sediment or large quantities of colloidal or suspended materials such as iron, manganese, alum floc or algae can clog the filter pores and prevent filtration, or can cause the development of spreading bacterial colonies that mask other colonies and prevent accurate counting.

 

  • 2 When bacterial densities are high, a smaller sample volume or sample dilution can be filtered to minimize the interference of turbidity or high background (non-target) bacterial densities.  Replicates of smaller sample volumes or dilutions of sample may be filtered and the results combined. However, the membrane filter technique may not be applicable to highly turbid waters with low Clostridium densities.

 

  • 3 Toxic materials such as metals, phenols, acids, caustics, chloramines, and other disinfection by-products may also adversely affect recovery of Clostridium vegeta- tive cells on the membrane filter. Although most probable number (MPN) methods are not usually expected to generate results comparable to membrane filter meth- ods, an MPN method should be considered as an alternative procedure if the membrane filter method is not useable for these samples (3).

 

  • 4 Some lots of membrane filters produce low recoveries or poor differentiation of target and non-target colonies due to toxicity, chemical composition, or structural defects. Quality control checks should be made on new lots of membranes (4).

 

5.       Health and Safety

 

  • 1 This method does not address all safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine regulatory limitations prior to use.

 

  • 2 The analyst/technician must know and observe normal good laboratory practices and safety procedures required in a microbiology laboratory while preparing, using and disposing of cultures, reagents and materials and while operating sterilizers and other equipment and instrumentation.

 

  • 3 Mouth-pipetting is not permitted.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

XI-2

 

6.       Instruments, Equipment and Supplies

 

  • 1 Sample container, sterile, non-toxic glass or rigid plastic with screw cap, or plastic bag, minimum of 125 mL capacity.

 

  • 2 Pipet container, stainless steel, or aluminum, for sterilization and storage of glass pipets.

 

  • 3 Pipets, sterile T.D. bacteriological or Mohr, glass or plastic, of appropriate volumes.

 

  • 4 Graduated cylinders, 100 to 1000 mL, tops are covered with aluminum foil or kraft paper and sterilized.

 

  • 5 Bottles, milk dilution, borosilicate glass or non-toxic heat stable plastic, screw-cap with neoprene liners, marked at 99 mL for 1:100 dilutions. Dilution bottles marked at 90 mL or tubes marked at 9 mL may be used for 1:10 dilutions.

 

  • 6 Membrane filtration units, (filter base and funnel), glass, plastic or stainless steel, wrapped with aluminum foil or kraft paper and sterilized.

 

  • 7 Membrane Filters – sterile, white, grid marked, 47 mm diameter, with 0.45 ± 0.02

µm pore size or other pore sizes for which the manufacturer provides data demon- strating equivalency.

 

  • 8 Ultraviolet unit for disinfecting the filter funnel between filtrations in a series (optional).

 

  • 9 Line vacuum, electric vacuum pump or aspirator as a vacuum source.

 

  • 10 Flask, vacuum, usually 1 L, with appropriate tubing, to hold filter base. Filter manifolds to hold a number of filter bases are optional.

 

  • 11 Flask, safety trap, placed between the filter flask and the vacuum source.

 

  • 12 Forceps, straight or curved, with smooth tips to permit handling of filters without damage.

 

  • 13 Petri plates, plastic or glass, 50 × 9 mm, with tight-fitting lids, or 60 × 12 mm, with loose fitting lids (dimensions are nominal).

 

  • 14 Test Tubes, 20 × 150 mm, borosilicate glass or disposable plastic.

 

  • 15 Caps, aluminum or autoclavable plastic, for 20 × 150 mm test tubes.

 

 

XI-3

 

  • 16 Test Tubes, screw cap, 16 × 125 mm or other appropriate size.

 

  • 17 Inoculation loops, 3 mm diameter, and needles, nichrome or platinum wire, 26 B & S gauge, in suitable holders. Sterile disposable applicator sticks or plastic loops are acceptable alternatives to inoculation loops.

 

  • 18 Thermometers, 0-50 C, graduated to 0.2 degrees, and 0-100  C for heat shock which has been checked against the appropriate National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) certified thermometer, or against a thermometer traceable to NIST.

 

  • 19 Waterbath, that maintains 46-48 C for tempering agar.

 

  • 20 Waterbath with gable cover that maintains 60 C ± 0.5 C for heat shocking samples.

 

  • 21 Anaerobic system (anaerobic jar, reaction chamber, hydrogen/carbon dioxide disposable generator and anaerobic indicator), or any other system capable of producing the appropriate anaerobic conditions to support the growth of the organisms1.

 

  • 22 Filter Paper, circular, 11 cm, Whatman 40 or 110, or equivalent, for separation of mCP agar plates during anaerobic incubation.

 

  • 23 Incubator, that maintains 44.5 C ± 0.2 C and is large enough to hold the anaerobic chamber.

 

  • 24 Incubator, Water Bath, that maintains 44.5 C ± 0.2 C for incubation of Iron Milk Medium.

 

  • 25 Microscope, stereoscopic, wide-field type, with magnification of 10 to 15X.

 

  • 26 Microscope lamp, that produces diffuse light from a cool white fluorescent or tungsten lamp adjusted to give maximum visibility.

 

  • 27 Counting device, hand tally or electronic.

 

 

 

 

1BBL 60460 or BBL 60466 GASPAK Anaerobic System with BBL 70308 Disposable Hydrogen and Carbon Dioxide Generator Envelopes, BBL Microbiological  Systems,

Cockeysville, MD 21030, or equivalent.

 

 

XI-4

 

6.28    Sonication unit, to aid in dissolving reagents.2

 

7.       Reagents, Standards and Media

 

  • 1 Purity of Reagents – Use reagent grade chemicals in all tests. Unless otherwise indicated, all reagents must conform to the specifications of the Committee on Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society where such specifications are available (5). Other grades may be used, provided it is first ascertained that the reagent is of sufficiently high purity to permit its use without lessening the accuracy of the determination. Use microbiological grade agar in preparation of culture media. Whenever possible, use commercial culture media as a means of improved quality control.

 

  • 2 Purity of Water – Unless otherwise indicated, references to water mean reagent water as defined by Type II of Specification D1193 (6).

 

7.3        Buffered Dilution and Rinse Water

 

  • 3.1 Phosphate Buffer Dilution Water

 

  • 3.1.1 Stock Phosphate Buffer Solution – Dissolve 34.0 g of potassium dihydrogen phosphate (KH2PO4) in 500 mL of water. Adjust pH to

7.2 with 1 N NaOH and bring to 1000 mL with water. Dispense

aseptically into screw-cap bottles and autoclave for 15 min at 121 C. Alternatively, sterilize by filtration through a 0.2 µm pore membrane filter and dispense aseptically into sterile screw-cap bottles. Store in refrigerator and handle aseptically. If cloudiness, a marked change in pH, or other evidence of contamination appears, discard the stock.

Confirm that pH is 7.2 ± 0.5 before use.

 

  • 3.1.2 Magnesium Chloride Solution – Dissolve 81.4 g of hexahydrate magnesium chloride (MgCl2 6H20) in 1000 mL of water.  Mix well and sterilize by filtration or autoclave for 15 min at 121 C. Store in refrigerator and handle aseptically. If cloudiness, or other evidence of contamination occurs, discard the stock solution.

 

  • 3.1.3 Phosphate Buffered Dilution Water – Add 1.25 mL of stock phos- phate buffer solution and 5 mL of magnesium chloride solution to 1000 mL of water in a volumetric flask and mix well. Dispense dilution water in amounts which will provide 99 ± 2 mL after sterili-

 

2Bronson Sonifier, 500 W, or Tekmar Sonic Disrupter, 500 W with 3 mm tip set at 18 W, or equivalent.

 

XI-5

 

zation in screw-cap dilution bottles, or in larger volume containers for use as rinse water. Autoclave dilution bottles for 15 min at 121 C. Autoclave larger volumes for longer periods as appropriate. Alterna- tively, sterilize by filtration through a sterile 0.2 µm pore membrane filter unit and dispense aseptically into sterile screw-cap bottles.

 

7.3.2    Peptone Dilution and Rinse Water – Dissolve 1.0 g of peptone3 in 100 mL of water, and bring to 1000 mL with water. Dispense in screw-cap bottles in volumes to produce 99 ± 2 mL after autoclaving. Autoclave for 15 min. at 121 C. Final pH should be 6.8 – 7.0. Adjust as necessary.

 

  • 4 Ethanol – 95%, pure, for flame-sterilization of forceps and for preparation of acetone alcohol for gram stain.

 

  • 5 Ammonium Hydroxide Solution (29.2% NH4OH) – commercially available.

 

  • 6 Ferric Chloride Solution – Weigh out 4.5 g of FeC13 6H20 and dissolve in 100 mL of water.  Filter sterilize and store in refrigerator.

 

  • 7 Phenolphthalein diphosphate Solution – Weigh out 0.5 g of phenolphthalein diphosphate and dissolve in 100 mL of water. Filter sterilize and store in refrigera- tor.

 

  • 8 Indoxyl -D Glucoside Solution – Weigh out 0.06 g of Indoxyl -D Glucoside and dissolve in 80 mL of water (0.075 solution). Sonicator (item 6.28) can be used to speed dissolution.  Filter-sterilize and use in 7.9.2.

 

7.9        Modified mCP Agar (1)

 

7.9.1 Composition/L
Tryptose 30.0 g
Yeast Extract 20.0 g
Sucrose 5.0 g
L-cysteine Hydrochloride 1.0 g
MgSO4 7H20 0.1 g
Bromcresol Purple 0.04 g
Agar 15.0 g

 

  • 9.2 Preparation of Modified mCP Agar:  Add medium ingredients from

7.9.1 to 900 mL water in a liter Erlenmeyer flask.  Stir and heat to dissolve in a boiling water bath. Bring the pH to 7.6 with 1 N NaOH. Autoclave for

 

3Peptone (Difco 0118), Difco Laboratories, Detroit, MI, or  equivalent.

 

XI-6

 

15 min at 121 C (15 lbs pressure). Cool to 50 C. Add the following reagents aseptically and mix well:

 

D-cycloserine 0.4 g
Polymyxin B sulfate 0.025 g
4.5% FeCl3 6H20 solution 2.0 mL
0.5% Phenolphthalein diphosphate solution 20.0 mL
0.075% -D-Glucoside solution 80.0 mL

 

  • 9.3 Dispense 4-4.5 mL into each petri plate using a sterile Cornwall syringe or Brewer pipette. Store agar plates inverted in a plastic bag in a refrigerator for no more than one month. It is recommended that the plates be stored in an anaerobic chamber in the refrigerator for optimal preservation.

 

7.10     Modified Iron Milk Medium (7)

 

  • 10.1 Composition/L

Fresh pasteurized, homogenized milk

(3.5% butterfat)                                                   1.0      L

FeSO4 7H2O                                                       1.0      g

 

  • 10.2 Preparation: Dissolve ferrous sulfate in 50 mL water. Add slowly to 1 L milk and mix with magnetic stirrer. Dispense 11 mL of medium into culture tubes. Cap and autoclave 12 min at 118 C. CAUTION: Do not exceed the recommended time and temperature limits to avoid coagulation.

 

7.11 Fluid Thioglycollate Medium 4

 

7.11.1  Composition/L

 

L-Cystine

 

 

 

 

0.5

 

 

 

 

g

Agar (granulated) 0.75 g
NaCl 2.5 g
Dextrose (anhydrous) 5.0 g
Yeast extract 5.0 g
Tryptone 15.0 g
Sodium thioglycollate 0.5 g
Resazurin 0.001 g

 

 

4Fluid Thioglycollate Medium (BBL 12461), Becton-Dickinson Microbiology Systems, Cockeysville, MD; (Difco 0432-02-6) Difco Laboratories, Detroit, MI; or equivalent.

 

XI-7

 

7.11.2 Preparation: Suspend 29.25 g of medium in 1 L of water. Mix thor- oughly and heat to boil for 1-2 min or until solution is complete. Final pH is 7.1 ± 0.1. Dispense 15 mL portions into culture tubes. Cap and auto- clave for 15 min at 121 C.  Store tubes in the dark at room temperature. Do not refrigerate. If medium becomes oxidized (more than 30% of medium is pink), reheat once only in boiling water bath and cool before use.

 

7.12     Gram Stain Reagents

 

  • 12.1 Gram stain reagent kits are commercially available and are recommended.

 

  • 12.2 Ammonium oxalate-crystal violet (Hucker’s) : Dissolve 2 g crystal violet (90% dye content) in 20 mL 95% ethyl alcohol. Dissolve 0.8 g

(NH4)2C2O4 H2O in 80 mL water; mix the two solutions and age for 24 h before use. Filter through a 0.22 µm membrane filter. Store in a glass bottle.

 

  • 12.3 Lugol’s solution, Gram’s modification : Grind 1 g iodine crystals and 2 g KI in a mortar. Add water, a few mL at time, and grind thoroughly after each addition until solution is complete. Filter solution through a 0.22 µm membrane filter, and rinse into an amber glass bottle with the remaining water (using a total of 300 mL).

 

  • 12.4 Counterstain: Dissolve 2.5 g safranin dye in 100 mL 95% ethyl alcohol. Add 10 mL to 100 mL water. Filter through a 0.22 µm membrane filter.

 

  • 12.5 Acetone alcohol: Mix equal volumes of ethyl alcohol (95%) with acetone.

 

8.       Sample Collection, Preservation and Holding Times

 

  • 1 Collection – Water samples are collected in sterile sample containers with leak- proof lids.

 

  • 2 Sample Preservation and Holding Conditions – Hold water samples at a temper- ature below 10 C during transit to the laboratory by placing them on ice, surround- ing them with blue ice or by refrigeration. Use insulated containers to maintain storage temperature during transit. Take care that sample bottle closures are not submerged in water during transit or storage.

 

  • 3 Holding Time – Refrigerate samples upon arrival in the laboratory and analyze within 8 h after collection. C. perfringens spores can survive for extended periods

 

 

 

XI-8

 

at 1-4 C. However, since a correlation is planned with other indicators, the holding time for C. perfringens must be limited to that of the other indicators.

 

9.       Quality Control

 

  • 1 Adherence to sampling procedures, preservation procedures and holding time limits is critical to the production of valid data. Reject samples if appropriate sampling, preservation and handling procedures have not been followed

 

  • 2 Check and record temperatures in incubators daily to insure operation within stated limits.

 

  • 3 Check thermometers at least annually against a National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) certified thermometer or one traceable to NIST and record the results. Examine mercury columns for separation and reunite before use. Adjust or post correction factors on equipment.

 

  • 4 Use a loop to inoculate mCP agar plates with pure cultures of C. perfringens and E. coli. Carry these plates through the entire analytical procedure, as positive and negative controls.

 

  • 5 For general quality control recommendations, see “Quality Assurance for Microbi- ological Analyses” in ASTM Special Technical Testing Publication 867 (8).

 

10.    Procedure for Analyses of Water Samples for Spores

 

  • 1 Prepare mCP Agar according to Section 7.9.

 

  • 2 Mark the bottoms of the petri plates and laboratory data sheets with sample identities and volumes.

 

  • 3 Grasp a sterile membrane filter by its edge using a sterile forceps and place on the filter base, grid side up. Attach the funnel to the base of the filter unit; the mem- brane filter is now held between the funnel and the base.

 

  • 4. Procedure for Inactivation of Vegetative Cells – To obtain a count only of C. perfringens spores, hold water samples in a waterbath at 60 C for 15 min to kill all vegetative cells.

 

  • 4.1 Equilibrate a waterbath at 60 C.

 

  • 4.2 Determine the time necessary to bring a blank sample to 60 C. Use the same size container and volume as used for water samples.

 

 

XI-9

 

  • 4.3 Immerse the containers containing the water samples in the waterbath for the time necessary to warm sample to 60 C plus 15 min. Do not allow the container cap or container opening to become contaminated by water in the bath.

 

  • 4.4 Cool the sample containers in cold tap water immediately after heat shock and proceed with the analyses in 10.3.

 

  • 5 For greatest accuracy, it is necessary to filter a sample volume that will yield a countable plate. Select sample volumes based on previous knowledge, which will produce membrane filter plates with 20-80 C. perfringens colonies.  A narrow range of dilution factors of 4 or 5 can usually be used to achieve the desired number of colonies. An example of such factors is shown in Table XI-1. How- ever, if past analyses of specific samples have resulted in confluent growth or “too numerous to count” (TNTC) membranes from excessive turbidity, additional samples should be collected and filtration volumes adjusted to provide isolated colonies from one or more smaller volumes. The counts from smaller volumes can be combined for a final count/total volume filtered.

 

  • 6 Shake the sample bottle vigorously about 25 times and measure the desired volume of sample into the funnel with the vacuum off. To measure the sample accurately and obtain good distribution of colonies on the filter surface, use the following procedures:

 

  • 6.1 Sample volumes of 20 mL or more: Measure the sample in a sterile grad- uated cylinder and pour it into the funnel. Rinse the graduate twice with sterile dilution water, and add the rinse water to the funnel.

 

  • 6.2 Sample volumes of 10-20 mL: Measure the sample with a sterile 10 mL or 20 mL pipet into the funnel.

 

  • 6.3 Sample volumes of 1-10 mL: Pour about 10 mL of sterile dilution water into the funnel without vacuum. Add the sample to the sterile water using appropriate sterile pipet and filter the sample.

 

  • 6.4 Sample volumes of less than 1.0 mL: Prepare appropriate dilutions in sterile dilution water and proceed as applicable in steps 10.6.1-10.6.3 above.

 

  • 6.5 To reduce the chance for carryover, when analyzing a series of samples or dilutions, filter samples in the order of increasing volumes of original sample. The time elapsing between preparation of sample dilutions and filtration should be minimal and never more than 30 min.

 

 

XI-10

 

 

Table XI-1. Sample Volumes to Obtain Colony Count on Membrane Filters *

(Range of 20 – 80 Colonies)

Sample Volume in mL Added as:
0.05 5.0 mL of 10-2  dilution
0.20 2.0 mL of 10-1  dilution
0.80 8.0 mL of 10-1  dilution
3.20 3.2 mL of Undiluted Sample
15.00 15.0 mL of Undiluted Sample
60.00 60.0 mL of Undiluted Sample
*The range of volumes and dilutions selected for filtration of completely unknown samples can be broader, to provide a factor of 10 or  more.

Prepare at least three sample increments.

 

 

  • 7 After adding the sample to filter funnel, turn on vacuum and filter the sample. Rinse the sides of the funnel walls at least twice with 20-30 mL of sterile dilution water. Turn off vacuum and remove the funnel from the filter base.

 

  • 8 Flame forceps, cool and aseptically remove the membrane filter from the filter base. Place the filter, grid side up, on the mCP agar using a rolling motion to prevent air bubbles. Reseat the filter if bubbles occur.

 

  • 9 Remove the lids from mCP agar plates. Invert lids and nest them under the corresponding plate bottom for identification. Stack the plates in layers in the anaerobic chamber, separating each plate with sterile filter paper. Incubate the anaerobic chamber at 44.5 C for 24 h, maintaining anaerobic conditions through the use of a commercial anaerobic system. If visible condensation does not occur within 60 min after the BBL GasPak is activated, the reaction should be terminated by opening the jar, and removing the GasPak. Inspect the chamber seal for alignment and lubricant. Insert a new GasPak and seal the chamber. The dispos- able anaerobic indicator (moistened flat fiber wick impregnated with 0.35% methylene blue solution) is white to pale blue upon opening foil envelope. It turns blue upon exposure to air. Under anaerobic conditions the methylene blue indica- tor will decolorize (turn white) within 2 – 4 h. It should remain white through the incubation period.

 

  • 10 After 24 h, remove one agar plate at a time from the chamber and reclose the chamber. Examine the mCP plate for straw-yellow colonies. If such colonies are

 

 

XI-11

 

present, invert and expose the open agar plate 10-30 sec to the fumes from an open container of concentrated ammonium hydroxide.

 

  • 11 If C. perfringens colonies are present, the phosphate in the phenolphthalein diphosphate will be cleaved from the substrate by acid phosphatase and typical colonies of C. perfringens will turn a dark pink or magenta after exposure to fumes of ammonium hydroxide.

 

  • 12 Count pink or magenta colonies as presumptive C. perfringens.

 

  • 13 Repeat steps 10.10 to 10.12 with the other culture plates.

 

11.    Confirmation Tests

 

  • 1 Pick at least 10 typical isolated C. perfringens colonies from the mCP plate and transfer each into a separate thioglycollate tube. Incubate at 35 C for 24 h. Examine by gram stain and for purity. C. perfringens are short gram-positive bacilli.  Retain tubes for further testing.

 

  • 2 Inoculate ten tubes of iron milk medium with 1 mL from the ten fluid thioglycollate tubes and incubate in a 44.5 C waterbath for two h. Examine hourly for stormy fermentation with rapid coagulation and fractured rising curd.

 

  • 3 Those colonies which are gram-positive, non-motile, and produce stormy fermenta- tion of milk in these confirmatory tests are considered confirmed C. perfringens.

 

12.    Data Analyses, Calculations and Reporting Results

 

  • 1 Pink or magenta colonies counted on mCP medium are adjusted to a count/100 mL and reported as: Presumptive C. perfringens colony forming units (CFU)/100 mL. The presumptive count is normally used for routine monitoring.

 

  • 2 If confirmation tests are performed, original counts on mCP agar are adjusted based on the percent of colonies picked and confirmed. Report as confirmed C. perfringens CFU/100 mL of water sample.

 

13.    Method Performance Characteristics

 

  • 1 The detection limit is one C. perfringens CFU per sample volume or sample dilution tested.

 

 

 

 

 

XI-12

 

  • 2 The false positive rate is reported to be 7-9% by Bisson and Cabelli (2) and Fujioka and Shizumura (10). The false negative rate is reported to be 3% by Fujioka and Shizumura (10).

 

  • 3 The single laboratory recovery is reported to be 79-90% by Bisson and Cabelli (2).

 

  • 4 In a collaborative study, sixteen analysts from nine laboratories analyzed a sedi- ment, a non-chlorinated wastewater and three spiked waters (marine water, lake water and a finished drinking water), as unknowns. Analysts were provided range values to reduce the number of dilutions necessary for the analyses.

 

  • 4.1 The single operator precision as % Relative Standard Deviation (RSD) ranged from 14-28% while the overall precision (as % RSD) ranged from 24-41%, for St/So (overall precision/single operation precision) ratios of 1.13-1.80. The larger RSD values were not generated with the more difficult sample matrices of sediment and wastewater. Rather, they oc- curred with the seeded finished drinking water sample and are believed to have been caused by overestimates of the concentration of C. perfringens, which resulted in marginally low plate counts with inherently greater deviations. Overall, the St and So values were similar across sample types and concentration levels of C. perfringens.

 

  • 4.2 Although there were no “standards” available for this RR study, sample 5, a seeded drinking water, had a reference count of 78 C. perfringens CFU/100 mL. The laboratories in this study achieved a mean recovery of 67 CFU from Sample 5 for an 86 percent recovery.

 

  • 4.3 Table XI-2 contains the statistical summary of the collaborative study results.

 

Table XI-2. Statistical Evaluation of Results (CFU/100 mL) (After Rejection of Outliers)
Sample Initial n Final n X S0 St %RSD (So) %RSD (St)
1 30 30 2893.63 397.78 715.45 13.75 24.73
2 36 35 108.09 20.34 26.18 18.82 24.22
3 30 30 73.07 20.29 23.23 27.77 31.79
4 36 35 5985.71 1400.70 1585.80 23.40 26.49
5 27 27 67.22 18.64 27.60 27.73 41.06

 

 

XI-13

 

14.    Pollution Prevention

 

  • 1 Pollution prevention is any technique that reduces or eliminates the quantity or toxicity of waste at the point of generation. It is the environmental management tool preferred over waste disposal or recycling. When feasible, laboratory staff should use a pollution prevention technique such as preparation of the smallest practical volumes of reagents, standards and media or downsizing of the test units in a method.

 

  • 2 The laboratory staff should also review the procurement and use of equipment and supplies for other ways to reduce waste and prevent pollution. Recycling should be considered whenever practical.

 

  1. Waste Management – The Environmental Protection Agency requires that laboratory waste management practices be conducted consistent with all applicable rules and regulations. The Agency urges laboratories to protect the air, water and land by minimiz- ing and controlling releases from hoods and bench operations, complying with the letter and spirit of sewer discharge permits and regulations and by complying with solid and hazardous waste regulations, particularly the hazardous waste identification rules and land disposal restrictions.

 

  1. Key Words Clostridium, Clostridium perfringens, anaerobic bacteria, spore-forming bacteria, indicator organisms, pollution, water quality.

 

17.    References:

 

  1. Armon, R. and P. Payment, 1988. A modified mCP Medium for enumerating

Clostridium perfringens from Water Samples. Can. J. Microbiol. 34: 78-79.

 

  1. Bisson, J.W., and V.J. Cabelli, 1979. membrane filter enumeration method for

Clostridium perfringens, Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 37:55-66.

 

  1. St. John, W.D., J.R. Matches, and M.M. Wekell, 1982. Use of iron milk medium for enumeration of Clostridium perfringens. J. Assoc. Off. Anal. Chem. 65:1129-1133.

 

  1. Brenner, K. and C. Rankin, 1990. New Screening Test to Determine the Acceptabil- ity of 0.45 µm Membrane Filters of Analysis of Water, Appl. Environ. Microbiol., 56:54-64.

 

  1. Reagent Chemicals, American Chemical Society Specifications, American Chemical Society, Washington, DC. For suggestions on testing reagents not listed by the American Chemical Society, see Analar Standards for Laboratory Chemicals, BDH LTD, Poole, Dorset, U.K. and the United States Pharmacopeia.

 

 

XI-14

 

  1. American Society for Testing and Materials, Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol.

11.01.  ASTM, Philadelphia, PA 19103-1187.

 

  1. FDA Bacteriological Analytical Manual, 7th Ed., AOAC International, Arlington, VA, 1992, Iron Milk Medium (modified), 476-477.

 

  1. Bordner, R.H., J.A. Winter and P.V. Scarpino (eds.), 1978. Microbiological Meth- ods for Monitoring the Environment, Water and Wastes, EPA-600/8-78-017, U.S. Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio, 5-31 or Bordner, R., 1985. Quality Assurance for Microbiological Analyses of Water. in: Quality Assurance for Environmental Measurements . ASTM STP 867, Ameri- can Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA, pp. 133-143.5

 

  1. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 18th ed. 1992. APHA, Washington, D.C., 1992, Sections 9060A and 9060B.

 

  1. Fujioka, R.S. and Shizumura, L.K. 1985. Clostridium perfringens, A Reliable Indicator of Stream Water Quality, JWPCF, 57:986-992.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

XI-15

 

APPENDIX A. VERIFICATION OF STATE CERTIFICATION

Please complete the following: Laboratory Name:

Address:

City:                                                  State:                                Zip: Contact Person:

Telephone:    (       )

Laboratory Type:        Utility:              Commercial:              State:               Other:

 

 

Certification: The information requested in this section is necessary to verify the Drinking Water Laboratory certifications listed below. Please fill-out completely and supply all requested documentation.

 

ANALYTICAL METHODS PERFORMED (Indicate Methods Performed with a ) STATE(S)

in Which Certified

CERTIFICATION
Type Certification Date
TC-MF
TC-MTF
FC-MF
FC-MTF
EC + MUG
ONPG – MUG
NA + MUG

 

Please attach a copy of your current letter(s) or certificate(s) of approval for conducting the above analyses and return to:

 

ICR Laboratory Coordinator

U.S. EPA, OGWDW Technical Support Division

26 West Martin Luther King Drive Cincinnati, Ohio 45268

 

 

ApA-1

 

APPENDIX B. APPLICATION FOR LABORATORY APPROVAL FOR THE INFORMATION COLLECTION RULE (ICR)

 

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) is proposing to require public water systems which serve 10,000 people or greater to generate and provide the Agency with specific monitoring data and other information characterizing their systems. Depending on the population served, systems which use surface water, or ground water under the direct influence of surface water, would be required to monitor their source water at the intake of each plant for two disease-causing protozoa, Giardia and Cryptosporidium, total coliforms and fecal coliforms or Escherichia coli. Systems which serve more than 100,000 people would be required to monitor their source water at the intake of each plant for the microorganisms indicated above, plus total culturable viruses. When pathogen levels equal or exceed one virus or protozoan per liter in the source water, systems would also be required to monitor their finished waters for these microorganisms.

 

Laboratories monitoring for protozoa and viruses would have to be approved by the U.S. EPA. The attached information describes the minimal requirements for approval to perform protozoan and/or virus analyses under the Information Collection Rule. Accepted applicants will also be required to demonstrate capabilities based on analyses of unknown samples and an on-site inspection of their facility.

 

Those interested in being approved must first demonstrate their qualifications by complet- ing the attached application(s) and forwarding it (them) to:

 

ICR Laboratory Coordinator

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Office of Ground Water and Drinking Water

Technical Support Division

26 West Martin Luther King Drive Cincinnati, Ohio 45268

 

Qualified applicants will be provided a copy of the ICR Microbial Laboratory Manual

describing fully the approval requirements.

 

Since total coliform and fecal coliform/E. coli analyses proposed under the ICR are required under the Drinking Water Laboratory Certification Program, laboratory approval for these analyses is not required under the ICR if State certification can be verified (see Appen- dix A).

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ApB-1

 

MINIMAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VIRUS LABORATORIES

 

Background Information:

 

For ICR approval, the virus analytical laboratories must have suitable facilities, equip- ment, instrumentation, and an ongoing quality assurance (QA) program. Analysts must be experienced in viral analyses and meet performance evaluation criteria. As laboratories are approved, the U.S. EPA will provide an updated list of those laboratories with Agency approved analysts to the public water systems that serve a population of 100,000 or more.

 

Analytical Methods:

 

The proposed virus protocol was published in the Federal Register, Vol. 59, No. 28, February 10, 1994, 40 CFR Part 141 Monitoring Requirements For Public Drinking Water Supplies; Proposed Rule; pp. 6430-6444. The final draft method will be provided to those applicants that meet the minimal requirements set forth in this document. The final method will be available at the time the ICR is promulgated.

 

Sample Collection:

 

Each analytical laboratory will be responsible for procuring, assembling, sterilizing, and transporting the sample collection apparatus to the water system. Systems will be advised on proper collection techniques by the analytical laboratory in accordance with the procedures in the ICR virus protocol. A virus sampling video will be available to the system to reinforce instructions received from the analytical laboratory.

 

Approval of an Analytical Laboratory:

 

The minimal requirements for personnel (education; training or equivalent experience), facilities, equipment and instrumentation, QA/quality control (QC), etc. listed below must be met and documented in the application before the laboratory and analysts will be judged qualified to be considered for approval. If the above criteria are met, ICR approval to perform analyses will require: 1) successful performance on QC samples, as defined in the virus protocol, 2) satisfactory analyses on unknown performance evaluation (PE) samples, and 3) an on-site evaluation  of the laboratory and the analyst(s).

 

QC Samples/Cell Line:

 

EPA will provide QC samples containing known virus concentrations to laboratories meeting minimal requirements. These samples are to be used initially and periodically thereafter to demonstrate the analyst(s)’ ability to process and analyze samples correctly. Buffalo green monkey (BGM) cells will be provided to establish uniform cell cultures in all laboratories.

 

 

ApB-2

 

Minimal Requirements:

 

  1. Personnel:

 

Principal Analyst/Supervisor : To be qualified for approval, a laboratory must have a principal analyst who may also serve as a supervisor if an additional analyst(s) is to be involved. The principal analyst/supervisor oversees or performs the entire analyses and carries out QC performance checks on technicians and/or other analyst(s). This person must be an experienced microbiologist with at least a B.A./B.S. degree in microbiology or a closely related field and a minimum of three years continuous bench experience in cell culture propagation, processing of virus samples, and animal virus analyses. This analyst must have analyzed a PE sample set using the ICR virus method and results must fall within acceptance limits. Also, the principal analyst must demonstrate acceptable performance during an on-site evaluation by U.S. EPA personnel.

 

Analyst: This person(s) performs at the bench level under the supervision of a principal analyst and can be involved in all aspects of analysis, including preparation of sampling equipment, filter extraction, sample processing, cell culture, virus assay, and data handling. The analyst must have two years of college lecture and laboratory course work in microbiology or a closely related field. The analyst must have at least six months bench experience in cell culture and animal virus analyses, including three months experience in filter extraction of virus samples and sample processing. Six months of additional bench experience in the above areas may be substituted for the two years of college. Each analyst must have analyzed a PE sample set using the ICR virus method and results must fall within acceptance limits. The analyst must also demonstrate acceptable performance during an on-site evaluation.

 

Technician: This person extracts filters and processes the samples under the supervision of an analyst, but does not perform cell culture work, virus detection or enumeration. The technician must have at least three months experience in filter extrac- tion and processing of virus samples.

 

  1. Laboratory Facilities: Laboratories must have an air system regulated for temperature, humidity and air cleanliness. Laboratories should be maintained under negative air pressure to protect against accidental release of viral pathogens and should be equipped with ultraviolet lights for decontamination of rooms during periods when personnel are absent. Laboratories should maintain separate rooms for preparing cell cultures and processing virus samples. However, in the absence of separate rooms, laminar flow hoods must be used for cell culture preparation to prevent contamination. Freezers, incubators, and other large instruments should be in rooms where they can be accessed without disturbing ongoing laboratory efforts. The area provided for preparation and sterilization of media, glassware, and equipment should be separate from other laboratory work areas, but close enough for convenience. Visitors and through traffic must be minimized in work areas. ICR samples will be archived for future

 

 

ApB-3

 

testing by polymerase chain reaction (PCR) methods which are sensitive to contamination. Therefore, rooms for processing and assaying ICR samples must not have been used for analyzing PCR products. For ICR studies, the minimal area recommended for each worker is six to ten linear feet of usable bench space per analyst, exclusive of areas requiring specialized equipment or used for preparatory and supportive activities. Bench tops should be stainless steel, epoxy plastic, or other smooth impervious material that is inert and corrosion-resistant. Laboratory lighting should be even, screened to reduce glare, and provide about 100 foot- candles of light intensity on working surfaces.

 

High standards of cleanliness must be maintained in work areas. Laboratory bench surface cleanliness and laboratory air quality must be monitored. The laboratory must have a pest control program that includes preventive measures such as general cleanliness and prompt disposal of waste materials. The laboratory must be in compliance with all applicable judicial ordinances and laws for the managing and disposal of pathogenic agents.

 

  1. Laboratory Equipment And Instrumentation: The laboratory must be equipped on- site with the instrumentation and equipment needed to perform the virus sample collection, extraction, concentration and assay as set forth in the ICR virus protocol. Included are incubators, water baths, hot air sterilizing ovens, autoclaves, refrigerators with -20 C freezer compartment, -70 C deep freezers, reagent grade water supply, balances, pH meter, centri- fuges, temperature recording devices, and both upright and inverted microscopes. Laminar flow hoods and UV lights are strongly recommended as added equipment within the analytical laboratory.

 

  1. Safety: Laboratory must meet Biosafety Level 2 Criteria as described in Biosafety in Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories, 3rd Ed., HHS Publication No. (CDC) 93- 8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, May, 1993. Immunocompromised individuals must not work in or be admitted to this area .

 

  1. QA/QC Procedures: A formal QA document must be prepared and should follow the guidelines for a laboratory QA Plan, p. 7 in the Manual for the Certification of Laboratories Analyzing Drinking Water, 1990, U. S. Environmental Protection Agency Publication No. EPA/570/9-90/008, 3rd Ed., Washington, D.C., and Section II of this Manual. Laboratories must have a written QA program that applies practices necessary to minimize errors in laboratory operations that are attributable to personnel, equipment, supplies, processing procedures, or analytical methods. These include records of routine monitoring of equipment and instrumentation performance.  Records of QC checks must be available to the U.S. EPA for inspection.  The procedures for preparation of reagents and cell cultures and performance of the method must be followed exactly as written in the U.S. EPA ICR virus method. Reagents must be stored no longer than the designated shelf life.

 

  1. Record-Keeping And Data Reporting: A record system must be in use for tracking the samples from sample collection through log-in, analyses and data reporting.

 

ApB-4

 

INFORMATION COLLECTION RULE

 

APPLICATION FOR APPROVAL OF VIRUS LABORATORIES AND ANALYSTS 1

 

Laboratory: Address:

City:                                                    State:                                       Zip: Contact Person:

Title:

Telephone:    (      )                                         Fax:    (      )

 

Type of Laboratory:    Commercial              Utility               State             Academic

Other (describe)

Principal Customers:   Environmental              Clinical              Other

Type of Virus analyses:                           Human              Animal               Bacterial Other (describe)

PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS

 

 

Name, education, virus analysis experience and field in which acquired (water, waste- water, soils/sludge, shellfish, clinical, etc.)

Principal Analyst/Supervisor: Education [University/Degree(s)]: Experience:

 

 

 

 

 

 

1Where additional pages are required, clearly mark them using the same headings as in this application form.

 

ApB-5

 

Analyst #1: Education: Experience:

 

Analyst #2: Education: Experience:

 

Analyst #3: Education: Experience:

 

Technician #1: Education: Experience:

 

Technician #2: Education: Experience:

 

Technician #3: Education: Experience:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ApB-6

 

ON-SITE LABORATORY EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION

 

ITEM Ona Order Number TYPE/MODEL
Reagent Water System
Sterilizing Oven
Incubator
Centrifuge
pH Meter
Temperature Recorder
Inverted Microscope
Upright Microscope
Autoclave
-70  C Freezer
Refrigerator
Analytical Balance
UV Light System
Water Bath
Other(s) (describe)
aPlace a ”  ” in the “On Order” column next to items that are on order.

 

 

CURRENT LABORATORY PROGRAMS

 

 

Virus Method(s) (processing, assay)

Number of Analyses Per Year Per Meth- od and Virus Groups Analyzed

 

 

 

 

 

ApB-7

 

Sample Types (Matrices Tested):

 

 

 

Cell Culture (Mammalian):

 

 

 

Documented Laboratory QA Plan:             Yes                                         No      

 

Laboratory is in compliance with state and local ordinances and laws for handling and disposal of pathogenic agents:

Yes                                         No      

Comments:

 

 

 

Estimated number of water samples that can be analyzed for virus/month using the method:

 

 

The above application information is complete and accurate to the best of my knowl- edge.

 

 

 

Laboratory Manager or Designee

 

Submit Application to:                     ICR Laboratory Coordinator

  1. S. Environmental Protection Agency Office of Ground Water and Drinking Water Technical Support Division

26 West Martin Luther King Drive Cincinnati, OH 45268

 

ApB-8

 

MINIMAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PROTOZOAN LABORATORIES

 

Background Information:

 

For ICR approval, the protozoan analytical laboratories must have suitable facilities, equipment, instrumentation, and an ongoing quality assurance (QA) program. Analysts must be experienced in protozoan analyses and meet performance evaluation criteria. As laborato- ries are approved, the U.S. EPA will provide an updated list of those laboratories with Agency approved analysts to the public water systems that serve a population of 10,000 or more.

 

Analytical Methods:

 

The proposed protozoan method was published in the Federal Register, Vol. 59, No. 28, February 10, 1994, 40 CFR Part 141 Monitoring Requirements For Public Drinking Water Supplies; Proposed Rule; pp. 6416-6429. The final draft method will be provided to those applicants that meet the minimum requirements set forth in this document. The final method will be available at the time the ICR is promulgated.

 

Sample Collection:

 

Analytical laboratories will be responsible for procuring, assembling, and transporting the sample collection apparatus to the water system. Systems will be advised on proper collection techniques by the analytical laboratory in accordance with the procedures described in the protozoan protocol. A sampling video will be available to the systems to reinforce instructions received from the analytical laboratory.

 

Approval of the Analytical Laboratory:

 

The minimal requirements for personnel (education; training or equivalent experience), facilities, instruments, QA/QC, etc. listed below must be met and documented in this applica- tion before laboratories and analyst(s) will be judged qualified to be considered for approval. If the above criteria are met, ICR approval to perform analyses also will require: 1) recovery of both Giardia cysts and Cryptosporidium oocysts from QC samples, 2) satisfactory analyses on unknown PE samples and 3) an on-site evaluation of the laboratory and the analyst(s).

 

QC Samples:

 

The U.S. EPA will provide QC samples containing known Giardia and Cryptosporidium concentrations to laboratories meeting minimal requirements. These samples are to be used initially and periodically thereafter to demonstrate the analyst(s)’ ability to process and analyze samples correctly.

 

 

 

 

ApB-9

 

Minimal Requirements:

 

  1. Personnel:

 

Principal Analyst/Supervisor : To be qualified for approval, a laboratory must have a principal analyst who may also serve as a supervisor if an additional analyst(s) is to be involved. The principal analyst/supervisor oversees or performs the entire analyses and carries out QC performance checks on technicians and/or other analysts. The principal analyst/supervisor must confirm all protozoan internal structures demonstrated at the microscope by subordinates. This person must be an experienced microbiologist with at least a B.A./B.S. degree in microbiology or a closely related field. The principal analyst also must have at least one year of continuous bench experience with immunofluorescent antibody (IFA) techniques and microscopic identification and have analyzed at least 100 water and/or wastewater samples for Giardia and/or Cryptosporidium. In addition, PE samples must be analyzed using the ICR protozoan method and results must fall within acceptance limits. The principal analyst/supervisor must also demonstrate acceptable performance during an on-site evaluation.

 

Analyst: This person(s) performs at the bench level under the supervision of a principal analyst/supervisor and is involved in all aspects of the analysis, including preparation of sampling equipment, filter extraction, sample processing, microscopic protozoan identification, and data handling. Recording presence or absence of morpho- logical characteristics may be done by the analyst but must be confirmed by the principal analyst. The analyst must have two years of college lecture and laboratory course work in microbiology or a closely related field. The analyst also must have at least six months bench experience, must have at least three months experience with IFA techniques, and must have analyzed at least 50 water and/or wastewater samples for Giardia and/or Cryptosporidium. Six months of additional bench experience in the above areas may be substituted for two years of college. In addition, PE samples must be analyzed using the ICR protozoan method and results must fall within acceptance limits. The analyst must also demonstrate acceptable performance during an on-site evaluation.

 

Technician: This person extracts filters and processes the samples under the supervision of an analyst, but does not perform microscopic protozoan detection and identification. The technician must have at least three months experience in filter extraction and processing of protozoa samples.

 

Laboratory Facilities: The laboratory must have dedicated, well-lighted bench space commensurate with the number of samples to be analyzed. Six to ten feet of usable bench space are required per analyst, exclusive of areas requiring specialized equipment or used for preparatory and supportive activities. Bench tops should be stainless steel, epoxy plastic or other smooth impervious material that is corrosion-resistant. Laboratory lighting should be even, screened to reduce glare, and provide 100 foot-candles of light intensity on working

 

 

ApB-10

 

surfaces. Laboratory floor space must be sufficient for stationary equipment such as refrigera- tors and low-speed and large-capacity centrifuges. Facilities for washing and sterilization of laboratory glassware, plasticware and equipment must be present.  A dedicated space that can be darkened must be available for the microscopic work. Laboratory areas should be kept free of clutter and equipment and supplies should be stored when not in use. It is strongly recom- mended that laboratories should be maintained under negative air pressure to protect against accidental release of pathogens and should be equipped with ultraviolet lights for decontamina- tion of rooms during periods when personnel are absent.  High standards of cleanliness must be maintained in work areas. The laboratory must have a pest control program that includes preventive measures such as general cleanliness and prompt disposal of waste materials. The laboratory must be in compliance with all applicable judicial ordinances and laws for manage- ment and disposal of pathogenic agents.

 

  1. Laboratory Equipment And Instrumentation: The laboratory must be equipped on- site with a reagent water supply system, autoclave, refrigerator (4 C) with -20 C freezer compartment, pH meter, slide-warming tray or incubator (37 ± 3 C), balance (top loader or pan), membrane filtration equipment for epifluorescent staining, and hydrometer set. Specific requirements for the microscope include differential interference contrast (DIC) or Hoffman modulation optics (including 20X and 100X objectives). DIC or Hoffman modulation optics should have epifluorescence capability. The epifluorescence vertical illuminator should have either a 50 or 100 watt high-pressure mercury bulb with appropriate excitation and band-pass filters (exciter filter: 450-490 nm; dichroic beam-splitting mirror: 510 nm; barrier or suppres- sion filter: 515-520 nm) for examining fluorescein isothiocyanate-labeled specimens.

 

  1. Safety: The laboratory must meet Biosafety Level 2 Criteria as described in Biosafety in Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories, 3rd Ed., HHS Publication No. (CDC) 93- 8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, May, 1993. Immunocompromised individuals must not work in or be admitted to this area .

 

  1. QA/QC Procedures: A formal QA document must be prepared and should follow the guidelines for a laboratory QA Plan, p. 7 in the Manual for the Certification of Laboratories Analyzing Drinking Water, 1990, U. S. Environmental Protection Agency Publication No. EPA/570/9-90/008, 3rd Ed., Washington, D.C., and Section II of this Manual. Laboratories must have a written QA program that applies QC practices necessary to minimize errors in laboratory operations that are attributable to personnel, equipment, supplies, processing procedures, or analytical methods. These include records of routine monitoring of equipment and instrumentation performance.  Records of all QC checks must be available to the U.S. EPA for inspection. The procedures for the preparation of reagents and performance of the method must be followed exactly as written in the U.S. EPA ICR protozoan method. Reagents must be stored no longer than the designated shelf life.

 

  1. Record-Keeping And Data Reporting: A record system must be in use for tracking the samples from sample collection through log-in, analyses and data reporting.

 

ApB-11

 

INFORMATION COLLECTION RULE

 

APPLICATION FOR APPROVAL OF PROTOZOAN LABS AND ANALYSTS 2

 

Laboratory: Address:

City:                                                    State:                                       Zip: Contact Person:

Title:

Telephone:    (      )                                         Fax:    (      )

 

Type of Laboratory:    Commercial              Utility               State             Academic

Other (describe)

Principal Customers:   Environmental              Clinical              Other

Type of Protozoa               Giardia                 Cryptosporidium                 Entamoeba

 

Analyses:                               Other (describe) PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS

Name, education, protozoan analysis experience and field in which acquired (water,

wastewater, clinical, etc.) Principal Analyst/Supervisor:

Education [University/Degree(s)]: Experience:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2Where additional pages are required, clearly mark them using the same headings as in this application form.

 

ApB-12

 

Analyst #1: Education: Experience:

 

Analyst #2: Education: Experience:

 

Analyst #3: Education: Experience:

 

Technician #1: Education: Experience:

 

Technician #2: Education: Experience:

 

Technician #3: Education: Experience:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ApB-13

 

ON-SITE LABORATORY EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION

 

 

ITEM On Order Number TYPE/MODEL
Autoclave
Refrigerator
Freezer
pH Meter
Analytical Balance
Top-loader Balance
Membrane Filtration Equip- ment (for epifluorescent staining)
Hydrometer Set
Reagent Grade Water Supply
Slide Warmer
Incubator
Centrifuge
Centrifuge Rotors
Other(s) (describe)
Place a ” in the “On Order” column next to items that are on order.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ApB-14

 

MICROSCOPE CAPABILITY

 

 

Vendor Name: Model:
Optical Capability:

Epifluorescence

 

 

Yes

 

 

No

DIC Yes No
Hoffman Modulation Yes No
Mercury Lamp                                           watt bulb

FITC Cube Specs.                                     nm exciter filter;

nm beam splitting dichroic mirror; or nm barrier or suppression filter

 

Objective Power Type (Achromate, Neofluor,

oil, etc.)

Numerical Aperture Used with (Epifluor, D.I.C., etc.)

 

CURRENT LABORATORY PROGRAMS

 

Protozoan Method(s) Number of Analyses Per Year Per Method

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ApB-15

 

Sample Types (Matrices Tested):

 

 

 

Documented Laboratory QA Plan:             Yes                                         No      

 

Laboratory is in compliance with state and local ordinances and laws for handling and disposal of pathogenic agents:

Yes                                         No      

Comments:

 

 

 

Estimated number of water samples that can be analyzed for protozoa/month using the ICR method:

 

 

The above application information is complete and accurate to the best of my knowl- edge.

 

 

 

 

Laboratory Manager or Designee

 

Submit Application to:                     ICR Laboratory Coordinator

  1. S. Environmental Protection Agency Office of Ground Water and Drinking Water Technical Support Division

26 West Martin Luther King Drive Cincinnati, OH 45268

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ApB-16

 

APPENDIX C. CHECKLIST FOR LABORATORY APPROVAL FOR

GIARDIA AND CRYPTOSPORIDIUM

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ApC-1

 

ICR Protozoan Laboratory Checklist
Laboratory:
Address:
City: State: Zip:
Type of Laboratory (Check):
Commercial: Utility: State: Academic:
Other (Describe):
Principal Customers: (Check) Environmental:               Clinical: Other (Describe):
Type of Protozoan Analyses:

(Check each)

Giardia: Cryptosporidium: Entamoeba:
Other (describe):
Laboratory Contact Person:
Title:
Telephone: Fax:
Principal Analyst/Supervisor Name:
Analyst Name:
Name of Person Being Evaluated:
Laboratory Evaluated by: Date:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ApC-2

 

ICR Protozoan Laboratory Checklist
 

Question

Answer
Yes No
Are the personnel listed on the ICR approval application still with the laboratory?
Are there any personnel in the laboratory not listed on the ICR approval application?
Is the documentation available showing that the principal analyst/super- visor has analyzed 100 water and/or wastewater samples for Giardia and/or Cryptosporidium?
Is the documentation available showing that the analyst has analyzed 50 water and/or wastewater samples for Giardia and/or Cryptosporidium?
Is the laboratory well lighted (approximately 100 foot-candles of light intensity on work surfaces)?
Are 6-10 ft of bench space available per analyst?
Are the bench tops made of a smooth, impervious surface?
Is the laboratory floor space sufficient for the stationary equipment?
Is glassware washing equipment available?
Is the laboratory neatly organized with unused equipment and supplies being stored (free of clutter)?
Are high standards of cleanliness and prompt disposal of waste materials exhibited?
Is the laboratory equipped with ultraviolet lights and under negative air pressure?
Does the laboratory have a reagent grade water system?
Does the laboratory have an autoclave?
Does the laboratory have a refrigerator (4 C) with a -20 C freezer compartment?
Does the laboratory have a pH meter associated with two or three calibra- tion buffers?
Does the laboratory have either an incubator or slide warming table calibrated to 37 ± 3 C?

 

 

 

 

ApC-3

 

ICR Protozoan Laboratory Checklist
 

Question

Answer
Yes No
Does the laboratory have either a top loader or pan balance associated with calibration weights?
Does the laboratory have a properly maintained and adjusted stomacher?
Does the laboratory have a Hoefer filtration manifold, model FH 255V?
Are the well weights for the Hoefer manifold well maintained?
Are the microscope slides the appropriate size?
Is the laboratory using clear nail polish to seal the coverslips to the slides?
Are the cover slips 25 mm2 and No. 1½?
Does the laboratory have a hydrometer set covering the range 1.0-2.0?
Does the laboratory have an epifluorescent microscope equipped with either Hoffman modulation or differential interference contrast optics?
Is the microscope easily changed from epifluorescent optics to either Hoffman modulation or differential interference contrast optics and vice versa?
Does the laboratory have a 20X scanning objective with a numerical aperture of 0.6 on the microscope?
Is the microscope equipped with an ocular micrometer or some other measuring device?
Has the ocular micrometer been calibrated in conjunction with the 20X and the 100X objectives?
Is a table of objective calibrations near the microscope?
Does the laboratory have a stage micrometer?
Does the laboratory have a 100X objective with a numerical aperture of

1.3 on the microscope?

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ApC-4

 

ICR Protozoan Laboratory Checklist
 

Question

Answer
Yes No
Is the epifluorescent portion of the microscope equipped with an appro- priate excitation and band pass filters for examining fluorescein isothiocyanate-labeled specimens (exciter filter: 450-490 nm; dichroic beamsplitting mirror 510 nm; barrier or suppression filter: 515-520 nm)?
Is the mercury bulb in the epifluorescent lamp house either a 50 or a 100 watt bulb?
Does the laboratory keep a log or have an hour totalizer on the trans- former of the number of hours on the mercury bulb?
Has the mercury bulb been used longer than 100 h in the case of 50 watt bulb or longer than 200 h in the case of a 100 watt bulb?
Can the principal analyst/supervisor establish Köhler illumination on the microscope?
Can the analyst establish Köhler illumination on the microscope?
Can the principal analyst/supervisor focus both microscope eyepieces?
Can the analyst focus both microscope eyepieces?
Did the principal analyst/supervisor adjust the interpupillary distance?
Did the analyst adjust the interpupillary distance?
Does the laboratory have a large capacity centrifuge?
Does the laboratory have a swinging bucket rotor capable of spinning 250 ml capacity or greater screw-cap conical bottles?
Does the laboratory have a swinging bucket rotor capable of spinning 50 ml capacity conical screw-cap tubes?
Does the laboratory have a formal QA laboratory plan prepared and ready for examination?
Does the laboratory have records of all QC checks available for inspec- tion?
Does the laboratory have an adequate record system for tracking sam- ples from collection through log-in, analysis and data reporting?

 

 

 

 

ApC-5

 

ICR Protozoan Laboratory Checklist
 

Question

Answer
Yes No
Is a positive and a negative Quality Control filter run with each week’s batch of filters being analyzed?
Is the laboratory using Commercial filters with Commercial LT-10 filter holders or Filterite filters with Filterite filter holders?
Are the sampling filters 10 in (25.4 cm) long and 1 m in nominal porosity?
Is the sampling apparatus configured appropriately for raw water sam- pling?
Is the sampling apparatus configured appropriately for finished water sampling?
Is the sampling apparatus cleaned well before reshipment and/or use?
Does the laboratory have a checklist or set of sampling instructions which are used, when sampling is done by someone other than labora- tory personnel?
Are reagents well labelled with preparation dates and who prepared the reagent?
Does the laboratory have formulation or recipe cards for the preparation of 2.0% sodium thiosulfate, 10% neutral buffered formalin, phosphate buffered saline, 1% sodium dodecyl sulfate solution, 1% Tween 80 solution, elution solution, 2.5 M sucrose solution, Percoll-sucrose solution, the ethanol/glycerin dehydration series, DABCO-glycerin mounting medium, and 1% bovine serum albumin?
Is the laboratory using Ensys’s hydrofluor-combo kit for staining Giar- dia cysts and Cryptosporidium oocysts?
Is the Ensys hydrofluor-combo kit still within the expiration time set by the manufacturer?
Is the Percoll-sucrose solution used within a week of preparation?
Is the elution solution used within a week of preparation?
Is the DABCO-glycerin mounting medium discarded six months after preparation?

 

 

ApC-6

 

ICR Protozoan Laboratory Checklist
 

Question

Answer
Yes No
Is the 1% bovine serum albumin discarded six months after preparation?
Are disposable cutting tools used to cut the sampling filter down to the core?
Are the disposable cutting tool blades reused?
Is the sampling filter in either a glass or stainless steel pan of the appro- priate size, while it is being cut to the core?
Are the filter fibers divided appropriately before hand washing?
Is the total hand washing time a minimum of 30 min?
Is stomacher washing done in two five minute intervals with redistri- bution of the filter fibers between the intervals?
Is the right amount of 10% neutral buffered formalin added to the concentrated particulates at the appropriate time?
Are the concentrated particulates diluted appropriately before the Percoll-sucrose flotation?
Is the Percoll-sucrose gradient prepared correctly in a clear conical centrifuge tube?
Is a centrifugation nomograph for determining relative centrifugal force (gravities) located close to the centrifuge(s)?
Is the Percoll-sucrose gradient centrifuged correctly with slow accelera- tion and deceleration?
Is the Percoll-sucrose gradient interface harvested appropriately after centrifugation?
Is the final volume of the interface 5 ml, when harvesting is complete?
Are 5-mm diameter 12-well red teflon heavy coated slides used to determine the correct sample volume per filter in the IFA staining procedure?
Is the sample volume per filter in the IFA staining procedure done correctly?

 

 

 

 

ApC-7

 

ICR Protozoan Laboratory Checklist
 

Question

Answer
Yes No
Are support and Sartorius membranes handled with blunt end forceps initially?
Are the support and Sartorius membranes properly hydrated before application to the manifold?
Is the Hoefer manifold properly configured and adjusted before the addition of the support and Sartorius membranes?
Do the Sartorius membrane filters the laboratory is using have a porosity between 0.2 and 1.2  m?
Is a positive and a negative IFA Control using a Sartorius filter run with each run of the manifold?
Are the Hoefer manifold wells labelled well during the staining proce- dure?
Does the sample application to the membranes on the manifold include rinses of the wells and membranes with 1% bovine serum albumin before and after application?
Is the primary antibody diluted correctly with 1X phosphate buffered saline and goat serum?
Is the right amount of primary antibody applied per membrane, and is it incubated for the correct amount of time?
Is the primary antibody rinsed away correctly before the application of the secondary antibody?
Is the secondary antibody diluted correctly?
Is the right amount of secondary antibody applied per membrane, and is it incubated for the correct amount of time?
Are the Hoefer manifold well weights covered with aluminum foil during the secondary antibody incubation?
Is the secondary antibody rinsed away correctly after the incubation period?
Is the alcohol dehydration step done correctly?

 

 

 

ApC-8

 

ICR Protozoan Laboratory Checklist
 

Question

Answer
Yes No
Are the glass slides that are to receive the membranes from the manifold labelled in advance?
Have the labelled glass slides been prewarmed for 20-30 min with 75 L of 2% DABCO-glycerin before the application of the membrane?
Is a fresh, clean pair of forceps used to transfer each membrane from the Hoefer manifold to its respective glass slide?
Is care exercised to insure that the Sartorius membranes are applied top side up to the slide?
Are the membranes allowed to clear before application of the cover slip?
Are the membranes flattened correctly, before sealing the cover slip?
Are all the edges of the cover slip sealed well with clear nail polish?
Is sample processing data being recorded as the method is being per- formed?
Are the finished slides stored in an appropriate “dry-box”?
Is the dry-box of slides allowed to reach room temperature before being opened?
Is the microscope aligned and adjusted before the analysts starts scan- ning and reading slides?
Is the scanning of the slides done appropriately, with the entire coverslip being scanned rather than just the membrane?
Are measurements done with the 100X objective?
Is the room in which the microscope is located darkened while the microscope is being used?
Are the positive and negative control slides examined as prescribed in the method, including the complete examination of 3 Giardia cysts and 3 Cryptosporidium oocysts?
Can the microscopist who is reading the sample slides easily change the optics from epifluorescence to Hoffman modulation or differential interference contrast optics?

 

 

ApC-9

 

ICR Protozoan Laboratory Checklist
 

Question

Answer
Yes No
Are confirmations of internal structures within Giardia cysts and Cryptosporidium oocysts being confirmed by a principal analyst/su- pervisor.
Is the microscopic data being entered onto the Giardia and Crypto- sporidium report forms appropriately?
Are the results from each sample being calculated on the provided computer spreadsheet?
Are the computer spreadsheet files backed up on more than one disk, to insure data are not lost in the eventuality of some hardware failure?
Are the Hoefer manifold and the stainless steel wells cleaned as pre- scribed in the method?
Are the forceps used during the IFA staining cleaned well between uses?
Is all glassware and plasticware washed well and stored appropriately between uses?

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ApC-10

 

ICR Protozoan Laboratory Checklist
Comments:

 

 

 

 

 

 

ApC-11

 

APPENDIX D. CHECKLIST FOR LABORATORY APPROVAL FOR TOTAL CULTURABLE VIRUS

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ApD-1

 

SECTION I – LABORATORY-SPECIFIC INFORMATION

 

ICR Virus Laboratory Checklist
Laboratory:
Address:
City: State: Zip:
Type of Laboratory (Check):
Commercial: University: Utility: State:
Other (Describe):
Principal Custom- ers: (Check) Environmental:                                             Clinical: Other (Describe):
Laboratory Contact Person:
Title:
Telephone: Fax:
Laboratory Evaluated by: Date:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ApD-2

 

 

 

 

1. Qualifications of Laboratory  Personnel
 

Name

 

Position/Title

ICR

Position

To Be Evaluated (Y/N) Time in Present Position Academic Training/ Degree Job Training/ Experience/ Area

 

Codes for Marking Checklist

S – Satisfactory                 U – Unsatisfactory             NA- Not Applicable

 

Item to be evaluated Evaluation
2.    Laboratory Facilities
2.1    Laboratory rooms are clean, and temperature and humidity con- trolled
2.2    Lighting at bench top is adequate
2.3    Bench tops have smooth, impervious surfaces
2.4    Working space per analyst is adequate
2.5    Storage space is adequate
2.6    Work is separated by room or by microbiological hoods
3.    Laboratory Safety
3.1    Laboratory meets and follows “laboratory biosafety level 2 guide- lines”
3.2    Access to laboratory is limited
3.3    Lab coats are used in the laboratory
3.4    Mechanical pipetting devices are used
3.5    Food is not stored or consumed in the laboratory
3.6    Appropriate biohazard signs are placed on laboratory access doors
3.7    A written biosafety manual is followed and available for inspection
3.8    Laboratory personnel are adequately trained
3.9    Laboratory has provision for disposal of microbiological wastes
4.    Laboratory Equipment and Supplies
4.1    Laboratory pH Meter
Manufacturer Model
4.1.1      Accuracy ± 0.1 units; scale graduations, 0.1 units
4.1.2      pH buffer solution aliquots are used only once
4.1.3      Electrodes are maintained according to manufacturer’s rec- ommendations

 

 

ApD-4

 

Item to be evaluated Evaluation
4.1.4      Commercial buffer solutions are dated when received and discarded before expiration date
QC   4.1.5      A record of pH measurements and calibrations used is maintained
4.2    Light Microscope
Manufacturer Model
4.2.1      Microscope is equipped with lenses to provide about 40X – 100X total magnification
4.2.2      Optical clarity is good
4.3    Inverted Light Microscope
Manufacturer Model
4.3.1      Microscope is equipped with lenses to provide about 40X – 100X total magnification
4.3.2      Optical clarity is good
4.4    Microbiological Hood
Manufacturer Model
4.4.1      Hood is at least a class II biological safety cabinet
4.4.2      Hood is certified on an annual basis
4.5    Temperature Monitoring
4.5.1      Glass/mercury, dial thermometers or continuous recording devices are used with appropriate equipment. Units are graduated in no more than 0.5 C increments. Mercury columns are not separated
QC   4.5.2      Calibration of glass/mercury thermometers is checked annually and dial thermometers quarterly at the temperature used against a reference NIST thermometer or one meeting the requirements of NIST Monograph SP 250-23
QC   4.5.3      Correction data are available for reference thermometers
QC   4.5.4      Continuous recording devices are recalibrated annually

 

 

 

ApD-5

 

Item to be evaluated Evaluation
4.6    Incubator
Manufacturer Model
4.6.1      An internal temperature of 36.5 ± 1 C is maintained
4.6.2      A temperature monitoring device is placed on a shelf near area of use. The bulb or probe of the temperature monitor- ing device is in liquid
QC   4.6.3      Temperature is recorded at least once per day for each workday in use
4.7    Refrigerator
Manufacturer Model
4.7.1      An internal temperature of 1  to 5  C is maintained
4.7.2      A temperature monitoring device is placed on a shelf near area of use. The bulb or probe of the temperature monitor- ing device is in liquid
QC   4.7.3      Temperature is recorded at least once per day for each workday in use
4.8    Freezer, -20 C
Manufacturer Model
4.8.1      An internal temperature of -20  ± 5  C is maintained
4.8.2      A temperature monitoring device is placed on a shelf near area of use.
QC   4.8.3      Temperature is recorded at least once per day for each workday in use
4.9    Freezer, -70 C
Manufacturer Model
4.9.1      An internal temperature of -70  ± 3  C or lower is main- tained
4.9.2      A temperature monitoring device is placed on a shelf near area of use

 

 

ApD-6

 

Item to be evaluated Evaluation
QC   4.9.3      Temperature is recorded at least once per day for each workday in use
4.10   Refrigerated Centrifuge
Manufacturer Model
4.10.1 Operates at a centrifugal force of at least 4,000 ×g
4.10.2  Holds at 4 C during centrifugation run
4.10.3 Appropriate rotor holds 100 – 1000 ml bottles
QC     4.10.4 A log recording rotor serial number, run speed and time, run temperature and operator’s initials is kept for each centrifugation run
4.11   Balance
Manufacturer Model
QC     4.11.1  Balance is calibrated monthly
QC     4.11.2 Correction data are available for S/S-1 calibration weights
4.11.3 An annual service contract or internal maintenance protocol is maintained
4.12   Autoclave
Manufacturer Model
4.12.1 Unit is equipped with a temperature gauge with sensor on exhaust
4.12.2 Unit depressurizes slowly so that media do not boil over
4.12.3 Unit’s automatic timing mechanism is adequate
4.12.4 A service contract or internal maintenance protocol is maintained
4.12.5 A maximum temperature-registering thermometer or heat- sensitive tape is used with each cycle
QC     4.12.6 Spore strips or ampoules are used on a monthly basis
QC     4.12.7 Date, contents, sterilization time and temperature are re- corded for each cycle
4.13   Hot Air Oven (if used)
Manufacturer Model

 

ApD-7

 

Item to be evaluated Evaluation
4.13.1 Hot air oven maintains temperature of 170 – 180 C for at least 2 h
4.13.2 Bulb or probe of temperature monitoring device is placed in sand during use. Thermometer graduated in no more than 10  C increments
QC     4.13.3 Date, sterilization time and temperature are recorded for each cycle
4.14   Pump
Manufacturer Model
Pump is self-priming
4.15   Polypropylene Container
Manufacturer/Source Model/Cat. No.
Container holds 40 L; contents can be mixed without spill- ing
4.16   Positive Pressure Source (record for source used)
Compressed air
Compressed nitrogen
Laboratory air source
Manufacturer Model
Peristaltic pump
Manufacturer Model
4.17   Magnetic Stirrer
Manufacturer Model
4.18 Source for Reagent Grade Water
Type/Manufacturer Model/Cat. #
4.18.1 Still or deionization unit is maintained according to manu- facturer’s instructions
4.18.2 Reagent grade water is used to prepare all media and re- agents
QC     4.18.3  The conductivity is tested with each use. Conductivity is

>0.5 megohms-cm at 25 C

 

ApD-8

 

Item to be evaluated Evaluation
5. General Laboratory Practices
5.1 Analytical Media
5.1.1 General
5.1.1.1 Commercial media and chemicals are dated upon receipt. Only analytical reagent or ACS grade chemicals are used for preparation of media
5.1.1.2 Commercial dehydrated or liquid media are used for propa- gation of tissue culture cells. Dehydrated media are pre- pared and stored as recommended by manufacturers.
5.1.1.3 Commercial media and chemicals are discarded by man- ufacturers’ expiration dates. Laboratory prepared media are discarded by the expiration dates indicated in the Virus Monitoring Protocol
5.1.1.4 Each lot of medium is checked for sterility before use
QC     5.1.1.5 Lot numbers of commercial media and chemicals are re- corded. Date of preparation, type of medium, lot number, sterilization procedure, pH and technician’s initials are recorded for laboratory prepared media
5.1.2 Thiosulfate (2%)
Solutions are stored at or below room temperature and discarded after six months
5.1.3 Hydrochloric acid
5.1.3.1 Solutions are prepared at least 24 h prior to use in sampling or virus assays
5.1.3.2 Solutions are stored at or below room temperature and discarded after six months
5.1.4 Sodium Hydroxide
5.1.4.1 Solutions are prepared at least 24 h prior to use in virus assays
5.1.4.2 Solutions are stored in polypropylene containers at room temperature and discarded after 3 months
5.1.5 Beef Extract (1.5%)
5.1.5.1 Final pH is 9.5

 

 

ApD-9

 

Item to be evaluated Evaluation
5.1.5.2 Solution is stored at 4 C and discarded after one week or at

-20 C and discarded after 18 months

5.1.6 Sodium Phosphate
5.1.6.1 Final pH is between 9.0 and 9.5
5.1.6.2 Solutions are stored at or below room temperature and discarded after six months
5.1.7 Washing Solution
5.1.7.1 Salt solution is cooled to room temperature before addition of serum
5.1.7.2 Solutions are stored at 4 C and discarded after 3 months or at -20 C and discarded after 18 months
5.1.8 Chlorine
5.1.8.1 Final pH is between 6 and 7
5.1.8.2 Solutions are stored at or below room temperature and discarded after one month
5.1.9 Iodine
Solutions are stored at room temperature and discarded after six months
5.2 Sterilization and Disinfection
5.2.1    Autoclavable glassware, plasticware and equipment are autoclaved at 121 C for 1 h or, if appropriate, sterilized by dry heat at 170 C for at least 1 h
5.2.2    Non-autoclavable supplies are disinfected with 0.1% chlo- rine (pH 6-7) for 30 min or in a gas sterilizer according to the manufacturer’s recommendations
5.2.3    Contaminated materials are autoclaved at 121 C for at least 1 h
5.2.4    Adequate glassware washing facilities are available for re- usable lab ware
5.2.5    Surfaces are disinfected before and after use and after spills
7. Quality Assurance
A written QA plan is followed and available for inspection

 

ApD-10

 

SECTION II – ANALYST-SPECIFIC INFORMATION (To be filled out for each principal analyst/analyst/technician seeking approval for ICR virus analysis):

 

Name of Analyst/Technician:
Item to be evaluated Evaluation
6. Analytical Methodology
6.1 General
Only the virus analytical method dated July, 1995, is used for site visit evaluation
6.2 QC Samples
A polypropylene container and pump are used to pump a negative QC sample through a 1MDS filter in a standard sampling appara- tus. All components of the system are sterile
6.3 Filter Elution
6.3.1    Residual water is blown out from the cartridge housing before addition of beef extract
6.3.2    1MDS filters are slowly eluted with 1.5% beef extract twice. The flow of beef extract is interrupted for 1 min during each pass to enhance elution
6.3.3    An air filter is used with a positive pressure lab air source
6.4 Organic Flocculation
QC 6.4.1 The pH meter is standardized at pH 4 and 7
6.4.2    The pH electrode is disinfected before and after use
6.4.3 The pH of the eluate is adjusted slowly to 3.5 ± 0.1 with 1 M HCl with stirring at a speed sufficient to develop a vor- tex
6.4.4    The eluate is stirred for 30 min after pH adjustment
6.4.5    The pH adjusted eluate is centrifuged at 2,500 ×g for 15 min at 4 C.
6.4.6    Supernatant from centrifuge run is properly discarded
6.4.7 Precipitate from centrifuge run is dissolved in 30 ml of

0.15 M sodium phosphate.

QC 6.4.8 The pH meter is standardized at pH 7.0 and 10.0
6.4.9 The pH electrode is disinfected before and after use

 

ApD-11

 

Name of Analyst/Technician:
Item to be evaluated Evaluation
6.4.10 The pH of the dissolved precipitate is checked and read- justed to 9.0-9.5, if necessary
6.4.11 The dissolved precipitate is centrifuged at 4,000-10,000 ×g

for 10 min at 4 C

6.4.12 The supernatant from the 4,000-10,000 ×g run is saved and the precipitate properly discarded
6.4.13 The pH of the supernatant is adjusted to 7.0-7.5 with 1 M HCl
6.4.14 The supernatant is treated to remove or reduce microbial contamination. Sterilizing filters are pretreated before use with beef extract
6.4.15 The final volume is recorded after treatment
6.4.16 The treated supernatant is divided into subsamples.
6.5 Total Culturable Virus Assay
QC     6.5.1 Passage 117 to 250 BGM cells from the U.S. EPA are being cultured for ICR virus assays
6.5.2 Cultures are used 3-6 days after passage. Cultures are washed prior to inoculation with serum free medium
6.5.3 At least 10 replicate cultures per subsample or subsample dilution are inoculated with a proper inoculation volume
6.5.4 Inoculation volume does not exceed 0.04 ml/cm2
6.5.5 An adsorption period of 80-120 min is used. Adsorption occurs at 22 to 36.5 ± 1 C
6.5.6    Liquid maintenance medium is added and cultures are incubated at 36.5 ± 1 C
6.5.7    A 2nd passage is performed using 10% of the medium from the 1st passage. Samples positive in the 1st passage are filtered prior to passage
6.5.8    Analyst demonstrates ability to perform MPN calculations
6.5.9    A positive and negative control is run with each sample

 

 

 

 

ApD-12

 

DESCRIPTION OF CHECKLIST FOR LAB APPROVAL FOR VIRUS ANALYSIS

 

Note: Written records must be retained for five years for quality control items designated as “QC”.

 

1.  Personnel

 

1.1  Principal Analyst/Supervisor

The principal analyst/supervisor is a qualified microbiologist with experience with environ- mental virology. The principal analyst/supervisor oversees all analyses of samples for viruses.

 

  • 1.1 Academic Training: Minimum of a bachelor’s degree in the life sciences.

 

  • 1.2 Job Training: Minimum of three years experience in cell culture and animal virus analyses.

 

1.2  Analyst

The analyst performs at the bench level with minimal supervision and is involved in all aspects of the analysis, including sample collection, filter extraction, sample processing and assay.

 

  • 2.1 Academic Training: Minimum of two years of full time college with a major in life science.

 

  • 2.2 Job Training: Minimum of six months of full-time bench experience in cell culture and animal virus analyses.

 

1.3  Technician

The technician extracts the filter and processes samples, but does not perform tissue culture work.

 

  • 3.1 Academic Training: No requirements.

 

  • 3.2 Job Training: Three months experience in filter extraction of virus samples and sample processing.

 

2.  Laboratory Facilities

 

  • 1 Laboratory facilities are temperature and humidity controlled. Laboratories are clean; a pest control program is in place, if appropriate.

 

  • 2 Work surfaces have adequate lighting (minimum of 100 foot-candles).

 

  • 3 Laboratory bench tops have smooth, impervious surfaces.

 

 

ApD-13

 

  • 4 There is at least six to ten linear feet of usable bench space per analyst with a minimum of 36-38 inches of depth.

 

  • 5 There is sufficient laboratory space for storage of media, glassware and equipment.

 

  • 6 Filter extraction/sample processing is performed in a separate laboratory room from cell culture and virus work. Cell culture and virus work are performed in separate rooms or in separate microbiological hoods. A program is in place to ensure that no cross-contamination occurs if the latter is used.

 

3.  Laboratory Safety

 

  • 1 The laboratory meets and follows laboratory biosafety level 2 guidelines.

 

  • 2 Laboratories have limited access.

 

  • 3 Lab coats are worn while working in laboratories.

 

  • 4 Mouth pipetting is not allowed in the laboratory.

 

  • 5 Food and drinks are not stored or consumed in the laboratory.

 

  • 6 Biohazard signs identifying biohazards are placed on the laboratory access doors.

 

  • 7 A written biosafety manual is followed and available for inspection.

 

  • 8 Laboratory personnel have been given laboratory safety training.

 

  • 9 The laboratory is in compliance with all applicable judicial ordinances and laws for virus work and biological waste disposal.

 

4.  Laboratory Equipment and Supplies

 

  • 1 pH Meters

 

  • 1.1 The accuracy and scale graduations of a laboratory pH meter are within ±0.1 pH units. The accuracy and scale graduations of a portable pH meter for use with water sampling are within ±0.2 pH units.

 

  • 1.2 pH buffer aliquots are used only once.

 

  • 1.3 Electrodes are maintained according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

 

 

 

ApD-14

 

QC  4.1.4    Commercial buffer solution containers are dated upon receipt and when opened.

Solutions are discarded before the expiration date.

 

4.2    Light Microscope

 

  • 2.1 The microscope is equipped with lenses to provide about 40X to 100X total magnification.

 

  • 2.2 Optical clarity is sufficient to accurately count cells in a hemocytometer.

 

4.3    Inverted Light Microscope

 

  • 3.1 The microscope is equipped with lenses to provide about 40X to 100X total magnification.

 

  • 3.2 Optical clarity is sufficient to accurately demonstrate CPE.

 

  • 4 Microbiological hood (if separate work areas are not available)

 

  • 4.1 Hood is at least a class II biological safety cabinet.

 

QC  4.4.2    Hood is certified to be in proper operating condition on at least an annual basis.

 

4.5    Temperature Monitoring

 

  • 5.1 Glass/mercury, dial thermometers or continuous recording devices are used to monitor equipment. Units are graduated in 0.5 C increments or less. Mercury columns in glass thermometers are not separated.

 

QC  4.5.2    The calibration at the temperature used of each glass/mercury thermometer is checked annually against a reference National Institute of Standards and Technology (formerly National Bureau of Standards) (NBS) thermometer or one that meets the requirements of NIST Monograph SP 250-23. The calibration of each in-use dial ther- mometer is checked quarterly.

 

QC  4.5.3    Correction data are available for all reference thermometers used for calibration.

 

QC  4.5.4    Continuous recording devices are recalibrated annually using the reference thermometer described in QC 4.5.2.

 

4.6    Incubator

 

  • 6.1 The incubator maintains an internal temperature of 36.5 ± 1 C.

 

ApD-15

 

  • 6.2 A temperature monitoring device is placed on a shelf near area of use. The bulb or probe of the temperature monitoring device is in liquid.

 

QC  4.6.3    The temperature is recorded at least once per day for each workday in use.

 

4.7    Refrigerator

 

  • 7.1 The refrigerator maintains a temperature of 1  to 5 C.

 

  • 7.2 A calibrated temperature monitoring device is placed on a shelf near the area of use. The thermometer bulb or probe is immersed in liquid.

 

QC  4.7.3    The temperature is recorded at least once per day for each workday in use.

 

4.8        Freezer, -20 C

 

  • 8.1 The freezer maintains a temperature of -20 ± 5 C. The freezer may be a compartment associated with 4.6.

 

 

 

 

QC

4.8.2

use.

 

4.8.3

A calibrated temperature monitoring device is placed on a shelf near the area of

 

 

The temperature is recorded at least once per day for each workday in use.

 

4.9     Freezer, -70 C

4.9.1 The freezer maintains a temperature of -70 ± 3 C or lower.
4.9.2

use.

A calibrated temperature monitoring device is placed on a shelf near the area of
QC 4.9.3 The temperature is recorded continuously during periods of use or at least once

per day for each workday in use.

 

4.10     Refrigerated Centrifuge

 

  • 10.1 The centrifuge can be operated at a centrifugal force of at least 4,000 ×g.

 

  • 10.2 Centrifuge maintains an internal temperature of 4 C during run.

 

  • 10.3 A rotor is available which is capable of 4,000 ×g while holding centrifuge bottles of 100 – 1000 ml.

 

 

 

ApD-16

 

QC     4.10.4    A log recording rotor serial number, run speed, time of centrifugation, tempera- ture of operation and operator is kept for each centrifuge run.

 

4.11     Balance

 

QC     4.11.1    The balance is calibrated monthly using Class S or S-1 reference weights (minimum of three traceable weights which bracket laboratory weighing needs) or weights traceable to Class S or S-1 weights.

 

QC     4.11.2    Correction data are available for the S or S-1 calibration weights.

 

4.11.3    A service contract or internal maintenance protocol is established and records are maintained.

 

4.12     Autoclave

 

  • 12.1 The autoclave has a temperature gauge with a sensor on the exhaust, a pressure gauge and an operational safety valve.

 

  • 12.2 Autoclave depressurizes slowly to ensure that media do not boil over.

 

  • 12.3 The autoclave’s automatic timing mechanism is adequate. The autoclave maintains sterilization temperature during the sterilizing cycle and completes an entire liquid cycle within 45 min when a 12-15 min sterilization period is used.

 

  • 12.4 A service contract or internal maintenance protocol is established and records are maintained.

 

  • 12.5 A maximum temperature-registering thermometer or heat-sensitive tape is used with each autoclave cycle.

 

QC     4.12.6    Spore strips or ampules are used on a monthly basis.

 

QC     4.12.7    The date, contents, sterilization time and temperature is recorded for each cycle.

 

  • 13 Hot Air Oven (If used for sterilizing dry glassware.)

 

  • 13.1 The oven maintains a stable sterilization temperature of 170 – 180 C for at least two h.

 

  • 13.2 A temperature monitoring device is used with the bulb or probe placed in sand during use. The monitoring device is graduated in no more than 10 C increments.

 

ApD-17

 

QC     4.13.3    The date, contents, sterilization time and temperature is recorded for each cycle.

 

4.14     Pump

A self-priming pump is required for preparation of QC samples. It is recommended that the pump be capable of pumping at a rate of 3 gal/min at 30 PSI.

 

4.15     Polypropylene Container

The container holds at least 40 L. The contents can be mixed without spilling or splashing.

 

4.16     Positive Pressure Source

An air or nitrogen source and pressure vessel or a peristaltic type pump is used for filter elution.

 

4.17     Magnetic Stirrer

The magnetic stirrer is capable of maintaining a vortex during organic flocculation and pH adjustments.

 

4.18     Source for Reagent Grade Water

 

  • 18.1 Distillation and/or deionization units are maintained according to the manufac- turer’s instructions or water is purchased commercially.

 

  • 18.2 Reagent grade water is used to prepare all media and reagents.

 

QC     4.18.3    The conductivity of the reagent grade water is tested with each use. The conductivity is >0.5 megohms-cm at 25 C.

 

5.           General Laboratory Practices

 

5.1        Analytical Media

 

  • 1.1 General

 

  • 1.1.1 Commercial media and chemicals are dated upon receipt and when first opened. Only analytical reagent or ACS grade chemicals are used for the prepara- tion of media.

 

  • 1.1.2 Use of commercial dehydrated or liquid media for propagation of tissue culture cells are recommended due to concern about quality control. Dehydrated media are prepared and stored as recommended by the manufacturers.

 

 

 

 

ApD-18

 

  • 1.1.3 Commercial media and chemicals are discarded by manufacturers’ expiration dates. Laboratory prepared media are discarded by the expiration dates indicated in the Virus Monitoring Protocol.

 

  • 1.1.4 Each lot of medium is checked for sterility before use as described in the Virus Monitoring Protocol.

 

QC           5.1.1.5    The lot numbers of commercial media and chemicals are recorded. The date of preparation, type of medium, lot number, sterilization procedure, pH and technician’s initials are recorded for media prepared in the laboratory.

 

5.1.2         Thiosulfate (2%)

 

  • 1.2.1 A stock solution of 2% thiosulfate is prepared by dissolving 100 g of Na2S2O3 in a total of 5000 ml of reagent grade water. The solution is autoclaved for 30 min at 121 C.

 

  • 1.2.2 2% thiosulfate is stored at or below room temperature for up to six months.

 

5.1.3         Hydrochloric acid (HCl)

 

  • 1.3.1 Solutions of 0.1, 1 and 5 M HCl are prepared by mixing 50, 100 or 50 ml of concentrated HCl with 4950, 900 or 50 ml of reagent grade water, respectively. Solutions of HCl are self-sterilizing and should be prepared at least 24 h prior to use.

 

  • 1.3.2 Solutions of HCl are stored at or below room temperature for up to six months.

 

5.1.4         Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH)

 

  • 1.4.1 Solutions of 1 M and 5 M NaOH are prepared by dissolving 4 or 20 g of NaOH in a final volume of 100 ml of reagent grade water, respectively. Solutions of NaOH are self-sterilizing and should be prepared at least 24 h prior to use.

 

  • 1.4.2 Solutions of NaOH are stored in polypropylene containers at room temperature for up to three months.

 

5.1.5         Beef Extract, 1.5%

 

  • 1.5.1 Buffered 1.5% beef extract is prepared by dissolving 30 g of beef extract V powder and 7.5 g of glycine (final glycine concentration = 0.05 M) in 1.9 L of reagent grade water. The pH is adjusted to 9.5 with 1 or 5 M NaOH and the final

 

 

 

ApD-19

 

volume is brought to 2 L with reagent grade water. The solution is autoclaved at 121  C for 15 min.

 

  • 1.5.2 Solutions of 1.5% beef extract are stored for one week at 4 C or for up to 18 months at -20 C.

 

5.1.6         Sodium Phosphate, 0.15 M

 

  • 1.6.1 A solution of 0.15 M sodium phosphate is prepared by dissolving 40.2 g

of sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4   7H2O) in a final volume of 1000 ml of reagent

grade water. The pH is checked to ensure that it is between 9.0 – 9.5 and adjusted

with 1 M NaOH, if necessary. The solution is autoclaved at 121 C for 15 min.

 

  • 1.6.2 Solutions of 0.15 M sodium phosphate are stored at or below room temperature for up to six months.

 

5.1.7         Washing Solution

 

  • 1.7.1 Washing solution is prepared by dissolving 8.5 g of NaCl in a final volume of 980 ml of reagent grade water. The solution is autoclaved at 121  C for 15 min and cooled to room temperature. 20 ml of bovine serum is added and the solution is mixed thoroughly.

 

  • 1.7.2 The wash solution is stored at 4 C for up to three months or at -20 C for up to 18 months.

 

5.1.8         Chlorine, 0.1%

 

  • 1.8.1 A solution of 0.1% chlorine (HOCl) is prepared by adding 19 ml of household bleach to 900 ml of reagent grade water, adjusting the pH of the solution to 6-7 with 1 M HCl and bringing the final volume to 1 L with reagent grade water. Solutions of 0.1% chlorine are self-sterilizing.

 

  • 1.8.2 Solutions of 0.1% chlorine are stored at or below room temperature for up to one month.

 

5.1.9         Iodine, 0.5%

 

  • 1.9.1 A solution of 0.5% iodine is prepared by dissolving 5 g I2in 1000 ml of 70% ethanol. Solutions of 0.5% iodine are self-sterilizing.

 

  • 1.9.2 Solutions of 0.5% iodine are stored at room temperature for up to six months.

 

 

ApD-20

 

5.2        Sterilization and Disinfection

 

  • 2.1 Autoclavable glassware, plasticware and equipment are sterilized by auto- claving at 121 C for 1 h or, if appropriate, by dry heat at 170 C for at least one h.

 

  • 2.2 Non-autoclavable supplies are disinfected with 0.1% chlorine (pH 6-7) for 30 min or in a gas sterilizer according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

 

  • 2.3 Contaminated materials are sterilized by autoclaving at 121 C for at least 1 h.

 

  • 2.4 Adequate glassware washing facilities are available for washing re-usable glassware.

 

  • 2.5 All surfaces are disinfected with 0.5% iodine or 0.1% chlorine, pH 6-7 before and after each use and after any spill or other contamination.

 

6.           Analytical Methodology

 

6.1        General

Only the analytical methodology specified in the July, 1995, draft of the Virus Monitoring Protocol for the Information Collection Rule is used for lab and analyst approval.

 

6.2        QC Samples

QC Each analyst and technician must prepare and process a negative QC sample during the site visit (technicians will only be required to perform steps 6.3 to 6.4). A negative QC sample is prepared by pumping 40 L of reagent grade water placed in a sterile polypro- pylene container through a sterile standard sampling apparatus.

 

6.3        Filter Elution

 

  • 3.1 Residual water is blown out from the cartridge housing.

 

  • 3.2 Virus is eluted from the 1MDS filter by slowly passing 1000 ml of 1.5% beef extract (pH 9.5) through the filter twice. The flow of beef extract is interrupted for 1 min during each pass to enhance elution.

 

  • 3.3 An air filter is used with a positive pressure lab air source.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ApD-21

 

6.4        Organic Flocculation

 

QC     6.4.1      The pH meter is standardized at pH 4 and 7.

 

  • 4.2 The pH electrode is disinfected before and after use.

 

  • 4.3 The pH of the eluate is adjusted slowly to 3.5 ± 0.1 with 1 M HCl with stirring at a speed sufficient to develop a vortex.

 

  • 4.4 The eluate is stirred for 30 min after pH adjustment.

 

  • 4.5 The pH adjusted eluate is centrifuged at 2,500 ×g for 15 min at 4 C.

 

  • 4.6 The supernatant is properly discarded after the centrifugation run.

 

  • 4.7 The precipitate is dissolved in 30 ml of 0.15 M sodium phosphate.

 

QC     6.4.8      The pH meter is standardized at pH 7 and 10.

 

  • 4.9 The pH electrode is disinfected before and after use.

 

  • 4.10 The pH of the dissolved precipitate is readjusted to 9.0 – 9.5, if necessary.

 

  • 4.11 The dissolved precipitate is centrifuged at 4,000 – 10,000 ×g for 10 min at 4 C.

 

  • 4.12 The supernatant is removed and saved after the centrifugation run. The pellet is properly discarded.

 

  • 4.13 The pH of the supernatant is adjusted to 7.0 – 7.5 with 1 M HCl.

 

  • 4.14 The supernatant is treated to remove or reduce microbial contamination. Sterilizing filters are pretreated before use with beef extract.

 

  • 4.15 The final volume is recorded after treatment.

 

  • 4.16 The treated supernatant is divided into subsamples.

 

6.5        Total Culturable Virus Assay

 

QC     6.5.1      Passage 117 to 250 BGM cell cultures obtained from the U.S. EPA are being cultured for ICR virus assays.

 

 

 

 

ApD-22

 

  • 5.2 Cultures are used between three and six days after the most recent passage or the laboratory has demonstrated that the culture time used is as sensitive as cultures at three to six days. Cultures are washed prior to inoculation with serum-free medium.

 

  • 5.3 At least ten replicate cultures per subsample or subsample dilution are inoculated with an inoculation volume equal to 1/20th the assay sample volume.

6.4.4    The inoculation volume does not exceed 0.04 ml/cm2.

 

  • 5.5 Virus is allowed to adsorb onto cells for 80 – 120 min at room temperature or at

36.5 ± 1 C.

 

  • 5.6 Liquid maintenance medium is added and cultures are incubated at 36.5 ± 1 C.

 

  • 5.7 A 2nd passage is performed using 10% of the medium from the 1st passage. Samples that were positive in the 1st passage are filtered before doing the 2nd passage.

 

  • 5.8 The analyst demonstrates the ability to perform MPN calculations.

 

  • 5.9 A positive and negative control is run with each sample.

 

7.           Quality Assurance

The laboratory prepares and follows a written QA plan which is available for inspection during the site visit.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ApD-23

For EPA LT2 – Method 1623: Cryptosporidium and Giardia in Water by Filtration/IMS/FA December 2005

PDF Copy is here.

US EPA Logo

Method 1623: Cryptosporidium and Giardia in Water by Filtration/IMS/FA

December 2005

EPA Method 1623 LT2 Cryptospoiridium


Method 1623: Cryptosporidium and Giardia in Water by Filtration/IMS/FA December 2005

Office of Water (4607)

EPA 815-R-05-002

http://www.epa.gov/microbes/ December 2005

 


 

Acknowledgments

 

This method was prepared under the direction of William A. Telliard of the Engineering and Analysis Division within the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA) Office of Water. This document was prepared by CSC under a U.S. EPA contract, with assistance from its subcontractor, Interface, Inc.

The U.S. EPA Office of Water gratefully acknowledges the contributions of the following persons and organizations to the development of this method:

Mike Arrowood, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, Division of Parasitic Diseases (MS-F13), 4770 Buford Highway, N.E., Atlanta, GA 30341-3724, USA

Phil Berger, Office of Groundwater and Drinking Water, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 401 M Street, S.W., Washington, DC 20460, USA

Jennifer Clancy, Clancy Environmental Consultants, Inc., P.O. Box 314, St. Albans, VT 05478, USA Kevin Connell, CSC, 6101 Stevenson Avenue, Alexandria, VA 22314, USA

Ricardo DeLeon, Metropolitan Water District of Southern California, 700 Moreno Avenue, LaVerne, CA 91760, USA

Shirley Dzogan, EnviroTest Laboratories, 745 Logan Avenue, Winnipeg, Manitoba R3E 3L5, Canada Mary Ann Feige (retired), Technical Support Center, Office of Ground Water and Drinking Water, U.S.

Environmental Protection Agency, 26 W. Martin Luther King Drive, Cincinnati, OH 45268-1320,

USA

Colin Fricker, Thames Water Utilities, Manor Farm Road, Reading, Berkshire, RG2 0JN, England   Carrie Moulton (Hancock), Technical Support Center, Office of Ground Water and Drinking Water, U.S.

Environmental Protection Agency, 26 W. Martin Luther King Drive, Cincinnati, OH 45268-1320,

USA

Stephanie Harris,Manchester Laboratory, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Region 10, 7411 Beach Drive East, Port Orchard, WA 98366, USA

Dale Rushneck, Interface, Inc., 3194 Worthington Avenue, Fort Collins, CO 80526, USA

Frank Schaefer III, National Exposure Research Laboratory, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 26

  1. Martin Luther King Drive, Cincinnati, OH 45268-1320, USA

Steve Schaub, Health and Ecological Criteria Division (4304), Office of Science and Technology, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 401 M Street, S.W., Washington, DC 20460, USA

Ajaib Singh, City of Milwaukee Health Department, 841 North Broadway, Milwaukee, WI 53202, USA Huw Smith, Department of Bacteriology, Scottish Parasite Diagnostic Laboratory, Stobhill NHS Trust,

Springburn, Glasgow, G21 3UW, Scotland

Timothy Straub, Lockheed Martin, 7411 Beach Drive East, Port Orchard, WA 98366, USA

William A. Telliard, Office of Science and Technology, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 401 M Street, S.W., Washington, DC 20460, USA

Cryptosporidium cover photo courtesy of the U.S. Centers for Disease Control

Giardia cover photo courtesy of CH Diagnostic & Consulting Service, Inc.

i

 

Disclaimer

 

This method has been reviewed by the U.S. EPA Office of Water and approved for publication. Mention of trade names or commercial products does not constitute endorsement or recommendation for use.

Questions regarding this method or its application should be addressed to: Carrie Moulton

Coordinator, Laboratory Quality Assurance Program for the Analysis of Cryptosporidium

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Office of Ground Water and Drinking Water Technical Support Center, MC140

26 West Martin Luther King Drive Cincinnati, OH 45268-1320

(513) 569-7919

(513) 569-7191 (fax)

moulton.carrie@epa.gov

ii

 


 

Introduction

 

To support future regulation of protozoa in drinking water, the Safe Drinking Water Act Amendments of 1996 require the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) to evaluate the risk to public health posed by drinking water contaminants, including waterborne parasites, such as Cryptosporidium and Giardia. To implement these requirements, EPA must assess Cryptosporidium and Giardia occurrence in raw surface waters used as source waters for drinking water treatment plants. EPA Method 1623 was developed to support this assessment.

Method Development and Validation

EPA initiated an effort in 1996 to identify new and innovative technologies for protozoan monitoring and analysis. After evaluating potential alternatives to the then-current method through literature searches, discussions with research and commercial laboratories, and meetings with experts in the field, the Engineering and Analysis Division within the Office of Science and Technology within EPA’s Office of Water developed draft Method 1622 for Cryptosporidium detection in December 1996. This Cryptosporidium-only method was validated through an interlaboratory study in August 1998, and was revised as a final, valid method for detecting Cryptosporidium in water in January 1999.

Although development of an acceptable immunomagnetic separation system for Giardia lagged behind development of an acceptable system for Cryptosporidium, an acceptable system was identified in  October 1998, and EPA validated a method for simultaneous detection of Cryptosporidium and Giardia in February 1999 and developed quality control (QC) acceptance criteria for the method based on this validation study. To avoid confusion with Method 1622, which already had been validated and was in use both domestically and internationally as a stand-alone Cryptosporidium-only detection method, EPA designated the new combined procedure EPA Method 1623.

The interlaboratory validated versions of Method 1622 (January 1999; EPA-821-R-99-001) and Method 1623 (April 1999; EPA-821-R-99-006) were used to analyze approximately 3,000 field and QC samples during the Information Collection Rule Supplemental Surveys (ICRSS) between March 1999 and February 2000. Method 1622 was used to analyze samples from March 1999 to mid-July 1999; Method 1623 was used from mid-July 1999 to February 2000.

Changes in the April 2001 Versions of the Methods

Both methods were revised in April 2001, after completion of the ICRSS and multiple meetings with researchers and experienced laboratory staff to discuss potential method updates. Changes incorporated in the April 2001 revisions of the methods (EPA-821-R-01-025 and EPA-821-R-01-026) included the following:

  •  Nationwide approval of modified versions of the methods using the following components:
    • (a) Whatman Nuclepore CrypTest™ filter
    • (b) IDEXX Filta-Max® filter
    • (c) Waterborne Aqua-Glo™ G/C Direct FL antibody stain
    • (d) Waterborne Crypt-a-Glo™ and Giardi-a-Glo™ antibody stains
  • Clarified sample acceptance criteria
  • Modified capsule filter elution procedure
  • Modified concentrate aspiration procedure
  • Modified IMS acid dissociation procedure
  • Updated QC acceptance criteria for IPR and OPR tests
  • Addition of a troubleshooting section for QC failures
  • Modified holding times
  • Inclusion of flow cytometry–sorted spiking suspensions

Changes in the June 2003 Versions of the Methods

Both methods were revised again in June 2003 to support proposal of EPA’s Long Term 2 Enhanced Surface Water Treatment Rule. Changes incorporated into the December 2002 versions include:

  • Nationwide approval of a modified version of the methods using the Pall Gelman Envirochek™ HV filter
  • Removal of Whatman Nuclepore CrypTest™ filter from the methods as a result of discontinuation of the product by the manufacturer
  • Nationwide approval of the use of BTF EasySeed™ irradiated oocysts and cysts for use in routine quality control (QC) samples
  • Minor clarifications and corrections
  • Rejection criteria for sample condition upon receipt
  • Guidance on measuring sample temperatures
  • Clarification of QC sample requirements and use of QC sample results
  • Guidance on minimizing carry-over debris onto microscope slides after IMS

Changes in the December 2005 Versions of the Methods

Both methods were revised again in 2005 to support promulgation of EPA’s Long Term 2 Enhanced Surface Water Treatment Rule. Changes incorporated into the June 2003 versions include:

  • Nationwide approval of the use of portable continuous-flow centrifugation as a modified version of the method. The product met all method acceptance criteria for Cryptosporidium using 50-L source water samples (but not Giardia, however, individual laboratories are permitted to demonstrate acceptable performance for Giardia in their laboratory).
  • Addition of BTF EasyStain™ monoclonal antibody stain as an acceptable reagent for staining in Methods 1622/1623. The product was validated through an interlaboratory validation study using the Pall Envirochek™ HV
  • Clarification of the analyst verification procedure
  • Clarification of sample condition criteria upon receipt

Performance-Based Method Concept and Modifications Approved for Nationwide Use

EPA Method 1623 is a performance-based method applicable to the determination of Cryptosporidium  and Giardia in aqueous matrices. EPA Method 1623 requires filtration, immunomagnetic separation of the oocysts and cysts from the material captured, and enumeration of the target organisms based on the results of immunofluorescence assay, 4′,6-diamidino-2-phenylindole (DAPI) staining results, and differential interference contrast microscopy.

iv

The interlaboratory validation of EPA Method 1623 conducted by EPA used the Pall Gelman capsule

filtration procedure, Dynal immunomagnetic separation (IMS) procedure, and Meridian sample staining procedure described in this document. Alternate procedures are allowed, provided that required quality control tests are performed and all quality control acceptance criteria in this method are  met.

Since the interlaboratory validation of EPA Method 1623, interlaboratory validation studies have been performed to demonstrate the equivalency of modified versions of the method using the following components:

  • Whatman Nuclepore CryptTest™ filter (no longer available)
  • IDEXX Filta-Max® filter
  • Pall Gelman Envirochek™ HV filter
  • Portable Continuous-Flow Centrifugation (PCFC)
  • Waterborne Aqua-Glo™ G/C Direct FL antibody stain
  • Waterborne Crypt-a-Glo™ and Giardi-a-Glo™ antibody stains
  • BTF EasyStain™ antibody stain
  • BTF EasySeed™ irradiated oocysts and cysts for use in routine QC samples

The validation studies for these modified versions of the method met EPA’s performance-based measurement system Tier 2 validation for nationwide use (see Section 9.1.2 for details), and have been accepted by EPA as equivalent in performance to the original version of the method validated by EPA. The equipment and reagents used in these modified versions of the method are noted in Sections 6 and 7 of the method.

Because this is a performance-based method, other alternative components not listed in the method may be available for evaluation and use by the laboratory. Confirming the acceptable performance of a modified version of the method using alternate components in a single laboratory does not require that an interlaboratory validation study be conducted. However, method modifications validated only in a single laboratory have not undergone sufficient testing to merit inclusion in the method. Only those modified versions of the method that have been demonstrated as equivalent at multiple laboratories on multiple water sources through a Tier 2 interlaboratory study will be cited in the method.

v

Table of Contents

1.0       Scope and Application……………………………………………………………………………………………… 1

2.0       Summary of Method………………………………………………………………………………………………… 1

3.0       Definitions……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2

4.0       Contamination, Interferences, and Organism Degradation…………………………………………. 2

5.0       Safety……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3

6.0       Equipment and Supplies………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4

7.0       Reagents and Standards………………………………………………………………………………………….. 8

8.0       Sample Collection and Storage………………………………………………………………………………… 11

9.0       Quality Control……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 13

10.0     Microscope Calibration and Analyst Verification………………………………………………………. 21

11.0     Oocyst and Cyst Suspension Enumeration and Sample Spiking…………………………………… 28

12.0     Sample Filtration and Elution………………………………………………………………………………….. 36

13.0     Sample Concentration and Separation (Purification)………………………………………………… 46

14.0     Sample Staining…………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 51

15.0     Examination…………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 52

16.0     Analysis of Complex Samples………………………………………………………………………………….. 54

17.0     Method Performance……………………………………………………………………………………………… 55

18.0     Pollution Prevention………………………………………………………………………………………………. 55

19.0     Waste Management………………………………………………………………………………………………… 55

20.0     References……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 55

21.0     Tables and Figures…………………………………………………………………………………………………. 57

22.0     Glossary of Definitions and Purposes………………………………………………………………………. 66

vi

Method 1623: Cryptosporidium and Giardia in Water

by Filtration/IMS/FA

 

1.0                   Scope and Application

  • This method is for the detection of Cryptosporidium (CAS Registry number 137259-50-8) and Giardia (CAS Registry number 137259-49-5) in water by concentration, immunomagnetic separation (IMS), and immunofluorescence assay (FA) microscopy. Cryptosporidium and Giardia may be verified using 4′,6-diamidino-2-phenylindole (DAPI) staining and differential interference contrast (DIC) microscopy. The method has been validated in surface water, but may be used in other waters, provided the laboratory demonstrates that the method’s performance acceptance criteria are
  • This method is designed to meet the survey and monitoring requirements of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). It is based on laboratory testing of recommendations by a panel of experts convened by EPA. The panel was charged with recommending an improved protocol for recovery and detection of protozoa that could be tested and implemented with minimal additional
  • This method identifies the genera, Cryptosporidium or Giardia, but not the species. The method cannot determine the host species of origin, nor can it determine the viability or infectivity of detected oocysts and
  • This method is for use only by persons experienced in the determination of Cryptosporidium and Giardia by filtration, IMS, and FA. Experienced persons are defined in Section 22.2 as analysts or principal analysts. Laboratories unfamiliar with analyses of environmental samples by the techniques in this method should gain experience using water filtration techniques, IMS, fluorescent antibody staining with monoclonal antibodies, and microscopic examination of biological particulates using bright-field and DIC
  • Any modification of the method beyond those expressly permitted is subject to the application and approval of alternative test procedures under 40 CFR Part 27.

2.0                   Summary of Method

  • A water sample is filtered and the oocysts, cysts, and extraneous materials are retained on the filter. Although EPA has only validated the method using laboratory filtration of bulk water samples shipped from the field, field-filtration also may be
  • Elution and separation
    • Materials on the filter are eluted and the eluate is centrifuged to pellet the oocysts and cysts, and the supernatant fluid is
    • The oocysts and cysts are magnetized by attachment of magnetic beads conjugated to

anti-Cryptosporidium and anti-Giardia antibodies. The magnetized oocysts and cysts are separated from the extraneous materials using a magnet, and the extraneous materials are discarded. The magnetic bead complex is then detached from the oocysts and cysts.

  • Enumeration
    • The oocysts and cysts are stained on well slides with fluorescently labeled monoclonal

antibodies and 4′,6-diamidino-2-phenylindole (DAPI). The stained sample is examined using fluorescence and differential interference contrast (DIC) microscopy.

1                                                      December 2005

 

  • Qualitative analysis is performed by scanning each slide well for objects that meet the size, shape, and fluorescence characteristics of Cryptosporidium oocysts or Giardia

cysts.

  • Quantitative analysis is performed by counting the total number of objects on the slide confirmed as oocysts or
  • Quality is assured through reproducible calibration and testing of the filtration, immunomagnetic

separation (IMS), staining, and microscopy systems. Detailed information on these tests is provided in Section 9.0.

3.0                   Definitions

  • Cryptosporidium is a genus of protozoan parasites potentially found in water and other media. The recent taxonomy of the genus Cryptosporidium includes the following species and their potential hosts: hominis (humans; formerly C. parvum genotype I; Reference 20.1); C. parvum (bovine and other mammals including humans; formerly genotype II;); C. baileyi and C. meleagridis (birds); C. muris (rodents); C. canis (dogs); C. felis (cats); C. serpentis (reptiles); and
  1. nasorum (fish). Cryptosporidium oocysts are defined in this method as objects exhibiting brilliant apple green fluorescence under UV light (FA-positive), typical size (4 to 6 µm) and shape (round to oval), and no atypical characteristics by FA, DAPI fluorescence, or DIC microscopy. Examination and characterization using fluorescence (FITC and DAPI stain) and DIC microscopy are required for exclusion of atypical organisms (e.g., those possessing spikes, stalks, appendages, pores, one or two large nuclei filling the cell, red fluorescing chloroplasts, crystals, spores, etc.).
  • Giardia is a genus of protozoan parasites potentially found in water and other media. The recent taxonomy of the genus Giardia includes the following species and their potential hosts: lamblia (also called G. intestinalis or G. duodenalis; humans and other mammals); G. muris (rodents); G. agilis (amphibians); G. psittaci and G. ardeae (birds). Recent molecular studies suggest the division of G. lamblia into multiple genotypes (Reference 20.2). Giardia cysts are defined in this method as objects exhibiting brilliant apple green fluorescence under UV light

(FA-positive), typical size (8 to 18 µm long by 5 to 15 µm wide) and shape (oval to round), and no atypical characteristics by FA, DAPI fluorescence, or DIC microscopy. Examination and characterization by fluorescence (FITC and DAPI stain) and DIC microscopy are required for exclusion of atypical organisms (e.g., those possessing spikes, stalks, appendages, pores, one or two large nuclei filling the cell, red fluorescing chloroplasts, crystals, spores, etc.).

  • Definitions for other terms used in this method are given in the glossary (Section 0).

4.0                   Contamination, Interferences, and Organism Degradation

  • Turbidity caused by inorganic and organic debris can interfere with the concentration, separation, and examination of the sample for Cryptosporidium oocysts and Giardia In addition to naturally-occurring debris, e.g. clays and algae, chemicals, e.g. iron, alum coagulants and polymers added to source waters during the treatment process may result in additional interference.
  • Organisms and debris that autofluoresce or demonstrate non-specific immunofluorescence, such as algal and yeast cells, when examined by epifluorescent microscopy, may interfere with the detection of oocysts and cysts and contribute to false positives by immunofluorescence assay (FA) (Reference 3).

December 2005                                         2

 

  • Solvents, reagents, labware, and other sample-processing hardware may yield artifacts that may cause misinterpretation of microscopic examinations for oocysts and cysts. All materials used must be demonstrated to be free from interferences under the conditions of analysis by running a method blank (negative control sample) initially and a minimum of every week or after changes in source of reagent water. Specific selection of reagents and purification of solvents and other materials may be
  • Freezing samples, filters, eluates, concentrates, or slides may interfere with the detection and/or identification of oocysts and
  • All equipment should be cleaned according to manufacturers’ instructions. Disposable supplies should be used wherever

5.0                   Safety

  • The biohazard associated with, and the risk of infection from, oocysts and cysts is high in this method because live organisms are handled. This method does not purport to address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the laboratory to establish appropriate safety and health practices prior to use of this method. In particular, laboratory staff must know and observe the safety procedures required in a microbiology laboratory that handles pathogenic organisms while preparing, using, and disposing of sample concentrates, reagents and materials, and while operating sterilization
  • The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each compound or reagent used in this method has not been precisely determined; however, each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard. Exposure to these compounds should be reduced to the lowest possible level. The laboratory is responsible for maintaining current knowledge of Occupational Safety and Health Administration regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference file of material safety data sheets should be made available to all personnel involved in these analyses. Additional information on laboratory safety can be found in References 20.4 through 7.
  • Samples may contain high concentrations of biohazards and toxic compounds, and must be handled with gloves. Reference materials and standards containing oocysts and cysts must also be handled with gloves and laboratory staff must never place gloves in or near the face after exposure to solutions known or suspected to contain oocysts and cysts. Do not mouth-pipette.
  • Laboratory personnel must change gloves after handling filters and other contaminant-prone equipment and reagents. Gloves must be removed or changed before touching any other laboratory surfaces or
  • Centers for Disease Control (CDC) regulations (42 CFR 72) prohibit interstate shipment of more than 4 L of solution known to contain infectious materials (see http://www.cdc.gov/od/ohs/biosfty/shipregs.htm for details). State regulations may contain similar regulations for intrastate commerce. Unless the sample is known or suspected to contain CryptosporidiumGiardia, or other infectious agents (e.g., during an outbreak), samples should be shipped as noninfectious and should not be marked as infectious. If a sample is known or suspected to be infectious, and the sample must be shipped to a laboratory by a transportation means affected by CDC or state regulations, the sample should be shipped in accordance with these

3                                                      December 2005

 

6.0                   Equipment and Supplies                                                                   

NOTE:   Brand names, suppliers, and part numbers are for illustrative purposes only. No

endorsement is implied. Equivalent performance may be achieved using apparatus and materials other than those specified here, but demonstration of equivalent performance that meets the requirements of this method is the responsibility of the laboratory.

  • Sample collection equipment for shipment of bulk water samples for laboratory filtration. Collapsible LDPE cubitainer for collection of 10-L bulk sample(s)—Cole Parmer cat. no. U- 06100-30 or Fill completely to ensure collection of a full 10-L sample. Discard after one use.
  • Equipment for sample filtration. Four options have been demonstrated to be acceptable for use with Method 1623. Other options may be used if their acceptability is demonstrated according to the procedures outlined in Section 1.2.
    • Cubitainer spigot to facilitate laboratory filtration of sample (for use with any filtration option)—Cole Parmer cat. no. U-06061-01, or
    • Original Envirochek™ sampling capsule or Envirochek™ HV sampling capsule

equipment requirements (for use with the procedure described in Section 12.2). The versions of the method using these filters were validated using 10-L and 50-L sample volumes, respectively. Alternate sample volumes may be used, provided the laboratory demonstrates acceptable performance on initial and ongoing spiked reagent water and source water samples (Section 9.1.2).

  • Sampling capsule
    • Envirochek™, Pall Corporation, Ann Arbor, MI, part

12110 (individual filter) and or part no.12107 (box of 25 filters) (www.pall.com or (800) 521-1520 ext. 2)

  • Envirochek™ HV, Pall Corporation, Ann Arbor, MI, part
  1. 12099 (individual filter) or part no.12098 (box of 25 filters) (www.pall.com or (800) 521-1520 ext. 2)
  • Laboratory shaker with arms for agitation of sampling capsules
    • Laboratory shaker—Lab-Line model 3589 (available

through VWR Scientific cat. no. 57039-055), Pall Corporation part no. 4821, Fisher cat. no. 14260-11, or equivalent

  • Side arms for laboratory shaker—Lab-Line Model 3587-

4 (available through VWR Scientific cat. no. 57039-045), Fisher cat. no. 14260-13, or equivalent

  • Filta-Max® foam filter equipment requirements (for use with the procedure described in

Section 12.3). The version of the method using this filter was validated using 50-L sample volumes; alternate sample volumes may be used, provided the laboratory demonstrates acceptable performance on initial and ongoing spiked reagent water and matrix samples (Section 9.1.2).

December 2005                                         4

 

  • Foam filter—Filta-Max®, IDEXX, Westbrook, ME. Filter module cat. no. FMC 10603

NOTE:  Check at least one filter per batch to ensure that the filters have not  been

affected by improper storage or other factors that could result in brittleness or other problems. At a minimum confirm that the test filter expands properly in water before using the batch or shipping filters to the field.

  • Filter processing equipment—Filta-Max® starter kit, IDEXX,

Westbrook, ME, cat. no. FMC 11002. Starter kit includes manual wash station with clamp set (FMC 10101 or 10106) including plunger head (FMC 12001), tubing set (FMC 10307), vacuum set (FMC 10401), MKII filter housing with hose-tail fittings (FMC 10504) and green housing tools (FMC 10506). In addition, processing requires magnetic stirrer (FMC 10901) and filter membranes, 100 pk, (FMC 10800).

  • Portable Continuous-Flow Centrifuge (PCFC) requirements (for use with procedures

described in Section 12.4). The version of the method using this technique was validated for Cryptosporidium in 50-L sample volumes; alternate sample volumes may be used, provided the laboratory demonstrates acceptable performance on initial and ongoing spiked reagent water and matrix samples (Section 9.1.2). Individual laboratories are also permitted to demonstrate acceptable performance for Giardia in their laboratory. The technique is based on technology from Haemonetics Corporation, Braintree, MA.

  • Ancillary sampling equipment
    • Tubing—Glass, polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), high-density polyethylene (HDPE), or

other tubing to which oocysts and cysts will not easily adhere, Tygon formula R-3603, or equivalent. If rigid tubing (glass, PTFE, HDPE) is used and the sampling system uses a peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible tubing may be used in the pump.

Before use, the tubing must be autoclaved, thoroughly rinsed with detergent solution, followed by repeated rinsing with reagent water to minimize sample contamination. Alternately, decontaminate using hypochlorite solution, sodium thiosulfate, and multiple reagent water rinses. Dispose of tubing after one use whenever possible or when wear is evident.

  • Flow control valve—0.5 gpm (0.03 L/s), Bertram Controls, Plast-O-Matic cat.

FC050BΩ-PV, or equivalent; or 0.4- to 4-Lpm flow meter with valve, Alamo Water Treatment, San Antonio, TX, cat. no. R5310, or equivalent

  • Pump— peristaltic, centrifugal, impeller, or diaphragm pump; MasterFlex I/P®

EasyLoad® peristaltic pump (Cole-Parmer cat. No. EW-77963-10) with 77601-10 pumphead, 77410-00 drive unit, and 06429-73 Tygon LFL tubing; Dayton, model number 3YU61 (available through Grainger), Jabsco Flexible Impeller Pump (Cole- Parmer cat. No. EW-75202-00); Simer, model number M40; or equivalent. It is recommended that the pump be placed on the effluent side of the filter, when possible, to reduce the risk of contamination and the amount of tubing replaced or cleaned.

  • Flow meter—SaMeCo cold water totalizer, E. Clark and Associates, Northboro, MA,

product no. WFU 10.110; Omega flow meter, Stamford, CT, model FTB4105; or equivalent. Alternatively, use a graduated carboy(s) (See Section 6.18)

  • Equipment for spiking samples in the laboratory
    • Collapsible 10-L LDPE cubitainer with cubitainer spigot—Cole Parmer cat. no. U-

06100-30 or equivalent and Cole Parmer cat. no. U-06061-01, or equivalent. Discard after one use to eliminate possible contamination. Alternatively, use clean, 10-L carboy

5                                                      December 2005

 

with bottom delivery port (Ω”), Cole-Palmer cat. no. 06080-42, or equivalent; calibrate to 10.0 L and mark level with waterproof marker

  • Stir bar—Fisher cat. no. 14-513-66, or equivalent
  • Stir plate—Fisher cat. no. 11-510-49S, S50461HP, or equivalent
  • Hemacytometer—Neubauer type, Hausser Scientific, Horsham, PA, product no. 3200 or 1475, or equivalent
  • Hemacytometer coverslip—Hausser Scientific, product no. 5000 (for hemacytometer
  1. 3200) or 1461 (for hemacytometer cat. no 1475), or equivalent
  • Lens paper without silicone—Fisher cat. no. 11-995, or equivalent
  • Polystyrene or polypropylene conical tubes with screw caps—15- and 50-mL
  • Equipment required for enumeration of spiking suspensions using membrane filters
    • Glass microanalysis filter holder—25-mm-diameter, with fritted glass

support, Fisher cat. no. 09-753E, or equivalent. Replace stopper with size 8, one-hole rubber stopper, Fisher Cat. No. 14-135M, or equivalent.

  • Three-port vacuum filtration manifold and vacuum source—Fisher Cat. No. 09-753-39A, or equivalent
  • Cellulose acetate support membrane—1.2-µm-pore-size, 25-mm-

diameter, Fisher cat. no. A12SP02500, or equivalent

  • Polycarbonate track-etch hydrophilic membrane filter—1-µm-pore-size, 25-mm-diameter, Fisher cat. no. K10CP02500, or equivalent
  • 100 ◊ 15 mm polystyrene petri dishes (bottoms only)
  • 60 ◊ 15 mm polystyrene petri dishes
  • Glass microscope slides—1 in. ◊ 3 in or 2 in. ◊ 3
  • Coverslips—25 mm2
  • Immunomagnetic separation (IMS) apparatus
    • Sample mixer—Dynal Inc., Lake Success, NY, cat. 947.01, or equivalent
    • Magnetic particle concentrator for 10-mL test tubes—Dynal MPC®-1 , cat. no. 120.01 or MPC®-6, cat. No 120.02, or equivalent
    • Magnetic particle concentrator for microcentrifuge tubes—Dynal MPC®-M, cat.

120.09 (no longer available); Dynal MPC®-S, cat. no. 120.20, or equivalent

  • Flat-sided sample tubes—16 ◊ 125 mm Leighton-type tubes with 60 ◊ 10 mm flat-sided magnetic capture area, Dynal L10, cat. no. 740.03, or equivalent
  • Powder-free latex gloves—Fisher cat no. 113945B, or equivalent
  • Graduated cylinders, autoclavable—10-, 100-, and 1000-mL
  • Centrifuges
    • Centrifuge capable of accepting 15- to 250-mL conical centrifuge tubes and achieving

1500 ◊ G—International Equipment Company, Needham Heights, MA, Centrifuge Size 2, Model K with swinging bucket, or equivalent

  • Centrifuge tubes—Conical, graduated, 1.5-, 50-, and 250-mL
  • Microscope
    • Epifluorescence/differential interference contrast (DIC) with stage and ocular

micrometers and 20X (N.A.=0.4) to 100X (N.A.=1.3) objectives—Zeiss™ Axioskop, Olympus™ BH, or equivalent. Hoffman Modulation Contrast optics may be equivalent.

December 2005                                         6

 

  • Excitation/band-pass filters for immunofluorescence assay (FA)—Zeiss™ 487909 or

equivalent, including, 450- to 490-nm exciter filter, 510-nm dicroic beam-splitting mirror, and 515- to 520-nm barrier or suppression filter

 

Microscope model

 

Fluoro-chrome

 

Excitation filter (nm)

Dichroic beam- splitting

mirror (nm)

Barrier or suppression filter (nm) Chroma catalog number
Zeiss™ – Axioskop  

DAPI (UV)

 

340-380

 

400

 

420

 

CZ902

Zeiss™ -IM35 DAPI (UV) 340-380 400 420 CZ702
 

Olympus™ BH

DAPI (UV) 340-380 400 420 11000
Filter holder 91002
 

Olympus™ BX

DAPI (UV) 340-380 400 420 11000
Filter holder 91008
 

Olympus™ IMT2

DAPI (UV) 340-380 400 420 11000
Filter holder 91003

 

  • Excitation/band-pass filters for DAPI—Filters cited below (Chroma Technology, Brattleboro, VT), or equivalent
  • Ancillary equipment for microscopy
6.10.1 Well slides— Spot-On well slides, Dynal cat. no. 740.04; treated, 12-mm diameter well
slides, Meridian Diagnostics Inc., Cincinnati, OH, cat. no. R2206; or equivalent
6.10.2 Glass coverslips—22 ◊ 50 mm
6.10.3 Nonfluorescing immersion oil—Type FF, Cargille cat. no. 16212, or equivalent
6.10.4 Micropipette, adjustable:        0- to 10-µL with 0- to 10-µL tips
10- to 100-µL, with 10- to 200-µL tips

100- to 1000-µL with 100- to 1000-µL tips

6.10.5 Forceps—Splinter, fine tip
6.10.6 Forceps—Blunt-end
6.10.7 Desiccant—Drierite™ Absorbent, Fisher cat. no. 07-577-1A, or equivalent
6.10.8 Humid chamber—A tightly sealed plastic container containing damp paper towels on top
of which the slides are placed
6.11 Pipettes—Glass or plastic
6.11.1 5-, 10-, and 25-mL
6.11.2 Pasteur, disposable
6.12 Balances
6.12.1 Analytical—Capable of weighing 0.1 mg
6.12.2 Top loading—Capable of weighing 10 mg
  • pH meter
  • Incubator—Fisher Scientific Isotemp™, or equivalent
  • Vortex mixer—Fisons Whirlmixer, or equivalent
  • Vacuum source—Capable of maintaining 25 in. Hg, equipped with shutoff valve and vacuum gauge
  • Miscellaneous labware and supplies
    • Test tubes and rack
  • December 2005

 

  • Flasks—Suction, Erlenmeyer, and volumetric, various sizes

6.17.3   Beakers—Glass or plastic, 5-, 10-, 50-, 100-, 500-, 1000-, and 2000-mL

6.17.4   Lint-free tissues

  • 10- to 15-L graduated container—Fisher cat. no. 02-961-50B, or equivalent; calibrate to 9.0, 9.5, 10.0, 10.5, and 11.0 L and mark levels with waterproof marker

6.19     Filters for filter-sterilizing reagents—Sterile Acrodisc, 0.45 µm, Pall Corporation, cat. no. 4184, or equivalent

7.0                   Reagents and Standards

  • Reagents for adjusting pH
    • Sodium hydroxide (NaOH)—ACS reagent grade, 6.0 N and 1.0 N in reagent water
  • Hydrochloric acid (HCl)—ACS reagent grade, 6.0 N, 0 N, and 0.1 N in reagent water

NOTE:  Due to the low volumes of pH-adjusting reagents used in this method, and the

impact that changes in pH have on the immunofluorescence assay, the laboratory must purchase standards at the required normality directly from a vendor. Normality must not be adjusted by the laboratory.

  • Solvents—Acetone, glycerol, ethanol, and methanol, ACS reagent grade
  • Reagent water—Water in which oocysts and cysts and interfering materials and substances, including magnetic minerals, are not detected by this method. See Reference 20.8 (Section 9020) for reagent water
  • Reagents for eluting filters

NOTE: Laboratories should store prepared eluting solution for no more than 1 week or when noticeably turbid, whichever comes sooner.

  • Reagents for eluting Envirochek™ and Envirochek™ HV sampling capsules (Section 6.2.2)
    • Laureth-12—PPG Industries, Gurnee, IL, no. 06194, or equivalent.

Store Laureth-12 as a 10% solution in reagent water. Weigh 10 g of Laureth-12 and dissolve using a microwave or hot plate in 90 mL of reagent water. Dispense 10-mL aliquots into sterile vials and store at room temperature for up to 2 months, or in the freezer for up to a year.

  • 1 M Tris, pH 7.4—Dissolve 121.1 g Tris (Fisher cat. no. BP152) in 700

mL of reagent water and adjust pH to 7.4 with 1 N HCl or NaOH. Dilute to a final 1000 mL with reagent water and adjust the final pH. Filter- sterilize through a 0.2-µm membrane into a sterile plastic container and store at room temperature. Alternatively, use prepared TRIS, Sigma T6066 or equivalent.

  • 5 M EDTA, 2 Na, pH 8.0—Dissolve 186.1 g ethylenediamine

tetraacetic acid, disodium salt dihydrate (Fisher cat. no. S311) in 800 mL of reagent water and adjust pH to 8.0 with 6.0 N HCl or NaOH. Dilute to a final volume of 1000 mL with reagent water and adjust to pH 8.0 with

1.0 N HCl or NaOH. Alternatively, use prepared EDTA, Sigma E5134 or equivalent.

  • Antifoam A—Sigma Chemical Co. cat. no. A5758, or equivalent
  • Preparation of elution buffer solution—Add the contents of a pre- prepared Laureth-12 vial (Section 7.4.1.1) to a 1000-mL graduated

December 2005                                         8

 

cylinder. Rinse the vial several times to ensure the transfer of the detergent to the cylinder. Add 10 mL of Tris solution (Section 7.4.1.2), 2 mL of EDTA solution (Section 7.4.1.3), and 150 µL Antifoam A (Section 7.4.1.4). Dilute to 1000 mL with reagent water.

  • Reagents for eluting Filta-Max® foam filters (Section 2.3)
    • Phosphate buffered saline (PBS), pH 7.4—Sigma Chemical Co. cat.

P-3813, or equivalent. Alternately, prepare PBS by adding the following to 1 L of reagent water: 8 g NaCl; 0.2 g KCl; 1.15 g Na2HPO4, anhydrous; and 0.2 g KH2PO4.

  • Tween® 20 —Sigma Chemical cat. no. P-7949, or equivalent
  • High-vacuum grease—BDH/Merck. cat. no. 636082B, or equivalent
  • Preparation of PBST elution buffer. Add 100 µL of Tween® 20 to

prepared PBS (Section 7.4.2.1). Alternatively, add the contents of one packet of PBS to 1.0 L of reagent water. Dissolve by stirring for 30 minutes. Add 100 µL of Tween® 20 . Mix by stirring for 5 minutes.

  • Reagents for Portable Continuous-Flow Centrifuge (Section 2.4)
    • Sodium dodecyl sulfate—Sigma Chemical Co. cat. no. 71730 or equivalent
    • TWEEN 80— Sigma Chemical cat. no. P1754 or equivalent
    • Antifoam A—Sigma Chemical Co. cat. no. A5758, or equivalent
    • Preparation of concentrated elution buffer. Add above reagents to obtain

a final concentration of 1% sodium dodecyl sulfate, 0.01% TWEEN 80, and 0.001% Antifoam A in concentrated sample volume of ~250mL

  • Reagents for immunomagnetic separation (IMS)—Dynabeads® GC-Combo, Dynal cat. nos. 730.02/730.12, or equivalent
  • Direct antibody labeling reagents for detection of oocysts and cysts. Store reagents between 1°C and 10°C and return promptly to this temperature after each use. Do not allow any of the reagents to freeze. The reagents should be protected from exposure to light. Diluted, unused working reagents should be discarded after 48 hours. Discard reagents after the expiration date is reached. The labeling reagents in Sections 7.6.1-7.6.3 have been approved for use with this
    • MeriFluor® Cryptosporidium/Giardia, Meridian Diagnostics cat. no. 250050, Cincinnati, OH, or equivalent
    • Aqua-Glo™ G/C Direct FL, Waterborne cat. no. A100FLR, New Orleans, LA, or

equivalent

  • Crypt-a-Glo™ and Giardi-a-Glo™, Waterborne cat. nos. A400FLR and A300FLR, respectively, New Orleans, LA, or equivalent
  • EasyStain™C&G, BTF Pty Limited, Sydney, Australia or equivalent

NOTE:  If a laboratory will use multiple types of labeling reagents, the laboratory  must

demonstrate acceptable performance through an initial precision and recovery test (Section 9.4) for each type, and must perform positive and negative staining controls for each batch of slides stained using each product. However, the laboratory is not required to analyze additional ongoing precision and recovery samples or method blank samples for each type. The performance of each labeling reagent used also should be monitored in each source water type.

  • Diluent for labeling reagents—Phosphate buffered saline (PBS) (Section 4.2).

9                                                      December 2005

 

  • 4′,6-diamidino-2-phenylindole (DAPI) stain—Sigma Chemical Co. cat. no. D9542, or equivalent
    • Stock solution—Dissolve 2 mg/mL DAPI in absolute methanol. Prepare volume

consistent with minimum use. Store between 1°C and 10°C in the dark. Do not allow to freeze. Discard unused solution when positive staining control fails or after specified time determined by laboratory.

  • Staining solution—Follow antibody kit manufacturer’s instructions. Add 10 µL of 2

mg/mL DAPI stock solution to 50 mL of PBS for use with Aqua-Glo™ G/C Direct FL or MeriFluor® Cryptosporidium/Giardia. Add 50 µL of 2 mg/mL DAPI stock solution to 50 mL of PBS for use with EasyStain™. Prepare working solution daily and store between 1°C and 10°C (do not allow to freeze). DAPI is light sensitive; therefore, store  in the dark except when staining. The DAPI concentration may be increased if fading/diffusion of DAPI staining is encountered, but the staining solution must be tested first on expendable environmental samples to confirm that staining intensity is appropriate.

  • Mounting medium
    • DABCO/glycerol mounting medium (2%)—Dissolve 2 g of DABCO (Sigma Chemical

Co. cat no. D-2522, or equivalent) in 95 mL of warm glycerol/PBS (60% glycerol, 40% PBS). After the DABCO has dissolved completely, adjust the solution volume to 100 mL by adding an appropriate volume of glycerol/PBS solution. Alternately, dissolve the DABCO in 40 mL of PBS, then add azide (1 mL of 100X, or 10% solution), then 60 mL of glycerol.

  • Mounting medium supplied with MeriFluor® Cryptosporidium/Giardia, Meridian Diagnostics cat. 250050, or equivalent (Section 7.6.1)
  • Mounting medium supplied with Aqua-Glo™ G/C Direct FL kit, Waterborne cat.

A100FLR, cat. no. M101, or equivalent (Section 7.6.2)

  • Mounting medium supplied with EasyStain™C&G, BTF Pty Limited or equivalent (Section 6.4)
  • Elvanol or equivalent permanent, non-fade archiving mounting medium
  • Clear fingernail polish or clear fixative, PGC Scientifics, Gaithersburg, MD, cat. no. 60-4890-00, or equivalent
  • Oocyst and cyst suspensions for spiking
    • Enumerated spiking suspensions prepared by flow cytometer—not formalin
      • Live, flow cytometer–sorted oocysts and cysts—Wisconsin State

Laboratory of Hygiene Flow Cytometry Unit ([608] 224-6260), or equivalent

  • Irradiated, flow cytometer–sorted oocysts and cysts—flow

cytometer–sorted oocysts and cysts—BTF EasySeed™ (contact@btfbio.com), or equivalent

  • Materials for manual enumeration of spiking suspensions
    • Purified Cryptosporidium oocyst stock suspension for manual

enumeration—not formalin-fixed: Sterling Parasitology Laboratory, University of Arizona, Tucson, or equivalent

  • Purified Giardia cyst stock suspension for manual enumeration—not

formalin-fixed: Waterborne, Inc., New Orleans, LA; Hyperion Research, Medicine Hat, Alberta, Canada; or equivalent

December 2005                                        10

 

  • Tween® 20 , 0.01%—Dissolve 1.0 mL of a 10% solution of Tween® 20 in 1 L of reagent water
  • Storage procedure—Store oocyst and cyst suspensions between 1°C and 10°C, until

ready to use; do not allow to freeze

  • Additional reagents for enumeration of spiking suspensions using membrane filtration (Section 11.3.6)—Sigmacote® Sigma Company Product No. SL-2, or equivalent

8.0                   Sample Collection and Storage

  • Sample collection, shipment, and receipt
    • Sample collection. Samples are collected as bulk samples and shipped to the laboratory

on ice for processing through the entire method, or are filtered in the field and shipped to the laboratory on ice for processing from elution (Section 12.2.6) onward.

  • Sample shipment. Ambient water samples are dynamic environments and, depending on sample constituents and environmental conditions, Cryptosporidium oocysts or Giardia

cysts present in a sample can degrade, potentially biasing analytical results. Samples

should be chilled to reduce biological activity, and preserve the state of source water samples between collection and analysis. Samples analyzed by an off-site laboratory should be shipped on ice via overnight service on the day they are collected.

NOTE:  See transportation precautions in Section 5.5.

  • If samples are collected early in the day, chill samples by storing in a

refrigerator between 1°C and 10°C or pre-icing the sample in a cooler. If the sample is pre-iced before shipping, replace with fresh ice immediately before shipment.

  • If samples are collected later in the day, these samples may be chilled

overnight in a refrigerator between 1°C and 10°C. This should be considered for bulk water samples that will be shipped off-site, as this minimizes the potential for water samples collected during the summer to melt the ice in which they are packed and arrive at the laboratory at

>20°C.

  • If samples are shipped after collection at >20°C with no chilling, the sample will not maintain the temperature during shipment at #20°C.
  • Public water systems shipping samples to off-site laboratories for analysis

should include in the shipping container a means for monitoring the temperature of the sample during shipping to verify that the sample did not freeze or exceed 20°C. Suggested approaches for monitoring sample temperature during shipping are discussed in Section 8.1.4.

  • Sample receipt. Upon receipt, the laboratory must record the sample temperature. Samples that were not collected the same day they were received, and that are received at

>20°C or frozen, or samples that the laboratory has determined exceeded >20°C or froze

during shipment, must be rejected. After receipt, samples must be stored at the laboratory between 1°C and 10°C, and not frozen, until processed.

  • Suggestions on measuring sample temperature. Given the importance of maintaining

sample temperatures for Cryptosporidium and Giardia determination, laboratories performing analyses using this method must establish acceptance criteria for receipt of samples transported to their laboratory. Several options are available to measure sample temperature upon receipt at the laboratory and, in some cases, during shipment:

  • Temperature sample. One option, for filtered samples only (not for 10-L bulk samples), is for the sampler to fill a small, inexpensive sample bottle

11                                                      December 2005

 

with water and pack this “temperature sample” next to the filtered sample. The temperature of this extra sample volume is measured upon receipt to estimate the temperature of the filter. Temperature sample bottles are not appropriate for use with bulk samples because of the potential effect that the difference in sample volume may have in temperature equilibration in the sample cooler. Example product: Cole Parmer cat. no. U-06252-20.

  • Thermometer vial. A similar option is to use a thermometer that is

securely housed in a liquid-filled vial. Unlike temperature samples, the laboratory does not need to perform an additional step to monitor the temperature of the vial upon receipt, but instead just needs to read the thermometer. The thermometer vial is appropriate for use with filtered samples not bulk samples. Example product: Eagle-Picher Sentry Temperature Vial 3TR-40CS-F or 3TR-40CS.

  • Measures the sample temperature during shipment and upon

receipt.  An iButton is a small, waterproof device that contains a computer chip that can be programmed to record temperature at different time intervals.  The information is then downloaded from the iButton  onto a computer. The iButton should be placed in a temperature sample, rather than placed loose in the cooler, or attached to the sample container. This option is appropriate for use with both filtered and bulk samples.

Information on Thermocron® iButtons is available from

http://www.ibutton.com/. Distributors include http://www.pointsix.com/, http://www.rdsdistributing.com, and http://www.scigiene.com/.

  • Stick-on temperature strips. Another option is for the laboratory to

apply a stick-on temperature strip to the outside of the sample container upon receipt at the laboratory. This option does not measure temperature as precisely as the other options, but provides an indication of sample temperature to verify that the sample temperature is acceptable. This option is appropriate for use with both filtered and bulk samples. Example product: Cole Parmer cat. no. U-90316-00.

  • Infrared thermometers. A final option is to measure the temperature of

the surface of the sample container or filter using an infrared  thermometer. The thermometer is pointed at the sample, and measures the temperature without coming in contact with the sample volume. This option is appropriate for use with both filtered and bulk samples. Example product: Cole Parmer cat. no. EW-39641-00.

As with other laboratory equipment, all temperature measurement devices must be calibrated routinely to ensure accurate measurements. See the EPA Manual for the Certification of Laboratories Analyzing Drinking Water (Reference 20.9) for more information.

  • Sample holding times. Samples must be processed or examined within each of the holding times specified in Sections 8.2.1 through 8.2.4. Sample processing should be completed as soon as possible by the laboratory. The laboratory should complete sample filtration, elution, concentration, purification, and staining the day the sample is received wherever possible. However, the laboratory is permitted to split up the sample processing steps if processing a sample completely in one day is not possible. If this is necessary, sample processing can be halted after filtration, application of the purified sample onto the slide, or staining. Table 1, in Section

21.0 provides a breakdown of the holding times for each set of steps. Sections 8.2.1 through 8.2.4 provide descriptions of these holding times.

December 2005                                        12

 

  • Sample collection and filtration. Sample elution must be initiated within 96 hours of

sample collection (if shipped to the laboratory as a bulk sample) or filtration (if filtered in the field).

  • Sample elution, concentration, and purification. The laboratory must complete

elution, concentration, and purification (Sections 12.2.6 through 13.3.3.11) in one work day. It is critical that these steps be completed in one work day to minimize the time that any target organisms present in the sample sit in eluate or concentrated matrix. This process ends with the application of the purified sample on the slide for drying.

  • The sample must be stained within 72 hours of application of the purified sample to the slide.
  • Although immunofluorescence assay (FA) and 4′,6-diamidino-2-

phenylindole (DAPI) and differential interference contrast (DIC) microscopy examination and characterization should be performed immediately after staining is complete, laboratories have up to 168 hours (7 days) from the completion of sample staining to perform the examination and verification of samples. However, if fading/diffusion of FITC or DAPI staining is noticed, the laboratory must reduce this holding time. In addition the laboratory may adjust the concentration of the DAPI staining solution (Sections 7.7.2) so that fading/diffusion does not occur.

  • Spiking suspension enumeration holding times. Flow-cytometer-sorted spiking suspensions (Sections 7.10.1 and 11.2) used for spiked quality control (QC) samples (Section 9) must be used within the expiration date noted on the suspension. Manually enumerated spiking suspensions must be used within 24 hours of enumeration of the spiking suspension if the hemacytometer chamber technique is used (Section 11.3.4); or within 24 hours of application of the spiking suspension to the slides if the well slide or membrane filter enumeration technique is used (Sections 11.3.5 and 11.3.6). Oocyst and cyst suspensions must be stored between 1°C and 10°C, until ready to use; do not allow to

9.0                   Quality Control

  • Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality assurance (QA) program that addresses and documents data quality, instrument and equipment maintenance and performance, reagent quality and performance, analyst training and certification, and records storage and retrieval. General requirements and recommendations for QA and quality control (QC) procedures for microbiology laboratories are provided in References 20.8, 20.9, 20.10. The minimum analytical requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability (IDC) through performance of the initial precision and recovery (IPR) test (Section 9.4), and ongoing demonstration of laboratory capability and method performance through the matrix spike (MS) test (Section 9.5.1), the method blank test (Section 9.6), the ongoing precision and recovery (OPR) test (Section 9.7), staining controls (Section 14.1 and 15.2.1), and analyst verification tests (Section 10.6). Laboratory performance is compared to established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics of the
    • A test of the microscope used for detection of oocysts and cysts is performed prior to examination of slides. This test is described in Section 0.
    • In recognition of advances that are occurring in analytical technology, the laboratory is

permitted to modify certain method procedures to improve recovery or lower the costs of measurements, provided that all required quality control (QC) tests are performed and all QC acceptance criteria are met. Method procedures that can be modified include front- end techniques, such as filtration or immunomagnetic separation (IMS). The laboratory  is not permitted to use an alternate determinative technique to replace immunofluorescence assay in this method (the use of different determinative techniques are considered to be different methods, rather than modified version of this method).

13                                                      December 2005

 

However, the laboratory is permitted to modify the immunofluorescence assay procedure, provided that all required QC tests are performed (Section 9.1.2.1) and all QC acceptance criteria are met (see guidance on the use of multiple labeling reagents in Section 7.6).

NOTE:  Method modifications should be considered only to improve method

performance, reduce cost, or reduce sample processing time. Method modifications that reduce cost or sample processing time, but that result in poorer method performance should not be used.

  • Method modification validation/equivalency demonstration requirements

9.1.2.1.1       Method modifications at a single laboratory. Each

time a modification is made to this method for use in a single laboratory, the laboratory must, at a minimum, validate the modification according to Tier 1 of EPA’s performance-based measurement system (PBMS) (Table

2) to demonstrate that the modification produces results equivalent or superior to results produced by this method as written. Briefly, each time a modification is made to this method, the laboratory is required to demonstrate acceptable modified method performance through the IPR test (Section 9.4). IPR results must meet the QC acceptance criteria in Tables 3 and 4 in Section 21.0, and should be comparable to previous results using the unmodified procedure. Although not required, the laboratory also should perform a matrix spike/matrix spike duplicate (MS/MSD) test to demonstrate the performance of the modified method in at least one real- world matrix before analyzing field samples using the modified method. The laboratory is required to perform MS samples using the modified method at the frequency noted in Section 9.1.8. If the modified method involves changes that cannot be adequately evaluated through these tests, additional tests may be required to demonstrate acceptability.

9.1.2.1.2       Method modifications for nationwide approval. If the

laboratory or a manufacturer seeks EPA approval of a method modification for nationwide use, the laboratory or manufacturer must, at a minimum, validate the modification according to Tier 2 of EPA’s PBMS (Table 2). Briefly, at least three laboratories must perform IPR tests (Section 9.4) and MS/MSD (Section 9.5) tests using the modified method, and all tests must meet the QC acceptance criteria specified in Tables 3 and 4 in Section

21.0. Upon nationwide approval, laboratories electing to use the modified method still must demonstrate acceptable performance in their own laboratory according to the requirements in Section 9.1.2.1.1. If the modified method involves changes that cannot be adequately evaluated through these tests, additional tests may be required to demonstrate acceptability.

  • The laboratory is required to maintain records of modifications made to this method. These records include the following, at a minimum:

December 2005                                        14

 

  • The names, titles, addresses, and telephone numbers of

the analyst(s) who performed the analyses and modification, and of the quality control officer who witnessed and will verify the analyses and modification.

  • A listing of the analyte(s) measured (Cryptosporidium and Giardia).
  • A narrative stating reason(s) for the
  • Results from all QC tests comparing the modified method to this method, including:
    • IPR (Section 4)
    • MS/MSD (Section 5)
    • Analysis of method blanks (Section 6)
  • Data that will allow an independent reviewer to validate

each determination by tracing the following processing and analysis steps leading to the final result:

  • Sample numbers and other identifiers
  • Source of spiking suspensions, as well as lot number and date received (Section 10)
  • Spike enumeration date and time
  • All spiking suspension enumeration counts and calculations (Section 0)
  • Sample spiking dates and times
  • Volume filtered (Section 2.5.2)
  • Filtration and elution dates and times
  • Pellet volume, resuspended concentrate volume, resuspended concentrate volume transferred to IMS, and all calculations required to verify the percent of concentrate examined (Section 2)
  • Purification completion dates and times (Section 13.3.3.11)
  • Staining completion dates and times (Section 14.10)
  • Staining control results (Section 2.1)
  • All required examination information (Section 15.2.2)
  • Examination completion dates and times (Section 15.2.4)
  • Analysis sequence/run chronology
  • Lot numbers of elution, IMS, and staining reagents
  • Copies of bench sheets, logbooks, and other recordings of raw data
  • Data system outputs, and other data to link the raw data to the results reported
  • The laboratory shall spike a separate sample aliquot from the same source to monitor

method performance. The frequency of the MS test is described in Section 9.1.8 and the procedures are described in Section 9.5.1.

  • Analysis of method blanks is required to demonstrate freedom from contamination. The

frequency of the analysis of method blanks is described in Section 9.1.7 and the procedures and criteria for analysis of a method blank are described in Section 9.6.

15                                                      December 2005

 

  • The laboratory shall, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through analysis of the ongoing

precision and recovery (OPR) sample that the analysis system is in control. Frequency of OPR samples is described in Section 9.1.7 and the procedures are described in Section 9.7.

  • The laboratory shall maintain records to define the quality of data that are Development of accuracy statements is described in Sections 9.5.1.4 and 9.7.6.
  • The laboratory shall analyze one method blank (Section 9.6) and one OPR sample

(Section 9.7) each week (7 day or 168 hours time period which begins with processing the OPR) in which samples are analyzed if 20 or fewer field samples are analyzed during this period. The laboratory shall analyze one laboratory blank and one OPR sample for every 20 samples if more than 20 samples are analyzed in a one week (7 day or 168 hours) period.

  • The laboratory shall analyze MS samples (Section 9.5.1) at a minimum frequency of 1

MS sample per 20 field samples from each source analyzed. The laboratory should analyze an MS sample when samples are first received from a PWS for which the laboratory has never before analyzed samples to identify potential method performance issues with the matrix (Section 9.5.1; Tables 3 and 4). If an MS sample cannot be analyzed on the first sampling event, the first MS sample should be analyzed as soon as possible to identify potential method performance issues with the matrix.

  • Micropipette calibration
    • Micropipettes must be sent to the manufacturer for calibration annually. Alternately, a

qualified independent technician specializing in micropipette calibration can be used, or the calibration can be performed by the laboratory, provided the laboratory maintains a detailed procedure that can be evaluated by an independent auditor. Documentation on the precision of the recalibrated micropipette must be obtained from the manufacturer or technician.

  • Internal and external calibration records must be kept on file in the laboratory’s QA logbook.
  • If a micropipette calibration problem is suspected, the laboratory shall tare an empty

weighing boat on the analytical balance and pipette the following volumes of reagent water into the weigh boat using the pipette in question: 100% of the maximum dispensing capacity of the micropipette, 50% of the capacity, and 10% of the capacity. Ten replicates should be performed at each weight. Record the weight of the water (assume that 1.00 mL of reagent water weighs 1.00 g) and calculate the relative standard deviation (RSD) for each. If the weight of the reagent water is within 1% of the desired weight (mL) and the RSD of the replicates at each weight is within 1%, then the pipette remains acceptable for use.

  • If the weight of the reagent water is outside the acceptable limits, consult the

manufacturer’s instruction manual troubleshooting section and repeat steps described in Section 9.2.3. If problems with the pipette persist, the laboratory must send the pipette to the manufacturer for recalibration.

  • Microscope adjustment and calibration —Adjust the microscope as specified in Section 10.0. All of the requirements in Section 10.0 must be met prior to analysis of IPRs, method blanks, OPRs, field samples, and MS/MSDs.
  • Initial precision and recovery (IPR)—To establish the ability to demonstrate control over the analytical system and to generate acceptable precision and recovery, the laboratory shall perform the following operations:
    • Using the spiking procedure in Section 11.4 and enumerated spiking suspensions (Section 7.10.1 or Section 11.3), spike, filter, elute, concentrate, separate (purify), stain,

December 2005                                        16

 

and examine the four reagent water samples spiked with ~100-500 oocysts and ~100-500 cysts.

  • The laboratory is permitted to analyze the four spiked reagent samples on

the same day or on as many as four different days (provided that the spiked reagent samples are analyzed consecutively), and also may use different analysts and/or reagent lots for each sample (however, the procedures used for all analyses must be identical). Laboratories should note that the variability of four measurements performed on multiple days or using multiple analysts or reagent lots may be greater than the variability of measurements performed on the same day with the same analysts and reagent lots. As a result, the laboratory is at a greater risk of generating unacceptable IPR results if the test is performed across multiple days, analysts, and /or reagent lots.

  • If more than one modification will be used for filtration and/or separation

of samples, a separate set of IPR samples must be prepared for each modification.

  • The set of four IPR samples must be accompanied by analysis of an acceptable method blank (Section 6).
  • For each organism, calculate the percent recovery (R) using the following equation:

     N   

R =    100 x

T

where:

R = the percent recovery

N = the number of oocysts or cysts counted T = the number of oocysts or cysts spiked

This calculation assumes that the total volume spiked was processed and examined.

  • Using percent recovery (R) of the four analyses, calculate the mean percent recovery and the relative standard deviation (RSD) of the recoveries for Cryptosporidium and for

Giardia. The RSD is the standard deviation divided by the mean, times 100.

  • Compare the mean and RSD to the corresponding method performance acceptance

criteria for initial precision and recovery in Tables 3 and 4 in Section 21.0. If the mean and RSD for recovery meet the acceptance criteria, system performance is acceptable  and analysis of blanks and samples may begin. If the mean or RSD falls outside the range for recovery, system performance is unacceptable. In this event, trouble-shoot the problem by starting at the end of the method (see guidance in Section 9.7.5), correct the problem and repeat the IPR test (Section 9.4.1).

  • Examine and document the IPR slides following the procedure in Section 15.0. The first

three Cryptosporidium oocysts and first three Giardia cysts identified in each IPR sample must be characterized (size, shape, DAPI category, and DIC category) and documented on the examination form, as well as any additional comments on organisms appearance, if notable.

  • Using 200X to 400X magnification, more than 50% of the oocysts or cysts must appear

undamaged and morphologically intact; otherwise, the organisms in the spiking suspension may be of unacceptable quality or the analytical process may be damaging the organisms. If the quality of the organisms on the IPR test slides is unacceptable, examine the spiking suspension organisms directly (by centrifuging, if possible, to concentrate the organisms in a volume that can be applied directly to a slide). If the

17                                                      December 2005

 

unprocessed organisms appear undamaged and morphologically intact under DIC, determine the step or reagent that is causing damage to the organisms. Correct the problem (see Section 9.7.5) and repeat the IPR test.

  • Matrix spike (MS) and matrix spike duplicate (MSD)
    • Matrix spike— The laboratory shall spike and analyze a separate field sample aliquot to

determine the effect of the matrix on the method’s oocyst and cyst recovery. The MS and field sample must be that was collected from the same sampling location as split samples or as samples sequentially collected immediately after one another. The MS sample volume analyzed must be within 10% of the field sample volume. The MS shall be analyzed according to the frequency in Section 9.1.8.

  • Analyze an unspiked field sample according to the procedures in Sections

12.0 to 15.0. Using the spiking procedure in Section 11.4 and enumerated spiking suspensions (Section 7.10.1 or Section 11.3), spike, filter, elute, concentrate, separate (purify), stain, and examine a second field sample aliquot with a similar number of organisms as that used in the IPR or OPR tests (Sections 9.4 and 9.7).

  • For each organism, calculate the percent recovery (R) using the following equation.

R =     100 x

Nsp – Ns T

where

R is the percent recovery

Nsp is the number of oocysts or cysts counted in the spiked sample Ns is the number of oocysts or cysts counted in the unspiked sample

T is the true value of the oocysts or cysts spiked

  • Compare the recovery for each organism with the acceptance criteria in Tables 3 and 4 in Section 0.

NOTE:  Some sample matrices may prevent the acceptance criteria in Tables 3 and 4

from being met. An assessment of the distribution of MS recoveries across 430 MS samples from 87 sites during the ICR Supplemental Surveys is provided in Table 5.

  • As part of the QA program for the laboratory, method precision for

samples should be assessed and records maintained. After the analysis of five samples, the laboratory should calculate the mean percent recovery

(P) and the standard deviation of the percent recovery (sr). Express the precision assessment as a percent recovery interval from P ! 2 sr to P + 2 sr for each matrix. For example, if P = 80% and sr = 30%, the accuracy interval is expressed as 20% to 140%. The precision assessment should be updated regularly across all MS samples and stratified by MS samples for each source.

  • Matrix spike duplicate—MSD analysis is required as part of Tier 2 or nationwide

approval of a modified version of this method to demonstrate that the modified version of this method produces results equal or superior to results produced by the method as written (Section 9.1.2.1.2). At the same time the laboratory spikes and analyzes the second field sample aliquot in Section 9.5.1.1, the laboratory shall spike and analyze a third, identical field sample aliquot.

December 2005                                        18

 

NOTE: Matrix spike duplicate samples are only required for Tier 2 validation studies. They are recommended for Tier 1 validation, but not required.

  • For each organism, calculate the percent recovery (R) using the equation in Section 5.1.2.
  • Calculate the mean of the number of oocysts or cysts in the MS and MSD

(Xmean) (= [MS+MSD]/2).

  • Calculate the relative percent difference (RPD) of the recoveries using the following equation:

RPD =      100 x

| NMS – NMSD | XMEAN

where

RPD is the relative percent difference

NMS is the number of oocysts or cysts counted in the MS NMSD is the number of oocysts or cysts counted in the MSD

Xmean is the mean number of oocysts or cysts counted in the MS and MSD

  • Compare the mean MS/MSD recovery and RPD with the acceptance criteria in Tables 3 and 4 in Section 21.0 for each
  • Method blank (negative control sample, laboratory blank)—Reagent water blanks are routinely

analyzed to demonstrate freedom from contamination. Analyze the blank immediately after analysis of the IPR test (Section 9.4) and OPR test (Section 9.7) and prior to analysis of samples for the week to demonstrate freedom from contamination.

  • Filter, elute, concentrate, separate (purify), stain, and examine at least one reagent water method blank per week (Section 9.1.7) according to the procedures in Sections 12.0 to

15.0. A method blank must be analyzed each week (7 day or 168 hours time period that

begins with processing the OPR) in which samples are analyzed if 20 or fewer field samples are analyzed during this period. If more than 20 samples are analyzed in a week (7 days or 168 hours), process and analyze one reagent water method blank for every 20 samples.

  • Actions
    • If Cryptosporidium oocysts, Giardia cysts, or potentially interfering

organisms or materials that may be misidentified as oocysts or cysts are not found in the method blank, the method blank test is acceptable and analysis of samples may proceed.

  • If Cryptosporidium oocysts, Giardia cysts (as defined in Section 3), or

any potentially interfering organism or materials that may be misidentified as oocysts or cysts are found in the method blank, the method blank test is unacceptable. Any field sample in a batch associated with an unacceptable method blank is assumed to be contaminated and should be recollected. Analysis of additional samples is halted until the source of contamination is eliminated, the method blank test is performed again, and no evidence of contamination is detected.

  • Ongoing precision and recovery (OPR; positive control sample; laboratory control sample)—Using the spiking procedure in Section 11.4 and enumerated spiking suspensions (Section 7.10.1 or Section 11.3), filter, elute, concentrate, separate (purify), stain, and examine at least one reagent water sample spiked with ~100 to 500 oocysts and ~100 to 500 cysts each week

19                                                      December 2005

 

to verify all performance criteria. The laboratory must analyze one OPR sample for every 20 samples if more than 20 samples are analyzed in a week. If multiple method variations are used, separate OPR samples must be prepared for each method variation. Adjustment and/or recalibration of the analytical system shall be performed until all performance criteria are met. Only after all performance criteria are met should samples be analyzed.

  • Examine the slide from the OPR prior to analysis of samples from the same
    • Using 200X to 400X magnification, more than 50% of the oocysts or

cysts must appear undamaged and morphologically intact; otherwise, the organisms in the spiking suspension may be of unacceptable quality or the analytical process may be damaging the organisms. Examine the spiking suspension organisms directly (by centrifuging, if possible, to concentrate the organisms in a volume that can be applied directly to a slide). If the organisms appear undamaged and morphologically intact under DIC, determine the step or reagent that is causing damage to the organisms. Correct the problem and repeat the OPR test.

  • Identify and enumerate each organism using epifluorescence

The first three Cryptosporidium oocysts and three Giardia cysts identified in the OPR sample must be examined using FITC, DAPI, and DIC, as per Section 15.2, and the detailed characteristics (size, shape, DAPI category, and DIC category) reported on the Cryptosporidium and Giardia report form, as well as any additional comments on organism appearance, if notable.

  • For each organism, calculate the percent recovery (R) using the following equation:

     N   

R =    100 x

T

where:

R = the percent recovery

N = the number of oocysts or cysts detected T = the number of oocysts or cysts spiked

  • Compare the recovery with the acceptance criteria for ongoing precision and recovery in Tables 3 and 4 in Section 0.
  • Actions
    • If the recoveries for Cryptosporidium and Giardia meet the acceptance

criteria, system performance is acceptable and analysis of samples may proceed.

  • If the recovery for Cryptosporidium or Giardia falls outside of the

criteria, system performance is unacceptable. Any sample in a batch associated with an unacceptable OPR sample is unacceptable. Analysis of additional samples is halted until the analytical system is brought under control. Troubleshoot the problem using the procedures at Section 9.7.5 as a guide. After assessing the issue, perform another OPR test and verify that Cryptosporidium and Giardia recoveries meet the acceptance  criteria.

  • If an OPR sample has failed, and the cause of the failure is not known,

the laboratory generally should identify the problem working backward in the analytical process from the microscopic examination to filtration.

December 2005                                        20

 

  • Quality of spiked organisms. Examine the spiking suspension organisms

directly (by centrifuging, if possible, to concentrate the organisms in a volume that can be applied directly to a slide). If the organisms appear damaged under DIC, obtain fresh spiking materials. If the organisms appear undamaged and morphologically intact, determined whether the problem is associated with the microscope system or antibody stain (Section 9.7.5.2).

  • Microscope system and antibody stain: To determine if the failure of

the OPR test is due to changes in the microscope or problems with the antibody stain, re-examine the positive staining control (Section 15.2.1), check Köhler illumination, and check the fluorescence of the fluorescein- labeled monoclonal antibodies (Mabs) and 4′,6-diamidino-2-phenylindole (DAPI). If results are unacceptable, re-examine a previously-prepared positive staining control to determine whether the problem is associated with the microscope or the antibody stain.

  • Separation (purification) system: To determine if the failure of the

OPR test is attributable to the separation system, check system performance by spiking a 10-mL volume of reagent water with ~100 – 500 oocysts and cysts and processing the sample through the IMS, staining, and examination procedures in Sections 13.3 through 15.0. Recoveries should be greater than 70%.

  • Filtration/elution/concentration system: If the failure of the OPR test is

attributable to the filtration/elution/concentration system, check system performance by processing spiked reagent water according to the procedures in Section 12.2 through 13.2.2, and filter, stain, and examine the sample concentrate according to Section 11.3.6.

  • The laboratory should add results that pass the specifications in Section 9.7.3 to initial

and previous ongoing data and update the QC chart to form a graphic representation of continued laboratory performance. The laboratory should develop a statement of laboratory accuracy (reagent water, raw surface water) by calculating the mean percent recovery (R) and the standard deviation of percent recovery (sr). Express the accuracy as a recovery interval from R ! 2 sr to R + 2 sr. For example, if R = 95% and sr = 25%, the accuracy is 45% to 145%.

  • The laboratory should periodically analyze an external QC sample, such as a performance evaluation or standard reference material, when available. The laboratory also should periodically participate in interlaboratory comparison studies using the
  • The specifications contained in this method can be met if the analytical system is under control. The standards used for initial (Section 9.4) and ongoing (Section 9.7) precision and recovery should be identical, so that the most precise results will be obtained. The microscope in particular will provide the most reproducible results if dedicated to the settings and conditions required for the determination of Cryptosporidium and Giardia by this
  • Depending on specific program requirements, field replicates may be collected to determine the precision of the sampling technique, and duplicate spiked samples may be required to determine the precision of the

10.0            Microscope Calibration and Analyst Verification

  • In a room capable of being darkened to near-complete darkness, assemble the microscope, all filters, and attachments. The microscope should be placed on a solid surface free from vibration. Adequate workspace should be provided on either side of the microscope for taking notes and placement of slides and ancillary

21                                                      December 2005

 

  • Using the manuals provided with the microscope, all analysts must familiarize themselves with operation of the
  • Microscope adjustment and calibration (adapted from Reference 10)
    • Preparations for adjustment
      • The microscopy portion of this procedure depends upon proper alignment

and adjustment of very sophisticated optics. Without proper alignment and adjustment, the microscope will not function at maximal efficiency, and reliable identification and enumeration of oocysts and cysts will not be possible. Consequently, it is imperative that all portions of the microscope from the light sources to the oculars are properly adjusted.

  • While microscopes from various vendors are configured somewhat

differently, they all operate on the same general physical principles. Therefore, slight deviations or adjustments may be required to make the procedures below work for a particular instrument.

  • The sections below assume that the mercury bulb has not exceeded time

limits of operation, that the lamp socket is connected to the lamp house, and that the condenser is adjusted to produce Köhler illumination.

  • Persons with astigmatism should always wear contact lenses or glasses when using the

CAUTION:      In the procedures below, do not touch the quartz portion of the mercury

bulb with your bare fingers. Finger oils can cause rapid degradation of the quartz and premature failure of the bulb.

 

WARNING:     Never look at the ultraviolet (UV) light from the mercury lamp, lamp

house, or the UV image without a barrier filter in place. UV radiation can cause serious eye damage.

  • Epifluorescent mercury bulb adjustment: The purpose of this procedure is to ensure even

field illumination. This procedure must be followed when the microscope is first used, when replacing bulbs, and if problems such as diminished fluorescence or uneven field illumination are experienced.

  • Remove the diffuser lens between the lamp and microscope or swing it out of the transmitted light
  • Using a prepared microscope slide, adjust the focus so the image in the

oculars is sharply defined.

  • Replace the slide with a business card or a piece of lens
  • Close the field diaphragm (iris diaphragm in the microscope base) so only

a small point of light is visible on the card. This dot of light indicates the location of the center of the field of view.

  • Mount the mercury lamp house on the microscope without the UV diffuser lens in place and turn on the mercury
  • Remove the objective in the light path from the A primary

(brighter) and secondary image (dimmer) of the mercury bulb arc should appear on the card after focusing the image with the appropriate adjustment.

December 2005                                        22

 

  • Using the lamp house adjustments, adjust the primary and secondary

mercury bulb images so they are side by side (parallel to each other) with the transmitted light dot in between them.

  • Reattach the objective to the
  • Insert the diffuser lens into the light path between the mercury lamp house and the
  • Turn off the transmitted light and replace the card with a slide of

fluorescent material. Check the field for even fluorescent illumination. Adjustment of the diffuser lens probably will be required. Additional slight adjustments as in Section 10.3.2.7 above may be required.

  • Maintain a log of the number of hours the UV bulb has been used. Never

use the bulb for longer than it has been rated. Fifty-watt bulbs should not be used longer than 100 hours; 100-watt bulbs should not be used longer than 200 hours.

  • Transmitted bulb adjustment: The purpose of this procedure is to center the filament and

ensure even field illumination. This procedure must be followed when the bulb is changed.

  • Remove the diffuser lens between the lamp and microscope or swing it out of the transmitted light
  • Using a prepared microscope slide and a 40X (or similar) objective,

adjust the focus so the image in the oculars is sharply defined.

  • Without the ocular or Bertrand optics in place, view the pupil and filament image at the bottom of the
  • Focus the lamp filament image with the appropriate adjustment on the

lamp house.

  • Similarly, center the lamp filament image within the pupil with the appropriate adjustment(s) on the lamp
  • Insert the diffuser lens into the light path between the transmitted lamp

house and the microscope.

  • Adjustment of the interpupillary distance and oculars for each eye: These adjustments

are necessary so that eye strain is reduced to a minimum, and must be made for each individual using the microscope. Section 10.3.4.2 assumes use of a microscope with both oculars adjustable; Section 10.3.4.3 assumes use of a microscope with a single adjustable ocular. The procedure must be followed each time an analyst uses the  microscope.

  • Interpupillary distance
    • Place a prepared slide on the microscope stage, turn on

the transmitted light, and focus the specimen image using the coarse and fine adjustment knobs.

  • Using both hands, move the oculars closer together or

farther apart until a single circle of light is observed while looking through the oculars with both eyes. Note interpupillary distance.

  • Ocular adjustment for microscopes capable of viewing a photographic

frame through the viewing binoculars: This procedure assumes both oculars are adjustable.

  • Place a card between the right ocular and eye keeping both eyes open. Adjust the correction (focusing) collar on

23                                                      December 2005

 

the left ocular by focusing the left ocular until it reads the same as the interpupillary distance. Bring an image located in the center of the field of view into as sharp a focus as possible.

  • Transfer the card to between the left eye and

Again keeping both eyes open, bring the same image into as sharp a focus for the right eye as possible by adjusting the ocular correction (focusing) collar at the top of the right ocular.

  • Ocular adjustment for microscopes without binocular capability: This

procedure assumes a single focusing ocular. The following procedure assumes that only the right ocular is capable of adjustment.

  • Place a card between the right ocular and eye keeping

both eyes open. Using the fine adjustment, focus the image for the left eye to its sharpest point.

  • Transfer the card to between the left eye and

Keeping both eyes open, bring the image for the right eye into sharp focus by adjusting the ocular collar at the top of the ocular without touching the coarse or fine adjustment.

  • Calibration of an ocular micrometer: This section assumes that a reticle has been

installed in one of the oculars by a microscopy specialist and that a stage micrometer is available for calibrating the ocular micrometer (reticle). Once installed, the ocular reticle should be left in place. The more an ocular is manipulated the greater the probability is for it to become contaminated with dust particles. This calibration should be done for each objective in use on the microscope. If there is a top lens on the microscope, the calibration procedure must be done for the respective objective at each top lens setting. The procedure must be followed when the microscope is first used and each time the objective is changed.

  • Place the stage micrometer on the microscope stage, turn on the

transmitted light, and focus the micrometer image using the coarse and fine adjustment knobs for the objective to be calibrated. Continue adjusting the focus on the stage micrometer so you can distinguish between the large (0.1 mm) and the small (0.01 mm) divisions.

  • Adjust the stage and ocular with the micrometer so the “0″ line on the

ocular micrometer is exactly superimposed on the “0″ line on the stage micrometer.

  • Without changing the stage adjustment, find a point as distant as possible from the two 0 lines where two other lines are exactly
  • Determine the number of ocular micrometer spaces as well as the number

of millimeters on the stage micrometer between the two points of superimposition. For example: Suppose 48 ocular micrometer spaces equal 0.6 mm.

  • Calculate the number of mm/ocular micrometer space. For example:

                       0.6 mm                                             0.0125 mm               

=

48 ocular micrometer spaces                     ocular micrometer space

December 2005                                        24

  • Because most measurements of microorganisms are given in µm rather

than mm, the value calculated above must be converted to µm by multiplying it by 1000 µm/mm. For example:

             0.0125 mm                ocular micrometer space

    1,000 µm                    12.5 µm             x                =

mm              ocular micrometer space

  • Follow the procedure below for each objective. Record the information as

shown in the example below and keep the information available at the microscope.

Item no. Objective power Description No. of ocular micrometer spaces No. of stage micrometer

1

mm

µm/ocular micrometer

2

space

1 10X 3

N.A. =

2 20X N.A.=
3 40X N.A.=
4 100X N.A.=

11000 µm/mm

2(Stage micrometer length in mm ◊ (1000 µm/mm)) ÷ no. ocular micrometer spaces

3N.A. refers to numerical aperature. The numerical aperature value is engraved on the barrel of the objective.

  • Köhler illumination: This section assumes that Köhler illumination will be established

for only the 100X oil DIC objective that will be used to identify internal morphological characteristics in Cryptosporidium oocysts and Giardia cysts. If more than one objective is to be used for DIC, then each time the objective is changed, Köhler illumination must be reestablished for the new objective lens. Previous sections have adjusted oculars and light sources. This section aligns and focuses the light going through the condenser underneath the stage at the specimen to be observed. If Köhler illumination is not properly established, then DIC will not work to its maximal potential. These steps need to become second nature and must be practiced regularly until they are a matter of reflex rather than a chore. The procedure must be followed each time an analyst uses the microscope and each time the objective is changed.

  • Place a prepared slide on the microscope stage, place oil on the slide,

move the 100X oil objective into place, turn on the transmitted light, and focus the specimen image using the coarse and fine adjustment knobs.

  • At this point both the radiant field diaphragm in the microscope base and

the aperture diaphragm in the condenser should be wide open. Now close down the radiant field diaphragm in the microscope base until the lighted field is reduced to a small opening.

  • Using the condenser centering screws on the front right and left of the

condenser, move the small lighted portion of the field to the center of the visual field.

  • Now look to see whether the leaves of the iris field diaphragm are sharply

defined (focused) or not. If they are not sharply defined, then they can be focused distinctly by changing the height of the condenser up and down with the condenser focusing knob while you are looking through the binoculars. Once you have accomplished the precise focusing of the

25                                                      December 2005

 

radiant field diaphragm leaves, open the radiant field diaphragm until the leaves just disappear from view.

  • The aperture diaphragm of the condenser should now be adjusted to make

it compatible with the total numerical aperture of the optical system. This is done by removing an ocular, looking into the tube at the rear focal plane of the objective, and stopping down the aperture diaphragm iris leaves until they are visible just inside the rear plane of the objective.

  • After completing the adjustment of the aperture diaphragm in the

condenser, return the ocular to its tube and proceed with the adjustments required to establish DIC.

  • Microscope cleaning procedure
    • Use canned air to remove dust from the lenses, filters, and microscope
    • Use a Kimwipe-dampened with a microscope cleaning solution (MCS) (consisting of 2

parts 90% isoproponal and 1 part acetone) to wipe down all surfaces of the microscope body. Dry off with a clean, dry Kimwipe.

  • Protocol for cleaning oculars and condenser
    • Use a new, clean Q-tip dampened with MCS to clean each lense. Start at

the center of the lens and spiral the Q-tip outward using little to no pressure. Rotate the Q-tip head while spiraling to ensure a clean surface is always contacting the lens.

  • Repeat the procedure using a new, dry Q-tip.
  • Repeat Sections 10.4.3.1 and 4.3.2.
  • Remove the ocular and repeat the cleaning procedure on the bottom lens of the
  • Protocol for cleaning objective lenses
    • Wipe 100X oil objective with lens paper to remove the bulk of the oil from the
    • Hold a new Q-tip dampened with MCS at a 45° angle on the objective

and twirl.

  • Repeat Sections 10.4.4.2 with a new, dry Q-tip.
  • Repeat Sections 10.4.4.2 and 4.4.3.
  • Clean all objectives whether they are used or
  • Protocol for cleaning light source lens and filters
    • Using a Kimwipe dampened with microscope cleaning solution, wipe off the surface of each lens and
    • Repeat the procedure using a dry
    • Repeat Sections 10.4.5.1 and 4.5.2.
  • Protocol for cleaning microscope stage
    • Using a Kimwipe dampened with microscope cleaning solution, wipe off

the stage and stage clip. Be sure to clean off any residual immersion oil or fingernail polish. Remove the stage clip if necessary to ensure that it is thoroughly cleaned.

  • Use 409 and a paper towel to clean the bench top surrounding the
  • Frequency

10.4.8.1         Perform Sections 10.4.2, 10.4.3, 10.4.4, 10.4.5 and 10.4.7 after each

December 2005                                        26

 

microscope session.

10.4.8.2         Perform complete cleaning each week.

  • Protozoa libraries: Each laboratory is encouraged to develop libraries of photographs and drawings for identification of
    • Take color photographs of Cryptosporidium oocysts and Giardia cysts by FA, 4′,6-

diamidino-2-phenylindole (DAPI), and DIC that the analysts (Section 22.2) determine are accurate (Section 15.2).

  • Similarly, take color photographs of interfering organisms and materials by FA, DAPI ,

and DIC that the analysts believe are not Cryptosporidium oocysts or Giardia cysts. Quantify the size, shape, microscope settings, and other characteristics that can be used to differentiate oocysts and cysts from interfering debris and that will result in accurate identification of positive or negative organisms.

  • Verification of analyst performance: Until standard reference materials, such as National Institute of Standards and Technology standard reference materials, are available that contain a reliable number of DAPI positive or negative oocysts and cysts, this method shall rely upon the ability of the analyst for identification and enumeration of oocysts and cysts. The goal of analyst verification is to encourage comparison and discussion among analysts to continually refine the consistency of characterizations between
    • At least monthly when microscopic examinations are being performed, the laboratory

shall prepare a slide containing 40 to 200 oocysts and 40 to 200 cysts. More than 50% of the oocysts and cysts must be DAPI positive and undamaged under DIC.

  • Each analyst shall determine the total number of oocysts and cysts detected by FITC on

the entire slide meeting the criteria in 10.6.1. For the same 10 oocysts and 10 cysts, each analyst shall determine the DAPI category (DAPI negative, DAPI positive internal intense blue and DAPI positive number of nuclei) and the DIC category (empty, containing amorphous structures, or containing identifiable internal structures) of each. The DAPI/DIC comparisons may be performed on the slide prepared in 10.6.1, OPR slide, MS slide, or a positive staining control slide.

  • Requirements for laboratories with multiple analysts
    • The total number of oocysts and cysts determined by each analyst

(Section 10.6.2.) must be within ±10% of each other. If the number is not within this range, the analysts must identify the source of any variability between analysts’ examination criteria, prepare a new slide, and repeat  the performance verification (Sections 10.6.1 to 10.6.2). It is recommended that the DAPI and DIC categorization of the same 10 oocysts and 10 cysts occur with all analysts at the same time, i.e. each analyst determines the categorizations independently, then the differences in the DAPI and DIC categorizations among analysts are discussed and resolved, and these resolutions documented. Alternatively, organism coordinates may be recorded for each analyst to locate and categorize the organisms at different times. Differences among analysts must be discussed and resolved.

  • Document the date, name(s) of analyst(s), number of total oocysts and

cysts, and DAPI and DIC categories determined by the analyst(s), whether the test was passed/failed and the results of attempts before the test was passed.

  • Only after an analyst has passed the criteria in Section 10.6.3, may

oocysts and cysts in QC samples and field samples be identified and enumerated.

27                                                      December 2005

 

  • Laboratories with only one analyst should maintain a protozoa library (Section 10.5) and

compare the results of the examinations performed in Sections 10.6.1 and 10.6.2 to photographs of oocysts and cysts and interfering organisms to verify that examination results are consistent with these references. These laboratories also should perform repetitive counts of a single verification slide for FITC. These laboratories should also coordinate with other laboratories to share slides and compare counts.

11.0            Oocyst and Cyst Suspension Enumeration and Sample Spiking

  • This method requires routine analysis of spiked QC samples to demonstrate acceptable initial and ongoing laboratory and method performance (initial precision and recovery samples [Section 9.4], matrix spike and matrix spike duplicate samples [Section 9.5], and ongoing precision and recovery samples [Section 9.7]). The organisms used for these samples must be enumerated to calculate recoveries (and precision) and monitor method performance. EPA recommends that flow cytometry be used for this enumeration, rather than manual techniques. Flow cytometer–sorted spikes generally are characterized by a relative standard deviation of #5%, versus greater variability for manual enumeration techniques (Reference 20.11). Guidance on preparing spiking suspensions using a flow cytometer is provided in Section 11.2. Manual enumeration procedures are provided in Section 11.3. The procedure for spiking bulk samples in the laboratory is provided in Section 11.4.
  • Flow cytometry enumeration guidelines. Although it is unlikely that many laboratories performing Method 1623 will have direct access to a flow cytometer for preparing spiking suspensions, flow-sorted suspensions are available from commercial vendors and other sources (Section 7.10.1). The information provided in Sections 11.2.1 through 11.2.4 is simply meant as a guideline for preparing spiking suspensions using a flow cytometer. Laboratories performing flow cytometry must develop and implement detailed standardized protocols for calibration and operation of the flow
    • Spiking suspensions should be prepared using unstained organisms that have not been formalin-fixed.
    • Spiking suspensions should be prepared using Cryptosporidium parvum oocysts <3

months old, and Giardia intestinalis cysts <2 weeks old.

  • Initial calibration. Immediately before sorting spiking suspensions, an initial calibration

of the flow cytometer should be performed by conducting 10 sequential sorts directly onto membranes or well slides. The oocyst and cyst levels used for the initial calibration should be the same as the levels used for the spiking suspensions. Each initial calibration sample should be stained and manually counted microscopically and the manual counts used to verify the accuracy of the system. The relative standard deviation (RSD) of the  10 counts should be # 2.5%. If the RSD is > 2.5%, the laboratory should perform the initial calibration again, until the RSD of the 10 counts is # 2.5%. In addition to counting the organisms, the laboratory also should evaluate the quality of the organisms using DAPI fluorescence and DIC to confirm that the organisms are in good condition.

  • Ongoing calibration. When sorting the spiking suspensions for use in QC samples, the

laboratory should perform ongoing calibration samples at a 10% frequency, at a minimum. The laboratory should sort the first run and every eleventh sample directly onto a membrane or well slide. Each ongoing calibration sample should be stained and manually counted microscopically and the manual counts used to verify the accuracy of the system. The mean of the ongoing calibration counts also should be used as the estimated spike dose, if the relative standard deviation (RSD) of the ongoing calibration counts is # 2.5%. If the RSD is > 2.5%, the laboratory should discard the batch.

  • Method blanks. Depending on the operation of the flow cytometer, method blanks should be prepared and examined at the same frequency as the ongoing calibration

December 2005                                        28

 

samples (Section 11.2.4).

  • Holding time criteria. Flow-cytometer-sorted spiking suspensions (Sections 7.10.1 and

11.2) used for spiked quality control (QC) samples (Section 9) must be used within the expiration date noted on the suspension. The holding time specified by the flow cytometry laboratory should be determined based on a holding time study.

  • Manual enumeration procedures. Two sets of manual enumerations are required per organism before purified Cryptosporidium oocyst and Giardia cyst stock suspensions (Section 7.10.2) received from suppliers can be used to spike samples in the laboratory. First, the stock suspension must be diluted and enumerated (Section 11.3.3) to yield a suspension at the appropriate oocyst or cyst concentration for spiking (spiking suspension). Then, 10 aliquots of spiking suspension must be enumerated to calculate a mean spike dose. Spiking suspensions can be enumerated using hemacytometer chamber counting (Section 11.3.4), well slide counting (Section 11.3.5), or membrane filter counting (Section 3.6).
    • Precision criteria. The relative standard deviation (RSD) of the calculated mean spike dose for manually enumerated spiking suspensions must be #16% for Cryptosporidium

and #19% for Giardia before proceeding (these criteria are based on the pooled RSDs  of

105 manual Cryptosporidium enumerations and 104 manual Giardia enumerations submitted by 20 different laboratories under the EPA Protozoa Performance Evaluation Program).

  • Holding time criteria. Manually enumerated spiking suspensions must be used within

24 hours of enumeration of the spiking suspension if the hemacytometer chamber technique is used (Section 11.3.4); or within 24 hours of application of the spiking suspension or membrane filter to the slides if the well slide or membrane filter enumeration technique is used (Sections 11.3.5 and 11.3.6).

  • Enumerating and diluting stock suspensions
    • Purified, concentrated stock suspensions (Sections 7.10.2.1 and 10.2.2)

must be diluted and enumerated before the diluted suspensions are used to spike samples in the laboratory. Stock suspensions should be diluted with reagent water/Tween® 20 , 0.01% (Section 7.10.2.3), to a concentration of 20 to 50 organisms per large hemacytometer square before proceeding to Section 11.3.3.2.

  • Apply a clean hemacytometer coverslip (Section 6.4.5) to the

hemacytometer and load the hemacytometer chamber with 10 µL of vortexed suspension per chamber. If this operation has been properly executed, the liquid should amply fill the entire chamber without bubbles or overflowing into the surrounding moats. Repeat this step with a clean, dry hemacytometer and coverslip if loading has been incorrectly performed. See Section 11.3.3.13, below, for the hemacytometer cleaning procedure.

  • Place the hemacytometer on the microscope stage and allow the oocysts

or cysts to settle for 2 minutes. Do not attempt to adjust the coverslip, apply clips, or in any way disturb the chamber after it has been filled.

  • Use 200X
  • Move the chamber so the ruled area is centered underneath the
  • Move the objective close to the coverslip while watching it from the side of the microscope, rather than through the
  • Focus up from the coverslip until the hemacytometer ruling
  • At each of the four corners of the chamber is a 1-square-mm area divided into 16 squares in which organisms are to be counted (Figure 1).

29                                                      December 2005

 

Beginning with the top row of four squares, count with a hand-tally counter in the directions indicated in Figure 2. Avoid counting organisms twice by counting only those touching the top and left boundary lines.

Count each square millimeter in this fashion.

  • Use the following formula to determine the number of organisms per µL of suspension:

number of

dilution

3                                       number of

    organisms counted            10

factor              1 mm

organisms

number of mm2

◊                 ◊                    ◊                       =

counted                  1 mm               1                   1 µL                    µL

  • Record the result on a hemacytometer data
  • A total of six different hemacytometer chambers must be loaded, counted, and averaged for each suspension to achieve optimal counting
  • Based on the hemacytometer counts, the stock suspension should be

diluted to a final concentration of between 8 to 12 organisms per µL;

                                                however, ranges as great as 5 to 15 organisms per µL can be used.        

NOTE:  If the diluted stock suspensions (the spiking suspensions) will be enumerated

using hemacytometer chamber counts (Section 11.3.4) or membrane filter counts (Section 11.3.6), then the stock suspensions should be diluted with 0.01% Tween® 20 . If the spiking suspensions will be enumerated using well slide counts (Section 11.3.5), then the stock suspensions should be diluted in reagent water.

To calculate the volume (in µL) of stock suspension required per µL of reagent water (or reagent water/Tween® 20 , 0.01%), use the following formula:

volume of stock suspension (µL) required =

             required number of organisms                     number of organisms/ µL of stock suspension

If the volume is less than 10 µL, an additional dilution of the stock suspension is recommended before proceeding.

To calculate the dilution factor needed to achieve the required number of organisms per 10 µL, use the following formula:

total volume (:L) =

                  number of organisms required x 10:L                      predicted number of organisms per 10:L (8 to 12)

To calculate the volume of reagent water (or reagent water/Tween® 20 , 0.01%) needed, use the following formula:

reagent water volume (:L) =     total volume (:L) –   stock suspension volume required (:L)

  • After each use, the hemacytometer and coverslip must be cleaned

immediately to prevent the organisms and debris from drying on it. Since this apparatus is precisely machined, abrasives cannot be used to clean it,

December 2005                                        30

 

as they will disturb the flooding and volume relationships.

  • Rinse the hemacytometer and cover glass first with tap water, then 70% ethanol, and finally with
  • Dry and polish the hemacytometer chamber and cover

glass with lens paper. Store it in a secure place.

  • Several factors are known to introduce errors into hemacytometer counts, including:

C          Inadequate mixing of suspension before flooding the chamber

C          Irregular filling of the chamber, trapped air bubbles, dust, or oil on the chamber or coverslip

C          Total number of organisms counted is too low to provide statistical confidence in the result

C          Error in recording tally

C          Calculation error; failure to consider dilution factor, or area counted

C          Inadequate cleaning and removal of organisms from the previous count

C          Allowing filled chamber to sit too long, so that the chamber suspension dries and concentrates.

  • Enumerating spiking suspensions using a hemacytometer chamber

NOTE: Spiking suspensions enumerated using a hemacytometer chamber must be used within 24 hours of enumeration.

  • Vortex the tube containing the spiking suspension (diluted stock

suspension; Section 11.3.3) for a minimum of 2 minutes. Gently invert the tube three times.

  • To an appropriate-size beaker containing a stir bar, add enough spiking

suspension to perform all spike testing and the enumeration as described. The liquid volume and beaker relationship should be such that a spinning stir bar does not splash the sides of the beaker, the stir bar has unimpeded rotation, and there is enough room to draw sample from the beaker with a 10-µL micropipette without touching the stir bar. Cover the beaker with a watch glass or petri dish to prevent evaporation between sample withdrawals.

  • Allow the beaker contents to stir for a minimum of 30 minutes before beginning
  • While the stir bar is still spinning, remove a 10-µL aliquot and carefully

load one side of the hemacytometer. Count all organisms on the platform, at 200X magnification using phase-contrast or darkfield microscopy. The count must include the entire area under the hemacytometer, not just the four outer 1-mm2 squares. Repeat this procedure nine times. This step allows confirmation of the number of organisms per 10 µL (Section 11.3.3.12). Based on the 10 counts, calculate the mean, standard deviation, and RSD of the counts. Record the counts and the calculations on a spiking suspension enumeration form. The relative standard deviation (RSD) of the calculated mean spike dose must be #16% for Cryptosporidium and #19% for Giardia before proceeding. If the RSD is unacceptable, or the mean number is outside the expected range, add

31                                                      December 2005

 

additional oocysts from stock suspension or dilute the contents of the beaker appropriately with reagent water. Repeat the process to confirm counts. Refer to Section 11.3.3.14 for factors that may introduce errors.

  • Enumerating spiking suspensions using well slides

NOTE: Spiking suspensions enumerated using well slides must be used within 24 hours of application of the spiking suspension to the slides.

  • Prepare well slides for sample screening and label the
  • Vortex the tube containing the spiking suspension (diluted stock

suspension; Section 11.3.3) for a minimum of 2 minutes. Gently invert the tube three times.

  • Remove a 10-µL aliquot from the spiking suspension and apply it to the center of a
  • Before removing subsequent aliquots, cap the tube and gently invert it

three times to ensure that the oocysts or cysts are in suspension.

  • Ten wells must be prepared and counted, and the counts averaged, to

sufficiently enumerate the spike dose. Air-dry the well slides. Because temperature and humidity varies from laboratory to laboratory, no minimum time is specified. However, the laboratory must take care to ensure that the sample has dried completely before staining to prevent losses during the rinse steps. A slide warmer set at 35°C to 42°C also can be used.

  • Positive and negative controls must be
    • For the positive control, pipette 10 µL of positive antigen

or 200 to 400 intact oocysts or cysts to the center of a well and distribute evenly over the well area.

  • For the negative control, pipette 50 µL of PBS onto the

center of a well and spread it over the well area with a pipette tip.

  • Air-dry the control
  • Follow the manufacturer’s instructions (Section 7.6) in applying the stain to the
  • Place the slides in a humid chamber in the dark and incubate according to

manufacturer’s directions. The humid chamber consists of a tightly sealed plastic container containing damp paper towels on top of which the slides are placed.

  • Apply one drop of wash buffer (prepared according to the manufacturer’s

instructions [Section 7.6]) to each well. Tilt each slide on a clean paper towel, long edge down. Gently aspirate the excess detection reagent from below the well using a clean Pasteur pipette or absorb with a paper towel

                                                or other absorbent material. Avoid disturbing the sample.                     

NOTE: If using the MeriFluor® Cryptosporidium/Giardia stain (Section 7.6.1), do not allow slides to dry completely.

 

  • Add mounting medium (Section 7.8) to each

December 2005                                        32

 

  • Apply a cover slip. Use a tissue to remove excess mounting fluid from the

edges of the coverslip. Seal the edges of the coverslip onto the slide using clear nail polish.

  • Record the date and time that staining was completed. If slides will not be

read immediately, store in a humid chamber in the dark between 1°C and 10°C until ready for examination.

  • After examination of the 10 wells, calculate the mean, standard deviation,

and RSD of the 10 replicates. Record the counts and the calculations on a spiking suspension enumeration form. The relative standard deviation (RSD) of the calculated mean spike dose must be #16% for Cryptosporidium and #19% for Giardia before proceeding. If the RSD is unacceptable, or the mean number is outside the expected range, add additional oocysts from stock suspension or dilute the contents of the beaker appropriately with reagent water. Repeat the process to confirm counts.

  • Enumeration of spiking suspensions using membrane filters

NOTE: Spiking suspensions enumerated using membrane filters must be used within 24 hours of application of the filters to the slides.

  • Precoat the glass funnels with Sigmacote® by placing the funnel in a

large petri dish and applying 5-mL of Sigmacoat® to the funnel opening using a pipette and allowing it to run down the inside of the funnel.

Repeat for all funnels to be used. The pooled Sigmacoat® may be returned to the bottle for re-use. Place the funnels at 35°C or 41°C for approximately 5 minutes to dry.

  • Place foil around the bottoms of the 100 ◊ 15 mm petri
  • Filter-sterilize (Section 6.19) approximately 10 mL of PBS (Section

7.4.2.1). Dilute detection reagent (Section 7.6) as per manufacturer’s instructions using sterile PBS. Multiply the anticipated number of filters to be stained by 100 mL to calculate total volume of stain required.

Divide the total volume required by 5 to obtain the microliters of antibody necessary. Subtract the volume of antibody from the total stain volume to obtain the required microliters of sterile PBS to add to the antibody.

  • Label the tops of foil-covered, 60 ◊ 15 mm petri dishes for 10 spiking

suspensions plus positive and negative staining controls and multiple filter blanks controls (one negative control, plus a blank after every five sample filters to control for carry-over). Create a humid chamber by laying damp paper towels on the bottom of a stain tray (the inverted foil- lined petri dishes will protect filters from light and prevent evaporation during incubation).

  • Place a decontaminated and cleaned filter holder base (Section 6.4.8.1) into each of the three ports of the vacuum manifold (Section 4.8.2).
  • Pour approximately 10 mL of 0.01% Tween® 20 into a 60 ◊ 15 mm petri

dish.

  • Using forceps, moisten a 1.2-µm cellulose-acetate support membrane

(Section 6.4.8.3) in the 0.01% Tween® 20 and place it on the fritted glass support of one of the filter bases. Moisten a polycarbonate filter (Section 6.4.8.4) the same way and position it on top of the cellulose-

33                                                      December 2005

 

acetate support membrane. Carefully clamp the glass funnel to the loaded filter support. Repeat for the other two filters.

  • Add 5 mL of 0.01% Tween® 20 to each of the three filtration units and allow to
  • Vortex the tube containing the spiking suspension (diluted stock

suspension; Section 11.3.3) for a minimum of 2 minutes. Gently invert the tube three times.

  • Using a micropipettor, sequentially remove two, 10-µL aliquots from the

spiking suspension and pipet into the 5 mL of 0.01% Tween® 20 standing in the unit. Rinse the pipet tip twice after each addition. Apply 10 µL of 0.01% Tween® 20 to the third unit to serve as the negative control. Apply vacuum at 2″ Hg and allow liquid to drain to miniscus, then close off vacuum. Pipet 10 mL of reagent water into each funnel and drain to miniscus, closing off the vacuum. Repeat the rinse and drain all fluid, close off the vacuum.

  • Pipet 100 mL of diluted antibody to the center of the bottom of a 60 ◊ 15 mm petri dish for each
  • Unclamp the top funnel and transfer each cellulose acetate support

membrane/ polycarbonate filter combination onto the drop of stain using forceps (apply each membrane/filter combination to a different petri dish containing stain). Roll the filter into the drop to exclude air. Place the small petri dish containing the filter onto the damp towel and cover with the corresponding labeled foil-covered top. Incubate for approximately 45 minutes at room temperature.

  • Reclamp the top funnels, apply vacuum and rinse each three times, each time with 20 mL of reagent
  • Repeat Sections 11.3.6.4 through 11.3.6.10 for the next three samples (if

that the diluted spiking suspension has sat less than 15 minutes, reduce  the suspension vortex time to 60 seconds). Ten, 10-µL spiking suspension aliquots must be prepared and counted, and the counts averaged, to sufficiently enumerate the spike dose. Include a filter blank sample at a frequency of every five samples; rotate the position of filter blank to eventually include all three filter placements.

  • Repeat Sections 11.3.6.4 through 11.3.6.10 until the 10-µL spiking suspensions have been filtered. The last batch should include a 10-µL

0.01 Tween® 20  blank control and 20 µL of positive control antigen as a

positive staining control.

  • Label slides. After incubation is complete, for each sample, transfer the

cellulose acetate filter support and polycarbonate filter from drop of stain and place on fritted glass support. Cycle vacuum on and off briefly to remove excess fluid. Peel the top polycarbonate filter off the supporting filter and place on labeled slide. Discard cellulose acetate filter support. Mount and apply coverslips to the filters immediately to avoid drying.

  • To each slide, add 20 µL of mounting medium (Section 8).
  • Apply a coverslip. Seal the edges of the coverslip onto the slide using

clear nail polish. (Sealing may be delayed until cover slips are applied to all slides.)

December 2005                                        34

 

  • Record the date and time that staining was completed. If slides will not be

read immediately, store sealed slides in a closed container in the dark between 1°C and 10°C until ready for examination.

  • After examination of the 10 slides, calculate the mean, standard

deviation, and RSD of the 10 replicates. Record the counts and the calculations on a spiking suspension enumeration form. The relative standard deviation (RSD) of the calculated mean spike dose must be

#16% for Cryptosporidium and #19% for Giardia before proceeding. If the RSD is unacceptable, or the mean number is outside the expected range, add additional oocysts from stock suspension or dilute the contents of the beaker appropriately with reagent water. Repeat the process to confirm counts.

  • If oocysts or cysts are detected on the filter blanks, modify the rinse procedure to ensure that no carryover occurs and repeat
  • Procedure for spiking samples in the laboratory with enumerated spiking
    • Arrange a disposable cubitainer or bottom-dispensing container to feed the filter or insert

the influent end of the tube connected to the filter through the top of a carboy to allow siphoning of the sample.

  • For initial precision and recovery (Section 9.4) and ongoing precision and recovery

(Section 9.7) samples, fill the container with 10 L of reagent water or a volume of reagent water equal to the volume of the field samples analyzed in the analytical batch. For matrix spike samples (Section 9.5), fill the container with the field sample to be spiked. Continuously mix the sample (using a stir bar and stir plate for smaller-volume samples and alternate means for larger-volume samples).

  • Follow the procedures in Section 11.4.3.1 or manufacturer’s instructions for flow

cytometer–enumerated suspensions and the procedures in Section 11.4.3.2 for manually enumerated suspensions.

  • For flow cytometer–enumerated suspensions (where the entire volume of a spiking suspension tube will be used):
    • Add 400 µL of Antifoam A to 100 mL of reagent water,

and mix well to emulsify.

  • Add 500 µL of the diluted antifoam to the tube

containing the spiking suspension and vortex for 30 seconds.

  • Pour the suspension into the sample
  • Add 20 mL of reagent water to the empty tube, cap,

vortex 10 seconds to rinse, and add the rinsate to the carboy.

  • Repeat this rinse using another 20 mL of reagent
  • Record the estimated number of organisms spiked, the

date and time the sample was spiked, and the sample volume spiked on a bench sheet. Proceed to Section 11.4.4.

  • For manually enumerated spiking suspensions:
    • Vortex the spiking suspension(s) (Section 11.2 or Section 11.3) for a minimum of 30
    • Rinse a pipette tip with 0.01% Tween® 20 once, then

repeatedly pipette the well-mixed spiking suspension a

35                                                      December 2005

 

minimum of five times before withdrawing an aliquot to spike the sample.

  • Add the spiking suspension(s) to the carboy, delivering the aliquot below the surface of the
  • Record the estimated number of organisms spiked, the

date and time the sample was spiked, and the sample volume spiked on a bench sheet. Proceed to Section 11.4.4

  • Allow the spiked sample to mix for approximately 1 minute in the
  • Turn on the pump and allow the flow rate to stabilize. Set flow at the rate designated for

the filter being used. As the carboy is depleted, check the flow rate and adjust if necessary.

  • When the water level approaches the discharge port of the carboy, tilt the container so

that it is completely emptied. At that time, turn off the pump and add 1-L PBST or reagent water to the 10-L carboy to rinse (5 L PBST or reagent water rinse to 50-L carboy). Swirl the contents to rinse down the sides. Additional rinses may be performed.

  • Turn on the pump. Allow all of the water to flow through the filter and turn off the pump.
  • Proceed to filter

12.0            Sample Filtration and Elution

  • A water sample is filtered according to the procedures in Section 12.2, 12.3, or 12.4. Alternate procedures may be used if the laboratory first demonstrates that the alternate procedure provides equivalent or superior performance per Section 1.2.

NOTE: Sample elution must be initiated within 96 hours of sample collection (if shipped to the laboratory as a bulk sample) or filtration (if filtered in the field).

  • Capsule filtration (adapted from Reference 20.12). This procedure was validated using 10-L sample volumes (for the original Envirochek ™ filter) and 50-L sample volumes (for the Envirochek™ HV filter). Alternate sample volumes may be used, provided the laboratory demonstrates acceptable performance on initial and ongoing spiked reagent water and source water samples (Section 1.2).
    • Flow rate adjustment
      • Connect the sampling system, minus the capsule, to a carboy filled with reagent water (Figure 3).
      • Turn on the pump and adjust the flow rate to 2.0 L/min.
      • Allow 2 to 10 L of reagent water to flush the Adjust the pump

speed as required during this period. Turn off the pump when the flow rate has been adjusted.

  • Install the capsule filter in the line, securing the inlet and outlet ends with the appropriate clamps/fittings.
  • Record the sample number, sample turbidity (if not provided with the field sample),

sample type, and sample filtration start date and time on a bench sheet.

  • Filtration
    • Mix the sample well by shaking, add stir bar and place on stir plate. Turn

on stir plate to lowest setting needed to keep sample thoroughly mixed. Connect the sampling system to the field carboy of sample water, or

December 2005                                        36

transfer the sample water to the laboratory carboy used in Section

12.2.1.1. If the sample will be filtered from a field carboy, a spigot (Section 6.2.1) can be used with the carboy to facilitate sample filtration.

NOTE: If the bulk field sample is transferred to a laboratory carboy, the laboratory carboy must be cleaned and disinfected before it is used with another field sample.

 

12.2.4.2 Place the drain end of the sampling system tubing into an empty
graduated container with a capacity of 10 to 15 L, calibrated at 9.0, 9.5,

10.0, 10.5, and 11.0 L (Section 6.18). This container will be used to determine the sample volume filtered. Alternately, connect a flow meter (Section 6.3.4) downstream of the filter, and record the initial meter reading.

12.2.4.3 Allow the carboy discharge tube and capsule to fill with sample water by
gravity. Vent residual air using the bleed valve/vent port, gently shaking

or tapping the capsule, if necessary. Turn on the pump to start water flowing through the filter. Verify that the flow rate is 2 L/min.

12.2.4.4 After all of the sample has passed through the filter, turn off the pump.
Allow the pressure to decrease until flow stops. (If the sample was

filtered in the field, and excess sample remains in the filter capsule upon receipt in the laboratory, pull the remaining sample volume through the filter before eluting the filter [Section 12.2.6].)

12.2.4.5 Turn off stir plate; add 1 L PBST or reagent water rinse (to 10-L carboy)
or 5 L PBST or reagent water rinse (to 50-L carboy).  Swirl or shake the

carboy to rinse down the side walls.

12.2.4.6 Reconnect to pump, turn on pump and allow pump to pull all water
through filter; turn off pump.
12.2.5 Disassembly
12.2.5.1 Disconnect the inlet end of the capsule filter assembly while maintaining
the level of the inlet fitting above the level of the outlet fitting to prevent

backwashing and the loss of oocysts and cysts from the filter. Restart the pump and allow as much water to drain as possible. Turn off the pump.

12.2.5.2 Based on the water level in the graduated container and Ω-L hash marks
or meter reading, record the volume filtered on the bench sheet to the

nearest quarter liter. Discard the contents of the graduated container.

12.2.5.3 Loosen the outlet fitting, then cap the inlet and outlet fittings.
12.2.6 Elution

NOTE:  The laboratory must complete the elution, concentration, and  purification

(Sections 12.2.6 through 13.3.3.11) in one work day. It is critical that these steps be completed in one work day to minimize the time that any target organisms present in the sample sit in eluate or concentrated matrix. This process ends with the application of the purified sample on the slide for drying.

12.2.6.1         Setup

12.2.6.1.1        Assemble the laboratory shaker with the clamps aligned

vertically so that the filters will be aligned horizontally. Extend the clamp arms to their maximum distance from the horizontal shaker rods to maximize the shaking action.

37                                                      December 2005

 

12.2.6.1.2 Prepare sufficient quantity of elution buffer to elute all
samples that are associated with the OPR/MB which used

that batch of elution buffer. Elution may require up to 275 mL of buffer per sample.

12.2.6.1.3 Designate at least one 250-mL conical centrifuge tube for
each sample and label with the sample number.
12.2.6.2 Elution
12.2.6.2.1 Record the elution date and time on the bench sheet.
Using a ring stand or other means, clamp each capsule in

a vertical position with the inlet end up.

12.2.6.2.2 Remove the inlet cap, pour elution buffer through the
inlet fitting, and allow the liquid level to stabilize.

Sufficient elution buffer must be added to cover the pleated white membrane with buffer solution or elution buffer may be measured to ensure the use of one 250-mL centrifuge tube. Replace the inlet cap.

12.2.6.2.3 Securely clamp the capsule in one of the clamps on the
laboratory shaker with the bleed valve positioned at the

top on a vertical axis (in the 12 o’clock position). Turn on the shaker and set the speed to maximum (approximately 900 rpm or per manufacturer’s instructions). Agitate the capsule for approximately 5 minutes. Time the agitation using a lab timer, rather than the timer on the shaker to ensure accurate time measurement.

12.2.6.2.4 Remove the filter from the shaker, remove the inlet cap,
and pour the contents of the capsule into the 250-mL

conical centrifuge tube.

12.2.6.2.5 Clamp the capsule vertically with the inlet end up and
add sufficient volume of elution buffer through the inlet

fitting to cover the pleated membrane. Replace the inlet cap.

12.2.6.2.6 Return the capsule to the shaker with the bleed valve
positioned at the 4 o’clock position. Turn on the shaker

and agitate the capsule for approximately 5 minutes.

12.2.6.2.7 Remove the filter from the shaker, but leave the elution
buffer in the capsule. Re-clamp the capsule to the shaker

at the 8 o’clock position. Turn on the shaker and agitate the capsule for a final 5 minutes.

12.2.6.2.8 Remove the filter from the shaker and pour the contents
into the 250-mL centrifuge tube. Rinse down the inside

of the capsule filter walls with reagent water or elution buffer using a squirt bottle inserted in the inlet end of the capsule. Invert the capsule filter over the centrifuge tube and ensure that as much of the eluate as possible has been transferred.

12.2.7   Proceed to Section 13.0 for concentration and separation (purification).

  • Sample filtration using the Filta-Max® foam filter. This procedure was validated using 50-L sample volumes. Alternate sample volumes may be used, provided the laboratory demonstrates

December 2005                                        38

acceptable performance on initial and ongoing spiked reagent water and source water samples (Section 9.1.2).

NOTE:   The filtration procedures specified in Sections 12.3.1.2 – 12.3.1.6.3 are specific

to laboratory filtration of a bulk sample. These procedures may require modification if samples will be filtered in the field.

  • Filtration
    • Flow rate adjustment
      • Connect the sampling system, minus the filter housing, to a carboy filled with reagent
      • Place the peristaltic pump upstream of the filter
      • Turn on the pump and adjust the flow rate to 1 to 4 L per minute.

NOTE:  A head pressure of 0.5 bar (7.5 psi) is required to create flow through the  filter,

and the recommended pressure of 5 bar (75 psi) should produce the flow rate of 3 to 4 L per minute. The maximum operating pressure of 8 bar (120 psi) should not be exceeded.

  • Allow 2 to 10 L of reagent water to flush the

Adjust the pump speed as necessary during this period. Turn off the pump when the flow rate has been adjusted.

  • Place filter module into the filter housing bolt head down and secure lid,

hand tighten housings, apply gentle pressure to create the seal between the module and the ‘O’ rings in the base and the lid of the housing.

Excessive tightening is not necessary, and may shorten the life of the ‘O’ rings. Tools may be used to tighten housing to the alignment marks (refer to manufacturer’s instructions). ‘O’ rings should be lightly greased before use (refer to manufacturer’s instructions).

  • Install the filter housing in the line, securing the inlet and outlet ends with

the appropriate clamps/fittings. Verify that the filter housing is installed so that the end closest to the screw top cap is the inlet and the opposite end is the outlet.

  • Record the sample number, sample turbidity (if not provided with the

field sample), and the name of the analyst filtering the sample on a bench sheet.

  • Filtration
    • Connect the sampling system to the field carboy of

sample water, or transfer the sample water to the laboratory carboy used in Section 12.3.1.1.1. If the sample will be filtered from a field carboy, a spigot can be used with the carboy to facilitate sample filtration.

NOTE: If the bulk field sample is transferred to a laboratory carboy, the laboratory carboy must be cleaned and disinfected before it is used with another field sample.

  • Place the drain end of the sampling system tubing into an

empty graduated container with a capacity greater than or equal to the volume to be filtered. This container will be used to determine the sample volume filtered.

Alternately, connect a flow meter downstream of the filter, and record the initial meter reading.

39                                                      December 2005

 

  • Allow the carboy discharge tube and filter housing to fill

with sample water. Turn on the pump to start water flowing through the filter. Verify that the flow rate is between 1 and 4 L per min.

 

 

  • Disassembly

After all of the sample has passed through the filter, turn

off the pump. Allow the pressure to decrease until flow stops.

  • Disconnect the inlet end of the filter housing assembly

while maintaining the level of the inlet fitting above the level of the outlet fitting to prevent backwashing and the loss of oocysts and cysts from the filter. Restart the pump and allow as much water to drain as possible. Turn off the pump.

  • Based on the water level in the graduated container or the

meter reading, record the volume filtered on a bench sheet to the nearest quarter liter.

  • Loosen the outlet fitting, the filter housing should be sealed with rubber

NOTE: Filters should be prevented from drying out, as this can impair their ability to expand when decompressed.

  • Elution
    • The filter is eluted to wash the oocysts from the filter. This can be

accomplished using the Filta-Max® wash station, which moves a plunger up and down a tube containing the filter and eluting solution (Section 12.3.2.2), or a stomacher, which uses paddles to agitate the stomacher bag containing the foam filter in the eluting solution (Section 12.3.2.3). If the Filta-Max® automatic wash station is used please see the manufacturer’s operator’s guide for instructions on its use. If Filta-Max® Quick Connect kit is used please follow manufacturer’s instructions.

  • Filta-Max® wash station elution procedure
    • First wash
      • Detach the removable plunger head using the tool provided, and remove the splash
      • Place the filter membrane flat in the concentrator base with the rough side up. Locate the concentrator base in the jaws of the wash station and screw on the concentrator tube (the longer of the two tubes), creating a tight seal at the membrane. Take the assembled concentrator out of the jaws and place on the
      • Replace the splash guard and temporarily secure it at least 15 cm above the end of the Secure the plunger head with the tool provided ensuring that the lever is fully locked down.
      • Remove the filter module from the filter housing or transportation container. Pour excess liquid into the assembled concentrator, then rinse the housing or

December 2005                                        40

container with PBST and add the rinse to the concentrator tube. Screw the filter module onto the base of the plunger. Locate the elution tube base in the jaws of the wash station and screw the elution tube (the shorter of the two tubes) firmly in place.

  • Pull the plunger down until the filter module sits at the bottom of the elution tube; the locking pin (at the top left of the wash station) should “click” to lock the plunger in
  • Remove the filter module bolt by turning the adapted allen key (provided) in a clockwise direction (as seen from above). Attach the steel tube to the elution tube base.
  • Add 600 mL of PBST to the assembled concentrator. If more than 50 mL of liquid has been recovered from the shipped filter module, reduce the volume of PBST accordingly. Screw the concentrator tube onto the base beneath the elution tube. Release the locking pin.

NOTE: Gentle pressure on the lever, coupled with a pulling action on the locking pin should enable the pin to be easily released.

  • Wash the foam disks by moving the plunger up and down 20 Gentle movements of the plunger are recommended to avoid generating excess foam.

NOTE: The plunger has an upper movement limit during the wash process to prevent it popping out of the top of the chamber.

  • Detach the concentrator and hold it such that the stainless steel tube is just above the level of the liquid. Purge the remaining liquid from the elution tube by moving the plunger up and down 5 times, then lock the plunger in place. To prevent drips, place the plug provided in the end of the steel
  • Prior to the second wash the eluate from the first wash can be concentrated using the Filta-Max® apparatus according to Section 12.3.3.2.1 or the eluate can be decanted into a 2-L pooling beaker and set
  • Second wash
    • Add an additional 600 mL of PBST to the concentrator module, remove the plug from the end of the steel tube and screw the concentrator tube back onto the elution module base. Release the locking pin.
    • Wash the foam disks by moving the plunger up and down 10 Gentle movements of the plunger are recommended to avoid generating excess foam.

41                                                      December 2005

 

  • The eluate can be concentrated using the Filta-Max® apparatus according to Section 12.3.3.2.2 or the eluate can be decanted into the 2-L pooling beaker containing the eluate from the first wash and concentrated using centrifugation, as described in Section 3.3.3.
  • Stomacher elution procedure
    • First wash
      • Place the filter module in the stomacher bag then use the allen key to remove the bolt from the filter module, allowing the rings to expand. Remove the end caps from the stomacher bag and rinse with PBST into the stomacher
      • Add 600 mL of PBST to stomacher bag containing the filter pads. Place bag in stomacher and wash for 5 minutes on a normal
      • Remove the bag from the stomacher and decant the eluate into a 2-L pooling
    • Second wash
      • Add a second 600-mL aliquot of PBST to the stomacher bag. Place bag in stomacher and wash for 5 minutes on a normal setting. Remove the bag from the stomacher and decant the eluate from the stomacher bag into the 2-L pooling beaker. Wring the stomacher bag by hand to remove eluate from the foam filter and add to the pooling beaker. Remove the foam filter from the bag and using a squirt bottle, rinse the stomacher bag with reagent water and add the rinse to the pooling
      • Proceed to concentration (Section 3.3).
    • Concentration
      • The eluate can be concentrated using the Filta-Max® concentrator

apparatus, which pulls most of the eluate through a membrane filter leaving the oocysts concentrated in a small volume of the remaining eluting solution (Section 12.3..2), or by directly centrifuging all of the eluting solution used to wash the filter (Section 12.3.2.3).

  • The Filta-Max® concentrator procedure
    • Concentration of first wash
      • If the stomacher was used to elute the sample (Section 12.3.2.3), transfer 600 mL of eluate from the pooling beaker to the concentrator tube. Otherwise proceed to Step (b).
      • Stand the concentrator tube on a magnetic stirring plate and attach the lid (with magnetic stirrer bar). Connect the waste bottle trap and hand or electric vacuum pump to the valve on the concentrator base. Begin stirring and open the tap. Increase the vacuum using the hand

December 2005                                        42

NOTE:  The force of the vacuum should not exceed 30 cmHg.

  • Allow the liquid to drain until it is approximately level with the middle of the stirrer bar then close the valve. Remove the magnetic stirrer, and rinse it with PBST or distilled water to recover all oocysts. Decant the concentrate into a 50-mL tube, then rinse the sides of the concentration tube and add the rinsate to the 50-mL tube.
  • Concentration of second wash
    • If the stomacher was used to elute the sample (Section 12.3.2.3), transfer the remaining 600 mL of eluate from the pooling beaker to the concentrator tube. Otherwise proceed to Step (b).
    • Add the concentrate, in the 50-mL tube, retained from the first concentration (Section 12.3.3.2.1 (c)) to the 600 mL of eluate from the second wash, then repeat concentration steps from Sections 3.3.2.1
      • and 12.3.3.2.1 (c). The final sample can be poured into the same 50-mL tube used to retain the first concentrate. Rinse the sides of the concentrator tube with PBST and add the rinse to the 50-mL
      • Remove the magnetic stirrer. Insert the empty concentrator module into the jaws of the wash station and twist off the concentrator
      • Transfer the membrane from the concentrator base to the bag provided using membrane
    • Membrane elution. The membrane can be washed manually or using a stomacher:
  • Manual wash. Add 5 mL of PBST to the bag containing the membrane. Rub the surface of the membrane through the bag until the membrane appears clean. Using a pipette, transfer the eluate to a 50-mL tube. Repeat the membrane wash with another 5 mL of PBST and transfer the eluate to the 50-mL tube. (Optional: Perform a third wash using another 5 mL of PBST, by hand-kneading an additional minute or placing the bag on a flat-headed vortexer and vortexing for one Transfer the eluate to the

                                                                              50-mL tube.)                                                                 NOTE:  Mark the bag with an “X” to note which side of the membrane has the oocysts to encourage the hand-kneading to focus on the appropriate side of the membrane.

 

  • Stomacher wash. Add 5 mL of PBST to the bag containing the membrane. Place the bag containing the membrane into a small stomacher and stomach for 3 minutes. Using a pipette transfer the eluate to a 50-mL tube. Repeat the wash two times using the stomacher and 5-mL aliquots of (Optional:

43                                                      December 2005

 

Perform a fourth wash using another 5 mL of PBST, by hand-kneading an additional minute or placing the bag on a flat-headed vortexer and vortexing for one minute. Transfer the eluate to the 50-mL tube.)

  • If the membrane filter clogs before concentration is

complete, there are two possible options for completion of concentration. One option is replacing the membrane as often as necessary. Filter membranes may be placed smooth side up during the second concentration step.

Another option is concentrating the remaining eluate using centrifugation. Both options are provided below.

  • Using multiple membranes. Disassemble the concentrator tube and pour any remaining eluate back into the pooling beaker. Remove the membrane using membrane forceps, placing it in the bag provided. Place a new membrane in the concentrator tube smooth side up, reassemble, return the eluate to the concentrator tube, rinse the pooling beaker and add rinse to the eluate, and continue the concentration. Replace the membrane as often as
  • Centrifuging remaining volume. Decant the remaining eluate into a 2-L pooling beaker. Rinse the sides of the concentrator tube and add to the pooling beaker. Remove the filter membrane and place it in the bag provided. Wash the membrane as described in Section 12.3.3.2.3, then concentrate the sample as described in Section 3.3.3.1.
    • If the Filta-Max® concentrator is not used for sample concentration, or if

the membrane filter clogs before sample concentration is complete, then the procedures described in Section 12.3.3.3.1 should be used to concentrate the sample. If less than 50 mL of concentrate has been generated, the sample can be further concentrated, as described in Section 12.3.3.3.2, to reduce the volume of sample to be processed through IMS.

NOTE:  The volume must not be reduced to less than 5 mL above the packed pellet.  The

maximum amount of pellet that should be processed through IMS is 0.5 mL. If the packed pellet is greater than 0.5 mL then the pellet may be subsampled as described in Section 13.2.4.

  • Centrifugation of greater than 50 mL of eluate
  • Decant the eluate from the 2-L pooling beaker into 250-mL conical centrifuge tubes. Make sure that the centrifuge tubes are
  • Centrifuge the 250-mL centrifuge tubes containing the eluate at 1500 ◊ G for 15 minutes. Allow the centrifuge to coast to a
  • Using a Pasteur pipette, carefully aspirate off the supernatant to 5 mL above the pellet. If the sample is reagent water (e.g. initial or ongoing precision and recovery sample) extra care must be taken to avoid aspirating oocysts and cysts during this

December 2005                                        44

  • Vortex each 250-mL tube vigorously until pellet is completely resuspended. Swirl the centrifuge tube gently to reduce any foaming after vortexing. Combine the contents of each 250-mL centrifuge tube into a 50-mL centrifuge tube. Rinse each of the 250-mL centrifuge tubes with PBST and add the rinse to the 50-mL
  • Proceed to Section 3.3.3.2.
  • Centrifugation of less than 50 mL of eluate
  • Maintenance and cleaning
  • Centrifuge the 50-mL centrifuge tube containing the combined concentrate at 1500 x G for 15 minutes. Allow the centrifuge to coast to a stop. Record the initial pellet volume (volume of solids) and the date and time that concentration was completed on a bench
  • Proceed to Section 13.0 for concentration and separation (purification).
  • Maintenance of O-rings
    • Check all rubber O-rings for wear or deterioration prior to each use and replace as
    • Lubricate the plunger head O-ring inside and out with

silicon before each use.

  • Lubricate all other O-rings (concentrator tube set, filter housing) regularly in order to preserve their
  • Cleaning
    • All components of the Filta-Max® system can be cleaned

using warm water and laboratory detergent. After washing, rinse all components with oocyst and cyst free reagent water and dry them. All O-rings should be re- lubricated. Alternatively a mild (40°C) dishwasher cycle without bleach or rinse aid can be used.

  • To wash the detachable plunger head slide the locking

pin out and wash the plunger head and locking pin in warm water and laboratory detergent. Rinse the plunger head and locking pin with oocyst and cyst free reagent water and dry. Lightly lubricate the locking pin and re- assemble the plunger head.

  • Sample collection (filtration and concentration) using portable continuous-flow centrifugation. Please follow manufacturer’s instructions. This procedure was validated for the detection of Cryptosporidium using 50-L sample volumes. Alternate sample volumes may be used, provided the laboratory demonstrates acceptable performance on initial and ongoing spiked reagent water and source water samples (Section 9.1.2). Laboratories are permitted to demonstrate acceptable performance for Giardia in their individual

45                                                      December 2005

 

13.0            Sample Concentration and Separation (Purification)

  • During concentration and separation, the filter eluate is concentrated through centrifugation, and the oocysts and cysts in the sample are separated from other particulates through immunomagnetic separation (IMS). Alternate procedures and products may be used if the laboratory first demonstrates equivalent or superior performance as per Section 1.2.
  • Adjustment of pellet volume
    • Centrifuge the 250-mL centrifuge tube containing the capsule filter eluate at 1500 ◊ G

for 15 minutes. Allow the centrifuge to coast to a stop—do not use the brake. Record the pellet volume (volume of solids) on the bench sheet.

NOTE: Recoveries may be improved if centrifugation force is increased to 2000 ◊ G.

However, do not use this higher force if the sample contains sand or other gritty material that may degrade the condition of any oocysts and/or cysts in the sample.

  • Using a Pasteur pipette, carefully aspirate the supernatant to 5 mL above the pellet. Extra

care must be taken to avoid aspirating oocysts and cysts during this step, particularly if the sample is reagent water (e.g. initial or ongoing precision and recovery sample).

  • If the packed pellet volume is 5 mL, vortex the tube vigorously until pellet is

completely resuspended. Swirl the centrifuge tube gently to reduce any foaming after vortexing. Record the resuspended pellet volume on the bench sheet. Proceed to Section 13.3.

NOTE:  Extra care must be taken with samples containing sand or other gritty material

when vortexing to ensure that the condition of any oocysts and/or cysts in the sample is not compromised.

  • If the packed pellet volume is > 0.5 mL, the concentrate must be separated into

multiple subsamples (a subsample is equivalent to no greater than 0.5 mL of packed pellet material, the recommended maximum amount of particulate material to process through the subsequent purification and examination steps in the method). Use the following formula to determine the total volume required in the centrifuge tube before separating the concentrate into two or more subsamples:

     pellet volume     

total volume (mL) required =                                    x 5 mL

0.5 mL

(For example, if the packed pellet volume is 1.2 mL, the total volume required is 12 mL.) Add reagent water to the centrifuge tube to bring the total volume to the level calculated

                          above.                                                                                                                          

NOTE:  Extra care must be taken with samples containing sand or other gritty material

when vortexing to ensure that the condition of any oocysts in the sample is not compromised.

  • Analysis of entire sample. If analysis of the entire sample is required,

determine the number of subsamples to be processed independently through the remainder of the method:

  • Calculate number of subsamples: Divide the total

volume in the centrifuge tube by 5 mL and round up to the nearest integer (for example, if the resuspended volume in Section 13.2.4 is 12 mL, then the number of

December 2005                                        46

subsamples would be 12 mL / 5 mL = 2.4, rounded = 3 subsamples).

13.2.4.1.2                                  Determine volume of resuspended concentrate per

subsample. Divide the total volume in the centrifuge tube by the calculated number of subsamples (for example, if the resuspended volume in Section 13.2.4 is 12 mL, then the volume to use for each subsample = 12 mL / 3 subsamples = 4 mL).

  • Process subsamples through IMS. Vortex the tube

vigorously for 10 to 15 seconds to completely resuspend the pellet. Record the resuspended pellet volume on the bench sheet. Proceed immediately to Section 13.3, and transfer aliquots of the resuspended concentrate equivalent to the volume in the previous step to multiple, flat-sided sample tubes in Section 13.3.2.1. Process the sample as multiple, independent subsamples from Section

13.3 onward, including the preparation and examination of separate slides for each aliquot. Record the volume of resuspended concentrate transferred to IMS on the bench sheet (this will be equal to the volume recorded in Section 13.2.4). Also record the number of subsamples processed independently through the method on the bench sheet.

  • Analysis of partial sample. If not all of the concentrate will be

examined, vortex the tube vigorously for 10 to 15 seconds to completely resuspend the pellet. Record the resuspended pellet volume on the bench sheet. Proceed immediately to Section 13.3, and transfer one or more 5- mL aliquots of the resuspended concentrate to one or more flat-sided sample tubes in Section 13.3.2.1. Record the volume of resuspended concentrate transferred to IMS on the bench sheet. To determine the volume analyzed, calculate the percent of the concentrate examined using the following formula:

    total volume of resuspended concentrate transferred to IMS 

percent examined =                                                                                           x 100%

total volume of resuspended concentrate in Section 13.2.4

Then multiply the volume filtered (Section 12.2.5.2) by this percentage to determine the volume analyzed.

  • IMS procedure (adapted from Reference 13)

NOTE: The IMS procedure should be performed on a bench top with all materials at room temperature, ranging from 15°C to 25°C.

  • Preparation and addition of reagents
    • Prepare a 1X dilution of SL-buffer-A from the 10X SL-buffer-A (clear,

colorless solution) supplied. Use reagent water (demineralized; Section 7.3) as the diluent. For every 1 mL of 1X SL-buffer-A required, mix 100

µL of 10X SL-buffer-A and 0.9 mL diluent water. A volume of 1.5 mL of 1X SL-buffer-A will be required per sample or subsample on which the Dynal IMS procedure is performed.

47                                                      December 2005

 

  • For each 10mL sample or subsample (Section 13.2) to be processed

through IMS, add 1 mL of the 10X SL-buffer-A (supplied—not the diluted 1X SL-buffer-A) to a flat-sided tube (Section 6.5.4).

  • For each subsample, add 1 mL of the 10X SL-buffer-B (supplied— magenta solution) to the flat-sided tube containing the 10X SL-buffer-A.
  • Oocyst and cyst capture
    • Use a graduated, 10-mL pipette that has been pre-rinsed with elution

buffer to transfer the water sample concentrate from Section 13.2 to the flat-sided tube(s) containing the SL-buffers. If all of the concentrate is used, rinse the centrifuge tube twice with reagent water and add the rinsate to the flat-sided tube containing the concentrate (or to the tube containing the first subsample, if multiple subsamples will be processed). Each of the two rinses should be half the volume needed to bring the total volume in the flat-sided sample tube to 12 mL (including the buffers added in Sections 13.3.1.2 and 13.3.1.3). (For example, if the tube contained 1 mL of SL-buffer-A and 1 mL of SL-buffer-B, and 5 mL of sample was transferred after resuspension of the pellet, for a total of 7 mL, the centrifuge tube would be rinsed twice with 2.5 mL of reagent water to bring the total volume in the flat-sided tube to 12 mL.) Visually inspect the centrifuge tube after completing the transfer to ensure that no concentrate remains. If multiple subsamples will be processed, bring the volume in the remaining flat-sided tubes to 12 mL with reagent water.

Label the flat-sided tube(s) with the sample number (and subsample letters).

  • Vortex the Dynabeads®Crypto-Combo vial from the IMS kit for

approximately 10 seconds to suspend the beads. Ensure that the beads are fully resuspended by inverting the sample tube and making sure that there is no residual pellet at the bottom.

  • Add 100 µL of the resuspended Dynabeads®Crypto-Combo (Section

13.3.2.2) to the sample tube(s) containing the water sample concentrate and SL-buffers.

  • Vortex the Dynabeads®Giardia-Combo vial from the IMS kit for

approximately 10 seconds to suspend the beads. Ensure that the beads are fully resuspended by inverting the tube and making sure that there is no residual pellet at the bottom.

  • Add 100 µL of the resuspended Dynabeads®Giardia-Combo (Section

13.3.2.4) to the sample tube(s) containing the water sample concentrate, Dynabeads®Crypto-Combo, and SL-buffers.

  • Affix the sample tube(s) to a rotating mixer and rotate at approximately 18 rpm for 1 hour at room
  • After rotating for 1 hour, remove each sample tube from the mixer and

place the tube in the magnetic particle concentrator (MPC®-1 or MPC®-

6) with flat side of the tube toward the magnet.

  • Without removing the sample tube from the MPC®-1, place the magnet

side of the MPC®-1 downwards, so the tube is horizontal and the flat side of the tube is facing down.

  • Gently rock the sample tube by hand end-to-end through approximately 90°, tilting the cap-end and base-end of the tube up and down in

December 2005                                        48

Continue the tilting action for 2 minutes with approximately one tilt per second.

  • Ensure that the tilting action is continued throughout this period to

prevent binding of low-mass, magnetic or magnetizable material. If the sample in the MPC®-1 is allowed to stand motionless for more than 10 seconds, remove the flat-sided tube from the MPC®-1, shake the tube to resuspend all material, replace the sample tube in the MPC®-1 and repeat Section 13.3.2.9 before continuing to Section 13.3.2.11.

  • Return the MPC®-1 to the upright position, sample tube vertical, with

cap at top. Immediately remove the cap and, keeping the flat side of the tube on top, pour off all of the supernatant from the tube held in the MPC®-1 into a suitable container. Do not shake the tube and do not remove the tube from MPC®-1 during this step. Allow more supernatant to settle; aspirate additional supernatant with pipette.

  • Remove the sample tube from the MPC®-1 and resuspend the sample in

0.5 mL 1X SL-buffer-A (prepared from 10X SL-buffer-A stock—supplied). Mix very gently to resuspend all material in the tube. Do not vortex.

  • Quantitatively transfer (transfer followed by two rinses) all the liquid

from the sample tube to a labeled, 1.5-mL microcentrifuge tube. Use 0.5 mL of 1X SL-buffer-A to perform the first rinse and 0.5 mL of 1X SL- buffer-A for the second rinse.  Allow the flat-sided sample tube to sit for  a minimum of 1 minute after transfer of the second rinse volume, then use a pipette to collect any residual volume that drips down to the bottom of the tube to ensure that as much sample volume is recovered as possible.

Ensure that all of the liquid and beads are transferred.

  • Place the microcentrifuge tube into the second magnetic particle concentrator (MPC®-M or MPC®-S), with its magnetic strip in
  • Without removing the microcentrifuge tube from MPC®-M, gently

rock/roll the tube through 180° by hand. Continue for approximately 1 minute with approximately one 180° roll/rock per second. At the end of this step, the beads should produce a distinct brown dot at the back of the tube.

  • Immediately aspirate the supernatant from the tube and cap held in the

MPC®-M. If more than one sample is being processed, conduct three 90° rock/roll actions before removing the supernatant from each tube. Take care not to disturb the material attached to the wall of the tube adjacent to the magnet. Do not shake the tube. Do not remove the tube from MPC®- M while conducting these steps.

  • Dissociation of beads/oocyst/cyst complex

NOTE:  Two acid dissociations are required.

  • Remove the magnetic strip from the MPC®-M.
  • Add 50 µL of 1 N HCl, then vortex at the highest setting for approximately 50 seconds.

NOTE: The laboratory must use 0.1-N standards purchased directly from a vendor, rather than adjusting the normality in-house.

 

 

 

49                                                      December 2005

 

  • Place the tube in the MPC®-M without the magnetic strip in place and

allow to stand in a vertical position for at least 10 minutes at room temperature.

  • Vortex vigorously for approximately 30
  • Ensure that all of the sample is at the base of the tube. Place the microcentrifuge tube in the MPC®-M.
  • Replace magnetic strip in MPC®-M and allow the tube to stand

undisturbed for a minimum of 10 seconds.

  • Prepare a well slide for sample screening and label the
  • Add 5 µL of 0 N NaOH to the sample wells of two well slides (add 10

µL to the sample well of one well slide if the volume from the two required dissociations will be added to the same slide).

NOTE: The laboratory must use 1.0-N standards purchased directly from a vendor rather than adjusting the normality in-house.

  • Without removing the microcentrifuge tube from the MPC®-M, transfer

all of the sample from the microcentrifuge tube in the MPC®-M to the sample well with the NaOH. Do not disturb the beads at the back wall of the tube. Ensure that all of the fluid is transferred.

  • Do not discard the beads or microcentrifuge tube after transferring the

volume from the first acid dissociation to the well slide. Perform the steps in Sections 13.3.3.1 through 13.3.3.9 a second time. The volume from the second dissociation can be added to the slide containing the volume from the first dissociation, or can be applied to a second slide.

NOTE: The wells on Dynal Spot-On slides are likely to be too small to accommodate the volumes from both dissociations.

  • Record the date and time the purified sample was applied to the slide(s).
  • Air-dry the sample on the well slide(s). Because temperature and

humidity vary from laboratory to laboratory, no minimum time is specified. However, the laboratory must take care to ensure that the sample has dried completely before staining to prevent losses during the rinse steps. A slide warmer set at 35°C to 42°C also can be used.

  • Tips for minimizing carry-over of debris onto microscope slides after IMS
  • Make sure the resuspended pellet is fully homogenized before placing the tube in the MPC®-1 or MPC®-M to avoid trapping “clumps” or a dirty layer between the beads and the side of the
  • When using the MPC®-1 magnet, make sure that the tube is snugged flat against the magnet. Push the tube flat if necessary. Sometimes the magnet is not flush with the outside of the holder and, therefore, the attraction between the beads and the magnet is not as strong as it should be. However, it can be difficult to determine this if you do not have more than one MPC®-1 to make
  • After the supernatant has been poured off at Section 13.3.2.11, leave the tube in the MPC®-1 and allow time for any supernatant remaining in the tube to settle down to the bottom. Then aspirate the settled supernatant and associated particles from the bottom of the tube. The same can be done at Section 13.3.2.16 with the microcentrifuge

December 2005                                        50

  • An additional rinse can also be performed at Section 13.3.2.11. After the supernatant has been poured off and any settled material is aspirated off the bottom, leave the tube in the MPC®-1 and add an additional 10 mL of reagent water or PBS to the tube and repeat Sections 13.3.2.9 and 13.3.2.11. Although labs have reported successfully using this technique to reduce carryover, because the attraction between the MPC®-1 and the beads is not as great as the attraction between the MPC®-M and the beads,  the chances would be greater for loss of cysts and oocysts doing the rinse at this step instead of at Section 3.2.16.
  • After the supernatant has been aspirated from the tube at Section 13.3.2.16, add 0.1 mL of PBS, remove the tube from the MPC®-M, and resuspend. Repeat Sections

13.3.2.15 and 13.3.2.16.

  • Use a slide with the largest diameter well available to spread out the sample as much as

14.0            Sample Staining                                                                                  

NOTE: The sample must be stained within 72 hours of application of the purified sample to the slide.

  • Prepare positive and negative
    • For the positive control, pipette 10 µL of positive antigen or 200 to 400 intact oocysts and 200 to 400 cysts to the center of a
    • For the negative control, pipette 50 µL of PBS (Section 7.4.2.1) into the center of a well

and spread it over the well area with a pipette tip.

  • Air-dry the control slides (see Section 13.3.3.12 for guidance).

NOTE:  If the laboratory has a large batch of slides that will be examined over several

days, and is concerned that a single positive control may fade, due to multiple examinations, the laboratory should prepare multiple control slides with the batch of field slides and alternate between the positive controls when performing the positive control check.

  • Follow manufacturer’s instructions in applying stain to
  • Place the slides in a humid chamber in the dark and incubate at room temperature for approximately 30 minutes. The humid chamber consists of a tightly sealed plastic container containing damp paper towels on top of which the slides are
  • Remove slides from humid chamber and allow condensation to evaporate, if
  • Apply one drop of wash buffer (prepared according to the manufacturer’s instructions [Section 7.6]) to each well. Tilt each slide on a clean paper towel, long edge Gently aspirate the excess detection reagent from below the well using a clean Pasteur pipette or absorb with paper towel or other absorbent material placed at edge of slide. Avoid disturbing the sample.
  • Apply 50 µL of 4′,6-diamidino-2-phenylindole (DAPI) staining solution (Section 7.7.2) to each well. Allow to stand at room temperature for a minimum of 1 minute. (The solution concentration may be increased up to 1 µg/mL if fading/diffusion of DAPI staining is encountered, but the staining solution must be tested first on expendable environmental samples to confirm that staining intensity is )
  • Apply one drop of wash buffer (prepared according to the manufacturer’s instructions [Section 7.6]) to each well. Tilt each slide on a clean paper towel, long edge Gently aspirate the excess DAPI staining solution from below the well using a clean Pasteur pipette or absorb with paper towel or other absorbent material placed at edge of slide. Avoid disturbing the sample.

51                                                      December 2005

 

 

NOTE: If using the MeriFluor® Cryptosporidium/Giardia (Section 7.6.1), do not allow slides to dry completely.

  • Add mounting medium (Section 7.8) to each
  • Apply a cover slip. Use a tissue to remove excess mounting fluid from the edges of the coverslip. Seal the edges of the coverslip onto the slide using clear nail
  • Record the date and time that staining was completed on the bench sheet. If slides will not be read immediately, store in a humid chamber in the dark between 1°C and 10°C until ready for examination.

15.0            Examination                                                                                        

NOTE:  Although immunofluorescence assay (FA) and 4′,6-diamidino-2-phenylindole

(DAPI) and differential interference contrast (DIC) microscopy examination should be performed immediately after staining is complete, laboratories have up to 168 hours (7 days) from completion of sample staining to complete the examination and verification of samples. However, if fading/diffusion of FITC or DAPI fluorescence is noticed, the laboratory must reduce this holding time. In addition the laboratory may adjust the concentration of the DAPI staining solution (Sections 7.7.2) so that fading/diffusion does not occur.

  • Scanning technique: Scan each well in a systematic fashion. An up-and-down or a side-to-side scanning pattern may be used (Figure 4).
  • Examination using immunofluorescence assay (FA), 4′,6-diamidino-2-phenylindole (DAPI) staining characteristics, and differential interference contrast (DIC) microscopy. The minimum

            magnification requirements for each type of examination are noted below.                               

NOTE: All characterization (DAPI and DIC) and size measurements must be determined using 1000X magnification and reported to the nearest 0.5 µm.

Record examination results for Cryptosporidium oocysts on a Cryptosporidium examination form; record examination results for Giardia cysts on a Giardia  examination results form. All organisms that meet the criteria specified in Sections 15.2.2 and 15.2.3, less atypical organisms specifically identified as non-target organisms by DIC or DAPI (e.g. possessing spikes, stalks, appendages, pores, one or two large nuclei filling the cell, red fluorescing chloroplasts, crystals, spores, etc), must be reported.

  • Positive and negative staining control. Positive and negative staining controls must be acceptable before proceeding with examination of field sample
    • Each analyst must characterize a minimum of three Cryptosporidium

oocysts and three Giardia cysts on the positive staining control slide before examining field sample slides. This characterization must be performed by each analyst during each microscope examination session. FITC examination must be conducted at a minimum of 200X total magnification, DAPI examination must be conducted at a minimum of 400X, and DIC examination and size measurements must be conducted at a minimum of 1000X. Size, shape, and DIC and DAPI characteristics of three Cryptosporidium oocysts and three Giardia cysts must be recorded by the analyst on a microscope log. The analyst also must indicate on each sample examination form whether the positive staining control was acceptable.

December 2005                                        52

  • Examine the negative staining control to confirm that it does not contain

any oocysts or cysts (Section 14.1). Indicate on each sample examination form whether the negative staining control was acceptable.

  • If the positive staining control contains oocysts and cysts within the

expected range and at the appropriate fluorescence for both FA and DAPI, and the negative staining control does not contain any oocysts or cysts (Section 14.1), proceed to Sections 15.2.2 and 15.2.3.

  • Sample examination—Cryptosporidium
    • FITC examination (the analyst must use a minimum of 200X total

magnification). Use epifluorescence to scan the entire well for apple- green fluorescence of oocyst and cyst shapes. When brilliant apple-green fluorescing ovoid or spherical objects 4 to 6 µm in diameter are observed with brightly highlighted edges, increase magnification to 400X and switch the microscope to the UV filter block for DAPI (Section 15.2.2.2), then to DIC (Section 15.2.2.3) at 1000X.

  • DAPI fluorescence examination (the analyst must use a minimum of

400X total magnification). Using the UV filter block for DAPI, the object will exhibit one of the following characteristics:

  • Light blue internal staining (no distinct nuclei) with a green rim
  • Intense blue internal staining
  • Up to four distinct, sky-blue nuclei

Look for atypical DAPI fluorescence, e.g., more than four stained nuclei, size of stained nuclei, and wall structure and color. Record oocysts in category (a) as DAPI-negative; record oocysts in categories (b) and (c) as DAPI-positive.

  • DIC examination (the analyst must use a minimum of 1000X total

magnification [oil immersion lens]). Using DIC, look for external or internal morphological characteristics atypical of Cryptosporidium oocysts (e.g., spikes, stalks, appendages, pores, one or two large nuclei filling the cell, red fluorescing chloroplasts, crystals, spores, etc.) (adapted from Reference 20.10). If atypical structures are not observed, then categorize each apple-green fluorescing object as:

  • An empty Cryptosporidium oocyst
  • Cryptosporidium oocyst with amorphous structure
  • Cryptosporidium oocyst with internal structure (one to four sporozoites/oocyst)

Using 1000X total magnification, record the shape, measurements (to the nearest 0.5 µm), and number of sporozoites (if applicable) for each apple- green fluorescing object meeting the size and shape characteristics.

Although not a defining characteristic, surface oocyst folds may be observed in some specimens.

  • A positive result is a Cryptosporidium oocyst which exhibits typical IFA

fluorescence, typical size and shape and exhibits nothing atypical on IFA, DAPI fluorescence, or DIC microscopy. A positive result must be characterized and assigned to one of the DAPI and DIC categories in Sections 15.2.2.2 and 15.2.2.3.

  • Sample examination—Giardia
    • FITC examination (the analyst must use a minimum of 200X total magnification). When brilliant apple-green fluorescing round to ovoid

53                                                      December 2005

 

objects (8 – 18 µm long by 5 – 15 µm wide) are observed with brightly highlighted edges, increase magnification to 400X and switch the microscope to the UV filter block for DAPI (Section 15.2.3.2) then to DIC (Section 15.2.3.3) at 1000X.

  • DAPI fluorescence examination (the analyst must use a minimum of

400X total magnification). Using the UV filter block for DAPI, the object will exhibit one or more of the following characteristics:

  • Light blue internal staining (no distinct nuclei) and a green rim
  • Intense blue internal staining
  • Two to four sky-blue nuclei

Look for atypical DAPI fluorescence, e.g., more than four stained nuclei, size of stained nuclei, and wall structure and color. Record cysts in category (a) as DAPI negative; record cysts in categories (b) and (c) as DAPI positive.

  • DIC examination (the analyst must use a minimum of 1000X total

magnification [oil immersion lens]). Using DIC microscopy, look for external or internal morphological characteristics atypical of Giardia cysts (e.g., spikes, stalks, appendages, pores, one or two large nuclei filling the cell, red fluorescing chloroplasts, crystals, spores, etc.) (adapted from Reference 20.10). If atypical structures are not observed, then categorize each object meeting the criteria specified in Sections

15.2.3.1 through 15.2.3.3 as one of the following, based on DIC examination:

  • An empty Giardia cyst
  • Giardia cyst with amorphous structure
  • Giardia cyst with one type of internal structure (nuclei, median body, or axonemes), or
  • Giardia cyst with more than one type of internal structure

Using 1000X total magnification, record the shape, measurements (to the nearest 0.5 µm), and number of nuclei and presence of median body or axonemes (if applicable) for each apple-green fluorescing object meeting the size and shape characteristics.

  • A positive result is a Giardia cyst which exhibits typical IFA

fluorescence, typical size and shape and exhibits nothing atypical on IFA, DAPI fluorescence, or DIC microscopy. A positive result must be characterized and assigned to one of the DAPI and DIC categories in Section 15.2.3.2 and 15.2.3.3.

  • Record the date and time that sample examination was completed on the examination form.
  • Report Cryptosporidium and Giardia concentrations as oocysts/L and cysts/L,

respectively.

  • Record analyst name

16.0            Analysis of Complex Samples

  • Some samples may contain high levels (>1000/L) of oocysts and cysts and/or interfering organisms, substances, or materials. Some samples may clog the filter (Section 12.0); others will not allow separation of the oocysts and cysts from the retentate or eluate; and others may contain materials that preclude or confuse microscopic

December 2005                                        54

  • If the sample holding time has not been exceeded and a full-volume sample cannot be filtered, dilute an aliquot of sample with reagent water and filter this smaller aliquot (Section 12.0). This dilution must be recorded and reported with the
  • If the holding times for the sample and for microscopic examination of the cleaned up retentate/eluate have been exceeded, the site should be re-sampled. If this is not possible, the results should be qualified
  • Some samples may adhere to the centrifuge tube walls. The use of siliconized or low-adhesion centrifuge tubes (Fisherbrand siliconized/low retention microcentrifuge tubes, 02-681-320 or equivalent) may reduce adhesion. Alternately, rinse centrifuge tubes with PBST elution buffer or Sigmacote® prior to

17.0            Method Performance

  • Method acceptance criteria are shown in Tables 3 and 4 in Section 21.0. The initial and ongoing precision and recovery criteria are based on the results of spiked reagent water samples analyzed during the Information Collection Rule Supplemental Surveys (Reference 20.11). The matrix spike and matrix spike duplicate criteria are based on spiked source water data generated during the interlaboratory validation study of Method 1623 involving 11 laboratories and 11 raw surface water matrices across the U.S. (Reference 14).

NOTE:  Some sample matrices may prevent the MS acceptance criteria in Tables 3 and 4

to be met. An assessment of the distribution of MS recoveries across 430 MS samples from 87 sites during the ICR Supplemental Surveys is provided in Table 5.

 

18.0            Pollution Prevention

  • The solutions and reagents used in this method pose little threat to the environment when recycled and managed
  • Solutions and reagents should be prepared in volumes consistent with laboratory use to minimize the volume of expired materials that need to be

19.0            Waste Management

  • It is the laboratory’s responsibility to comply with all federal, state, and local regulations govern- ing waste management, particularly the biohazard and hazardous waste identification rules and land disposal restrictions, and to protect the air, water, and land by minimizing and controlling all releases from fume hoods and bench operations. Compliance with all sewage discharge permits and regulations is also required. An overview of these requirements can be found in the Environmental Management Guide for Small Laboratories (EPA 233-B-98-001).
  • Samples, reference materials, and equipment known or suspected to have viable oocysts or cysts attached or contained must be sterilized prior to
  • For further information on waste management, consult The Waste Management Manual for Laboratory Personnel and Less is Better: Laboratory Chemical Management for Waste Reduction, both available from the American Chemical Society’s Department of Government Relations and Science Policy, 1155 16th Street N.W., Washington, D.C.

20.0            References

  • Morgan-Ryan, UM, A. Fall, L.A. Ward, N. Hijjawi, Sulaiman, R. Fayer, R.C.Thompson, M. Olson, A. Lal, L. Xiao. 2002. Cryptosporidium hominis n. sp. (Apicomplexa: Cryptosporidiidae from Homo sapiens). Journal Eukaryot Microbiol 49(6):433-450.
  • Adam, R.D. 2001. Biology of Giardia lamblia. Clinical Microbiology Review 14(3):447-475.

55                                                      December 2005

 

  • Rodgers, Mark R., Flanigan, Debbie J., and Jakubowski, Walter, 1995. Applied and Environmental Microbiology 61 (10), 3759-3763.
  • Fleming, Diane O., et al.(eds.), Laboratory Safety: Principles and Practices, 2nd edition.1995. ASM Press, Washington, DC
  • “Working with Carcinogens,” DHEW, PHS, CDC, NIOSH, Publication 77-206, (1977).
  • “OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,” OSHA 2206, 29 CFR 1910 (1976).
  • “Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,” ACS Committee on Chemical Safety (1979).
  • APHA, AWWA, and WEF. 2005. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater; 21th American Public Health Association, American Water Works Association, Washington, D.C.
  • USEPA 2005. Manual for the Certification of Laboratories Analyzing Drinking Water; Criteria and Procedures; Quality Assurance. Fifth Edition. EPA 815-R-05-004. Office of Ground Water and Drinking Water, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 26 West Martin Luther King Drive, Cincinnati, OH
  • ICR Microbial Laboratory Manual, EPA/600/R-95/178, National Exposure Research Laboratory, Office of Research and Development, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 26 Martin Luther King Drive, Cincinnati, OH 45268 (1996).
  • Connell, K., C.C. Rodgers, H.L. Shank-Givens, J Scheller, L Pope, and K. Miller, 2000.

Building a Better Protozoa Data Set. Journal AWWA, 92:10:30.

  • “Envirochek™ Sampling Capsule,” PN 32915, Gelman Sciences, 600 South Wagner Road, Ann Arbor, MI 48103-9019 (1996).
  • “Dynabeads® GC-Combo,” Dynal Microbiology R&D, P.O. Box 8146 Dep., 0212 Oslo, Norway (September 1998, Revision no. 01).
  • Results of the Interlaboratory Method Validation Study for Determination of Cryptosporidium and Giardia Using USEPA Method 1623, EPA-821-R-01-028. Office of Water, Office of Science and Technology, Engineering and Analysis Division, Washington, DC (2001).
  • Implementation and Results of the Information Collection Rule Supplemental Surveys. EPA-815-R-01-003. Office of Water, Office of Ground Water and Drinking Water, Standards and Risk Management Division, Washington, DC (2001).
  • Connell, K., J. Scheller, K. Miller, and C.C. Rodgers, 2000. Performance of Methods 1622 and 1623 in the ICR Supplemental Surveys. Proceedings, American Water Works Association Water Quality Technology Conference, November 5 – 9, 2000, Salt Lake City,

December 2005                                        56

21.0  Tables and Figures

Table 1. Method Holding Times (See Section 8.2 for details)

Sample Processing Step Maximum Allowable Time between Breaks

(Samples should be processed as soon as possible)

Collection
Filtration
‘ Up to 96 hours are permitted between sample collection (if shipped to the laboratory as a bulk sample) or filtration (if filtered in the field) and initiation of elution
Elution  

 

 

These steps must be completed in 1 working day

Concentration
Purification
Application of purified sample to slide
Drying of sample
‘ Up to 72 hours are permitted from application of the purified sample to the slide to staining
Staining
‘ Up to 7 days are permitted between sample staining and examination
Examination

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

57                                                      December 2005

 

Table 2.      Tier 1 and Tier 2 Validation/Equivalency Demonstration Requirements

Test Description Tier 1 modification(1) Tier 2 modification(2)
IPR

(Section 9.4)

4 replicates of spiked reagent water Required. Must be accompanied by a method blank.  

Required per laboratory

Method blank (Section 9.6) Unspiked reagent water  

Required

 

Required per laboratory

 

MS

(Section 9.5.1)

 

 

Spiked matrix water

Required on each water to which the modification will be applied and on every 20th sample of that water thereafter. Must be accompanied by an unspiked field sample collected at the same time as the MS sample  

 

Not required

MS/MSD

(Section 9.5)

2 replicates of spiked matrix water Recommended, but not required. Must be accompanied by an unspiked field sample collected at the same time as the MS sample Required per laboratory. Each laboratory must analyze a different water.
  • If a modification will be used only in one laboratory, these tests must be performed and the results must meet all of the QC acceptance criteria in the method (these tests also are required the first time a laboratory uses the validated version of the method)
  • If nationwide approval of a modification is sought for one type of water matrix (such as surface water), a minimum of 3 laboratories must perform the tests and the results from each lab individually must meet all QC acceptance criteria in the method. If more than 3 laboratories are used in a study, a minimum of 75% of the laboratories must meet all QC acceptance

NOTE:  The initial precision and recovery and ongoing precision and recovery (OPR)

acceptance criteria listed in Tables 3 and 4 are based on results from 293 Cryptosporidium OPR samples and 186 Giardia OPR samples analyzed by six laboratories during the Information Collection Rule Supplemental Surveys (Reference 20.15). The matrix spike acceptance criteria are based on data generated through interlaboratory validation of Method 1623 (Reference 20.14).

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

December 2005                                        58

Table 3. Quality Control Acceptance Criteria for Cryptosporidium

Performance test Section Acceptance criteria
Initial precision and recovery 9.4
Mean recovery (percent) 9.4.3 24 – 100
Precision (as maximum relative standard deviation) 9.4.3 55
Ongoing precision and recovery (percent) 9.7 11 – 100
Matrix spike/matrix spike duplicate (for method modifications) 9.5
Mean recovery1, 2 (as percent) 9.5.2.2 13 – 111
Precision (as maximum relative percent difference) 9.5.2.3 61
  • The acceptance criteria for mean MS/MSD recovery serves as the acceptance criteria for MS recovery during routine use of the method (Section 5.1).
  • Some sample matrices may prevent the acceptance criteria from being met. An assessment of the distribution of MS recoveries from multiple MS samples from 87 sites during the ICR Supplemental Surveys is provided in Table 5.

Table 4. Quality Control Acceptance Criteria for Giardia

Performance test Section Acceptance criteria
Initial precision and recovery 9.4
Mean recovery (percent) 9.4.3 24 – 100
Precision (as maximum relative standard deviation) 9.4.3 49
Ongoing precision and recovery (percent) 9.7 14 – 100
Matrix spike/matrix spike duplicate (for method modifications) 9.5
Mean recovery1,2 (as percent) 9.5.2.2 15 – 118
Precision (as maximum relative percent difference) 9.5.2.3 30
  • The acceptance criteria for mean MS/MSD recovery serves as the acceptance criteria for MS recovery during routine use of the method (Section 5.1).
  • Some sample matrices may prevent the acceptance criteria from being met. An assessment of the distribution of MS recoveries across multiple MS samples from 87 sites during the ICR Supplemental Surveys is provided in Table

59                                                      December 2005

 

Table 5. Distribution of Matrix Spike Recoveries from Multiple Samples Collected from 87 Source Waters During the ICR Supplemental Surveys (Adapted from Reference 20.16)

 

MS Recovery Range

Percent of 430 Cryptosporidium MS Samples in Recovery Range Percent of 270 Giardia MS Samples in Recovery Range
<10% 6.7% 5.2%
>10% – 20% 6.3% 4.8%
>20% – 30% 14.9% 7.0%
>30% – 40% 14.2% 8.5%
>40% – 50% 18.4% 17.4%
>50% – 60% 17.4% 16.3%
>60% – 70% 11.2% 16.7%
>70% – 80% 8.4% 14.1%
>80% – 90% 2.3% 6.3%
>90% 0.2% 3.7%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

December 2005                                        60

 

 

Figure 1.  Hemacytometer Platform Ruling. Squares 1, 2, 3, and 4 are used to count stock suspensions of Cryptosporidium oocysts and Giardia cysts (after Miale, 1967)

 

 

 

 

61                                                      December 2005

 

 

 

Figure 2.  Manner of Counting Oocysts and Cysts in 1

Square mm. Dark organisms are counted and light organisms are omitted (after Miale, 1967).

December 2005                                        62

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Figure 3a. Filtration Systems for Envirochek™ or Envirochek™HV Capsule (unpressurized source – top, pressurized source – bottom)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

63                                                      December 2005

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Figure 3b. Filtration Systems for Filta-Max® filters (unpressurized source – top, pressurized source – bottom)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

December 2005                                        64

 

 

 

 

 

Figure 4.   Methods for Scanning a Well Slide

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

65                                                      December 2005

 

22.0            Glossary of Definitions and Purposes

 

These definitions and purposes are specific to this method but have been conformed to common usage as much as possible.

  • Units of weight and measure and their abbreviations
    • Symbols

°C        degrees Celsius

µL        microliter

<          less than

>          greater than

%         percent

  • Alphabetical characters cm centimeter

g          gram

G         acceleration due to gravity hr            hour

ID        inside diameter

  1. inch

L          liter

m         meter

MCS    microscope cleaning solution mg            milligram

mL       milliliter

mm      millimeter

mM      millimolar

N         normal; gram molecular weight of solute divided by hydrogen equivalent of solute, per liter of solution

RSD     relative standard deviation

sr               standard deviation of recovery X            mean percent recovery

  • Definitions, acronyms, and abbreviations (in alphabetical order)

Analyst—The analyst should have at least 2 years of college in microbiology or equivalent or closely related field. The analyst also should have a minimum of 6 months of continuous bench experience with Cryptosporidium and IFA microscopy. The analyst should have a minimum of 3 months experience using EPA Method 1622 and/or EPA Method 1623 and should have successfully analyzed a minimum of 50 samples using EPA Method 1622 and/or EPA Method 1623.

Analyte—A protozoan parasite tested for by this method. The analytes in this method are

Cryptosporidium and Giardia.

Axoneme—An internal flagellar structure that occurs in some protozoa, such as GiardiaSpironucleous, and Trichonmonas.

Cyst—A phase or a form of an organism produced either in response to environmental conditions or as a normal part of the life cycle of the organism. It is characterized by a thick and environmentally resistant cell wall.

December 2005                                        66

Flow cytometer—A particle-sorting instrument capable of counting protozoa.

Immunomagnetic separation (IMS)—A purification procedure that uses microscopic, magnetically responsive particles coated with an antibodies targeted to react with a specific pathogen in a fluid stream. Pathogens are selectively removed from other debris using a magnetic field.

Initial precision and recovery (IPR)—Four aliquots of spiking suspension analyzed to establish the ability to generate acceptable precision and accuracy. An IPR is performed prior to the first time this method is used and any time the method or instrumentation is modified.

Laboratory blank—See Method blank

Laboratory control sample (LCS)—See Ongoing precision and recovery (OPR) standard

Matrix spike (MS)—A sample prepared by adding a known quantity of organisms to a specified amount of sample matrix for which an independent estimate of target analyte concentration is available. A matrix spike is used to determine the effect of the matrix on a method’s recovery efficiency.

May—This action, activity, or procedural step is neither required nor prohibited. May not—This action, activity, or procedural step is prohibited.

Median bodies—Prominent, dark-staining, paired organelles consisting of microtubules and found in the posterior half of Giardia. In G. intestinalis (from humans), these structures often have a claw-hammer shape, while in G. muris (from mice), the median bodies are round.

Method blank—An aliquot of reagent water that is treated exactly as a sample, including exposure to all glassware, equipment, solvents, and procedures that are used with samples. The method blank is used to determine if analytes or interferences are present in the laboratory environment, the reagents, or the apparatus.

Must—This action, activity, or procedural step is required. Negative control—See Method blank

Nucleus—A membrane-bound organelle containing genetic material. Nuclei are a prominent internal structure seen both in Cryptosporidium oocysts and Giardia cysts. In Cryptosporidium oocysts, there is one nucleus per sporozoite. One to four nuclei can be seen in Giardia cysts.

Oocyst—The encysted zygote of some sporozoa; e.g., Cryptosporidium. The oocyst is a phase or form of the organism produced as a normal part of the life cycle of the organism. It is characterized by a thick and environmentally resistant outer wall.

Ongoing precision and recovery (OPR) standard—A method blank spiked with known quantities of analytes. The OPR is analyzed exactly like a sample. Its purpose is to assure that the results produced by the laboratory remain within the limits specified in this method for precision and recovery.

Oocyst and cyst spiking suspension—See Spiking suspension Oocyst and cyst stock suspension—See Stock suspension

67                                                      December 2005

 

Positive control—See Ongoing precision and recovery standard

Principal analyst—The principal analyst (may not be applicable to all monitoring programs) should have a BS/BA in microbiology or closely related field and a minimum of 1 year of continuous bench experience with Cryptosporidium and IFA microscopy. The principal analyst also should have a minimum of 6 months experience using EPA Method 1622 and/or EPA Method 1623 and should have analyzed a minimum of 100 samples using EPA Method 1622 and/or EPA Method 1623.

PTFE—Polytetrafluoroethylene

Quantitative transfer—The process of transferring a solution from one container to another using a pipette in which as much solution as possible is transferred, followed by rinsing of the walls of the source container with a small volume of rinsing solution (e.g., reagent water, buffer, etc.), followed by transfer of the rinsing solution, followed by a second rinse and transfer.

Reagent water—Water demonstrated to be free from the analytes of interest and potentially interfering substances at the method detection limit for the analyte.

Reagent water blank—see Method blank

Relative standard deviation (RSD)—The standard deviation divided by the mean times 100. RSD—See Relative standard deviation

Should—This action, activity, or procedural step is suggested but not required.

Spiking suspension—Diluted stock suspension containing the organism(s) of interest at a concentration appropriate for spiking samples.

Sporozoite—A motile, infective stage of certain protozoans; e.g., Cryptosporidium. There are four sporozoites in each Cryptosporidium oocyst, and they are generally banana-shaped.

Stock suspension—A concentrated suspension containing the organism(s) of interest that is obtained from a source that will attest to the host source, purity, authenticity, and viability of the organism(s).

Technician—The technician filters samples, performs centrifugation, elution, concentration, and purification using IMS, and places purified samples on slides for microscopic examination, but does not perform microscopic protozoan detection and identification. No minimum education or experience requirements with Cryptosporidium and IFA microscopy apply to the technician. The technician should have at least 3 months of experience in filter extraction and processing of protozoa samples by EPA Method 1622/1623 and should have successfully processed a minimum of 50 samples using EPA Method 1622/1623.

December 2005                                        68